TNC355 Lotse

List of current i&sues
Sheet Issue Sheet Issue Sheet Issue

0 April 4. 89
1 November 21.89
2 April 4. 89
3 Februan/ 8. 90
4 Februan/ 8. 90
5 February 8, 90
6 November 21.89
7 April 4. 89
8 February 8. 90
9 November 21.89
c 10 November 21,89
c
List of current issues
Sheet ISSW Sheet Sheet Issue

INO/l April 4, 89
INl/l April 4. 89
_ IWl April 4, 89
IN3/1 April 4, 89
Issue
April 4. 89
List of current
Sheet ISSUe Sheet Issue Sheet Issue

TO/l November 21, 89 T5/1 April 4. 89
TO/2 April 4, 89 T5/2 November 21. 89
T5/3 April 4. 89
Tl/l November 21, 89
T5/4 April 4. 89
-n/2 November 21, 89
T5/5 April 4. 89
TV3 November 21, 89
T5/6 April 4. 89
WI November 21,89 T5/7 Apiil 4. 89
W2 November 21.89 T5/8 April 4. 89
T2/2.1 November 21.89
T6ll November 21. 89
T2l2.2 November 21.89
T6/2 April 4. 89
T2/3 Februan/ 8. 90
0 T3/1 November~21. 89
l-711 April 4. 89
T7/2 April 4, 89
T3ll.l November 21,89
T7/3 February 8, 90
T3/2 February 8. 90
n/4 February 8, 90
T313 November 21,89
T3/3.1 T7/5 February 8. 90
November 22 89
-V/6 April 4, 89
T313.2 April 4. 89
n/7 April 4, 89
T313.3 February 8, 90
T7/8 November 21.89
T3l3.4 November 21.89
n/9 November 21,89
T313.5 April 4, 89 ?
T3/3.6 November 21.89 T8ll November 21. 89
T314 April 4. 89 T8/2 February 8. 90
T3/5 April 4, 89
T3/6 April 4, 89
c T3/7
T3/8
April 4, 89
April 4. 89
T3/9 April 4. 89
T3/10 April 4. 89
T3lll November 21, 89
T3/12 April 4, 89
T3/13 April 4, 89
T3/14 April 4, 89
T3/15 April 4, 89
T4/1 April 4, 89
T4/2 April 4, 89
T4/3 November 21, 89
T414 November 21, 89
T4/5 February 8, 90
T4/6 February 8. 90
Issue
contenta
February 8. 90
Sheet Issue Sheet Issue Sheet Issue

MO/l November 21,89
Ml/l April 4. 99
Ml/2 April 4. 89
Ml/3 April 4. 89
Ml/4 April 4. 89
Ml/5 April 4. 89
WI April 4. 89
W2 April 4, 89
WI3 April 4, 89
/ M3/1 February 8.90

M3/2 April 4, 89
M3f3 April 4, 89
M3/4 Februan/ 8. 90
M3/5 Februaly 8, 90
M3l5.1 April 4, 89
M3J5.2 April 4. 89
M3/6 November 21,89
M316.1 November 21.89
M3f7 April 4, 89
M3/8 April 4, 89
M3/9 April 4. 89
M3/10 April 4. 89
M3/11 April 4, 89
M3fl2 April 4. 89
M3/13 April 4. 89
M3/14 April 4. 89
M4/1 April 4. 89
M5/1 April 4. 89
M5/2 April 4. 89
Me/l April 4. 89
M7ll February 8, 90
MJ/2 February 8. 90
M8/1 February 8, 90
M8/1 .I February 8. 90
M8f2 February 8, 90
Iewe
February 8, 90
Sheet Issue Sheet ISSUe Sheet Issue

CO/l April 4, 89 W6.3 April 4. 89 c4/11 April 4, 89
co/2 April 4, 89 C2/7 November 21,89 C4/12 April 4, 89
co/3 April 4, 89 Q/8 April 4. 89 WI3 April 4. 89
Cl/l April 4. 89 c2/9 April 4. 89 WI4 April 4. 89
Cl/2 April 4. 89 C2llO April 4. 89 WI5 April 4, 89
Cl/3 April 4. 89 cm 1 April 4. 89 WI6 April 4, 89
Cl/4 April 4, 89 u/l2 April 4, 89 lx/l7 April 4, 89
Cl/5 April 4, 89 u/13 April 4. 89 C4/18 April 4, 89
Cl/6 April 4. 89 WI4 April 4, 89 c4/19 April 4, 89
Cl/7 April 4. 89 Q/15 April 4. 89 C4/20 April 4. 89
Cl/8 November 21.89 ‘X/l 6 April 4. 89 C4/21 April 4, 89
Cl/9 November 21.89 a/l 7 April 4. 89 C4/22 April 4. 89
Cl/IO November 21.89 C4/23 April 4. 89
WI February 8. 90
Cl/l 1 November 21.89 C4/24 April 4. 89
C3/2 April 4, 89
Cl/12 Februen/ 8. 90 C4/25 April 4. 89
c3/3 April 4, 89
Cl/l3 April 4, 89 ‘Z/26 April 4. 89
c3/4 April 4, 89
Cl/14 April 4, 89 C4/27 April 4. 89
c3/5 April 4. 89
Cl/l 5 April 4, 89 C4/28 April 4. 89
C3/6 April 4, 89
Cl/l6 April 4, 89 c4/29 April 4. 89
c3/7 April 4, 89
Cl/l 7 November 21,89 C4/30 April 4. 89
C3/8 April 4, 89
Cl/l8 April 4, 89 C4/31 April 4. 89
c3/9 November 21. 89
Cl/19 April 4, 89 C4/32 April 4, 89
c3/10 April 4, 89
Cl/20 February 8, 90 C4/33 April 4, 89
c3/11 April 4, 89
Cl/21 November 21, 89 C4/34 April 4, 89
c3/12 February 8, 90
Cl/22 April 4. 89 01135 April 4, 89
c3/13 April 4. 89
Clf22.1 April 4. 89
c3/14 April 4. 89 c5/1 April 4, 89
Cl/23 April 4. 89
c3/15 April 4. 89 C5/2 April 4, 89
Cl/24 April 4. 89
C3/16 April 4. 89 c5/3 April 4, 89
Cl/25 April 4. 89
c3/17 April 4. 89 c5/4 April 4, 89
Cl/26 April 4. 89
c5/5 November 21.89
Cl/27 April 4. 89 WI April 4. 89
C5/6 April 4, 89
Cl/28 April 4. 89 w2 April 4, 89
C4l3 April 4. 89 c5/7 April 4, 89
WI April 4. 89 C5/8 April 4, 89
w4 April 4. 89
c2/2 April 4. 89 c5/9 April 4, 89
C4/5 April 4. 89
C2/3 April 4. 89 c5/10 April 4. 89
w5.1 April 4. 89
u/4 November 21. 89
W6 April 4. 89
w5 November 21, 89
w7 April 4. 89
‘36 November 21. 89
C4/8 April 4. 89
W6.1 Februaw 8.90
a/9 April 4. 89
Q/6.2 April 4, 89
c4/10 April 4. 89
ISSUe
Februan/ 8. 90 contente
I
Sheet I sue Shee Issue Sheet Issue
UOll pril 4; 89
Ul/l vember 21.89

u1/2 ril 4. 89
u1/3 ril 4. 89
Ull4 ril 4, 89
u1/5 ril 4, 89
WI ril 4, 89
w2 ril 4. 89
w3 ril 4. 89
) U3l1
U3/2 bp ril 4.89
prll 4.89
List current issue
I I
Sheet I sue Shee Sheet

DO/l hpril 4; 89
Dl/l
Dl/2
D1/3
D1/4
D1/5
D1/8
DV7
Dll8
WI
’ D2Q
D2J3
D7J4
W6
D2/8
D2/7
D3/1
D3/2
AIssue
Dril 4, ,89 I
I I
Sheet I sue Shes Issue Sheet ISSW
m/i hpril4. 89 P3/2’ April 4. 89 P4/9 Febrway 8.90

m/2 P3/2 April 4.80 P4/10 April 4, 89
m/3 P3/2# AwIl 4. 88 P4/11 April 4. 89
Pi/l P3/2 April 4, 89 P4/12 April 4. 89

P3/31 April 4, 89 P4/13 April 4. 89
w/l P3/3 November 21,89 P4/14 April 4. 89
w/2 P3/3 April 4, 89
P5/1 April 4. 89
P2/3 P3/3, April 4, 89
P2/4 P3/3, April 4, 89 m/1 April 4. 89
W6 P3/3, April 4, 89 m/2 April 4. 89
WS m/31 April 4, 89 Pw3 April 4. 89
P2/7 P3/3 November 21. 89 Pw3.1 April 4. 89
P2/8 P3/3; November 21,89 Fw4 April 4. 89
ml9 P3/3 April 4, 89 m/5 April 4. 89
P2/10 April 4, 89 m/e April 4, 89
P3/4
P2/11 pB/7 April 4, 89
P3/4 April 4. 89
P3/4, April 4. 88 ps/s April 4, 89
P3/1
P3/4 Aqil4. ~8B P6/9 April 4. 89
P3/2
P3/4 April 4. 89 m/10 April 4, 89
P3/3
P3/4! April 4. 89 m/1 1 April 4, 89
P3/4
P3/4 April 4. 89 P6/12 April 4. 89
P3/5
P3/4 April 4, 89 PW13 April 4, 89
W6
P3/4i Awil 4.,89 P6/14 April 4. 89
P3/7
m/4 April 4, 89 P6/15 April 4, 89
W8
m/9 m/51 April 4, 89 P7/1 April 4. 89
’ m/10 P3/5 April 4, 89 P7/2 April 4. 89
m/11 P3/5: November 21,89 P7/3 April 4. 89
P3/12 m/5: April 4, 89 P7/4 April 4. 89
P3/13 P3/5, April 4.89 P7/5 Agril 4. 89
P3/14 P3/5! April 4, 89
P3/15 P3/5f April 4. 89
P3/16 P4/1 April 4. 89
P3/17 P4/2 February 9, 90
P3/18 P4/3 April 4. 89
P3/19 P4/4 April 4. 89
P3/20 P4/5 February 8. 90
F3/21 P4/6 April 4. 89
P3/22 P4/7 April 4, 89
P3/23, P4/8 April 4. 89
, P3/24 P4/8. April 4. 89
P3/25 ovember 21. 69
bINue
Fe wan/ 8,90 I
Sheet ssue Shedi Sheet Issue
PsO/l ovember 21.89
PSI/l Uovembsr 21.89
PSVI Uovember 21,89

Pw2 Uovember 21,89
ps7J3 Uovember 21,89
psv4 Uovember 21, 89
Em Uovember 21.89
Em Uovember 2i. 89
Pw7 ovember 21,89
f=52/8 ovember 21,89
’ psv9 ovember 21.89
Pa/IO ovember 21.89
PS2/11 ovember 21.89
Fs2/12 ovember 21.89
Ps2/13 ovember 21.89
Ps2/14 ovember 21. 89
Pa/l5 ovember 21. 89
FS3/1 ovember 21, 89

PS3/2 ovember 21, 89
PS3/3 ovember 21, 89
PS3/4 ovember 21,89
PS3/5 kwember 21,89
PS3/6 November 21. 89
, Ewl November 21,89

PS4/2 November 21,89
Ps4/3 November 21.89
P.9414 November 21.89
ps4/5 November 21; 89
PS4/6 November 21.89
Section
Purpom of db manual IN1
Struotun of anurl
+
IN3
bD INUO
ril 4, 89 I
SOOtlOll
IN0 “;”
stion. electrtoal connection. commissioning and PLC-programming of the
101HEIDENHAIN TNC 365. Ever naehine tool buldar installing HLFlDENHAIN numerical controls can obtain
upbated to the ltiest technical kwel. it has been designed as a compilation

rents and extensions to the TNC, supplement sheets will be automatically
I menual in acarrdsnca with the filing instructions.
in issuing TNC-bulletins for ginal equipment manufacturers has now been superseded by this manual.
future sufspiiis of TNC-control: irillno longer be accompanfad by the individual instruction manuals for
acing and the PLC-description. I important infonnatlon for the machina tool builder is contained in this
tot iposeible to suppfy a copy with each control unit.
n of pages from this manual, or 18 part of the machine tool builder, for tha compilation of specific machine
is. of course, permitted.
strw
The
contents the manual are subdivided into
A basic own d of the contents is indicated 01 Ne!iling index (see Contents, pa@ 0).
A list of cant 3 is provided at the beginning c 3ch chapter detailing the indMdual sections.
byout of in nlatblleheete
Each informs I sheet has the following layout
Main secti
Sub-sectior
The heading aach sheet indicates the main s ion in bold let&and the specific topic beneath.
The title bloc the bottom of each sheet cwr s the date of issue, qhapter title, section number and page number.
This paging I sm enables easy insertion of b supplementary and exchange sheets.

contains a brief over v ef important emendmentsertd eddiiions. An instruction sheet,on filing is
both sheets should k sd into the ‘Llgdete information” chapter.
g instructions”-sheet.
Number of Insen fdllowing Number of

sheets ahwts sheeta
‘T I
Sheeta for the “Update information”-chapter art sdiin accordance with the@sue date. since these have no section and
page numbers in the title block.
ctions” should always be retair in the manual so that, in the event of enquiries, the latest issue level is
list of contents a “List of ( ‘am isauaa’. i.e. for ,,all., shreta &thin this manual, including the issue dates
also updated with every lplementary issue of ~informatlon.
We hope that {his manual will be of good servii
I I
Ieeur SWtlOll
pi oril 4. 89 I IN3 sp”
Contents
Section Page
Technical Data Tl 1
TNC 355B (Q) (Export version: TNC 355F (W)) Tl 1
TNC 355C (S) (Export version: TNC 355G (Y)) Tl 2
TNC 355CR (SR) (Export version: TNC 355GR (YR)) Tl 3
Hardware components T2 1
4&s contouring control with spindle orientation T2 1
5-axis contouring control without spindle orientation (until February 1989) T2 2
) 5-axis contouring control with spindle orientation (since March 1989) T2 2.1
Differences between TNC 355 variants T2 3
Connections T3 1
Connector locations on LE 3558 (Q) T3 1
Connectors on closed loop board of LE 3558 (Q) T3 2
Connector locations on LE 355C (S) T3 3.1
Connectors on closed loop board of LE 355C (S) T3 3.2
Connector locations on LE 355CR (SR) T3 3.4
Connectors on closed loop board of LE 355CR (SR) T3 3.5
Connectors on processor board T3 4
Connectors for input/output board PL 300 T3 0
Connectors for TNC-keyboard unit TE,355 T3 11
Connectors for HEIDENHAIN machine operating panel MB 301 T3 13
Connectors for visual display unit BE 4128 T3 14
Technical data of PLC-inputs and outputs T3 15
Linear and btary encoders T4
Linear and rotan/ encoders for sinusoidalinputs T4
Linear and rotan/ encoders for squarewave inputs T4
Issue Section me
Technical desoription
November 21. 89 TO 1
Contehts
‘age
Evslusthm
ojmforenoe
marks T5 1
Encoders with distance-coded reference marks T5 2
Linear encode s with one reference mark at the end of the traversing range T5 3
Cams for refe ence end position T5 4

1
Linear measur ment via ballscrew and rotary encoder T5 5
Aocseeorkw T6
Electronic hen wheel T6

0
, 3D-touch orode &stems T6
Dimensions ! T7
sofhusrs rvlow T8
NC-software umbers T8
?
NC-software rtleases T8
Ieeue Section ml@

Teohnicml dwcrlptlon 2
pril 4, 89 TO
I
Techn’ical data
5
TNC 3: 5B (Q) (Export version TNC 355F [WI)‘)
control veflip lNC 366 with visual display unit BE 4128 (12 inch. monochrome)
including programmable logic controller (PLC)
- lNC 3668 (F) = without PLC-board

- lNC 366Q (W) = additional inputs and output on PLC-board PL 300
- Contouring control for 4 axas including spindle orientation as a Sm sxis (cannot be
interpolated with other axes k linear
‘. interpolation in 3 out of 4 axes”. circular interpolation
in 2 out of 4 axes (only if 4’ axls is parallel to another linear axis: Contouring
programming with the 4m axis conditionally possible), helical interpolation”
- Contouring control for 6 axes, without spindle orientation (until Februarv 19891
-rem me+ory Semi-conductor store for 32 NC-programs, with buffer battery backup, total blocks: 3100;
Programmable erase/edit protection
centrel tool he up to 99 tools, especially for toolchangers with flexible addressing
Max. trevem ng renge f 30000 mm or 1181 in.
Max. trevem ng speed 30 m/min or 1181 ipm’05’
Enoodem HEIDENHAIN incremental linear encoders (with or without distance-coded reference
marks), grating period 0.02/0.01 mm (or 0.1 mm for encoder input X5, connection via an
appropriate EXE-unit):
HEIDENHAIN rotary encoders
PLC-cycle time = 20 ms (22 ms for more than 2048 commands)‘05’
3072 commands’06’
1000 User-markers (volatile1
1000 User-markers (non-volatile)
1024 permanently assigned markers
32 counters””
48 timers””
Inputs and output8 for TNC 3668 (F)
57 inputs. 31 outputs (24 VT max. 100 mA)
Inputs and outputa for TNC 355Q (WJ

In addition to the 57 inputs and 31 outputs of the logic unit the TNC 3550 (W) also
includes an external PLC-board PL 300 with 63 inputs and 31 outputs (24 V =, max. 1.2 A)
Control inpu$ Encoders: 4 sinusoidal inputs, 1 squarewave signal input
Electronic handwheel (HR 150 or HR 250)
Touch probe system (TS lll/TS 511 via APE 110/510 or APE 511)
Contml outp+s One analogue output each for XlvlylV (V) (with automatic offset adjustment).
one analoaue
_ output for spindle IS)
Opsretlng
Operating vo/tege NC-part of LE 355: 24 V-. imax= 1.5 A
PLC-part of LE 3551
3558 (F): 24 V-, Imax= 1.8 A If half of the inputs/outputs are driven
PL 300: 24 V-. Imax= 21 A I simultaneously
‘.
BE 4128 mains vokage: voltage ranges 85 V - 132 V and 170 V - 264 V;
Freauencv 48 .62 Hz
Power consuh@on NC-part of LE 355: approx. 30 W
PLC-part of LE 3658 (F): approx. 6 W, if approx. 113 of the inputs and outputs are driven
simultaneously
PL 300: depending on the number of connected consumers; approx. 25 W. if approx. l/3
of the inputs and outputs are driven simultaneously
BE 4128: approx. 40 W
Ambient ten/pereture Operation 0 .45O C/32 1130 F. Storage - 30 78 C/- 22 .155O F
Weight Logic unit LE 3568 (F): 8.4 kg (18.5 lb); LE 355Q (W): 11.6 kg (25.6 lb)
Keyboard unit TE 355: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb)
Visual disolav unit BE 4128: (12 inch) 11.7 ko 125.8 Ibl
i ISSUe Section Me
November 21. 89 I Tl 1
Technjcal data
TNC 365 C (S) (Export version TNC 355 G M )I)
Ccntml vsmk$r lNC 366 with visual display unit BE 4128 (12 inch, monochrome)
- TNC 366C (0) = without kc-board

I - lNC 3665 (Y) = additional inputs and output on WC-board PL 300
contrcl type I - Ccntcurlng oontrol for 6 w plus spindle orientation, linear interpolation in 3 out
of 5 axes”. circular interpolation in 2 out of 5 axes (only if 41h or 5* axis is parallel to
another linear axis: Contourin programming with the 4th and Sm axis conditionally
possible). helical interpolation a
Rogmmme cry Semi-conductor store for 32 NC-programs,with buffer battery backup, total blocks: 3100;
7 Programmableerase/edit protection
csntmltwl lo up to 99 tools, especially for toolchangers with flexible addressing
Max. tmwml g range f 30000 mm or 1181in.
Msx. trevemi~g sp~4 30 m/min or 1181ipm
, Enooden ~ HEIDENHAINincremental linear encoders (with or without distance-coded reference
marks), grating period O.OVO.01mm (or 0.1 mm for encoder inputs X5, X6, connection
via an appropriate EXE-unit):
HEIDENHAIN rotary encoders
IogiC PLC-cycle time = 20 ms (22 ms for more than 2048 commands)
3072 commands
1000 User-markars (volatile)
1000 User-markmrs(non-volatile)
32 counters
48 timers
Inputs and outputs for TNC 38SC (a)
57 inputs, 31 outputs (24 V=, max. 100 mA)
Inputs end outputs for lNC 3668 (Y)

In addition to the 57 inputs and 31 outputs of the logic unit the TNC 355s (Y) also
includes an external PLC-boardPL 300
300 with 63 inputs
in& and 31 outputs
outnuts (24
174VV~i,
=, max. 1.2 A)
Control input+ Encoders: 4 sinusoidalinputs, 2 squarewave signal inputs
ts
150/HR250 or HR l%/HR
Electronic handwheel (HR 150/HR 130/HR 330)
Touch probe systems TS 120 (TS 1111T.S511via APE 110/510
510or APE 511and cable
~~~~~~~
adaoter~
_.~.r..~,
Control outp~ One analogue output each for xlvly~~ (with automatic offset adjustment).
one analowe
- output for soindle IS)
Operating voltage NC-part of LE 355: 24
: V-. Imax= 1.5 A
PLC-part of LE 355C (G): 24 V-. Imax= 1.8 A If half of the inputs/outputs are driven
PL 300:
: 24 V-. Imax= 21 A I slmuitaneously
‘.
BE4128 mains voltage: voltage ranges 85 V-- 132 V and 170 V - 264 V:
Freauencv 48 .62 Hz
Power wnsu~ption NC-part of LE 355: approx. 30 W
PLC-part of LE 355C (G): approx. 6 W. if approx. l/3 of the inputs and outputs are driven
simultaneouslv
PL 300: depending on the number of connected consumers; approx. 25 W. if approx. l/3
BE 412B: approx. 40 W
Operation 0. 45” C/32 .1130 F. Storage - 30. 700 C/- 22 .155O F
Weight Logic unit LE 355C (G): 8.4 kg (18.5 lb): LE 355s (Y): 11.6kg (25.6 lb)
Visual display unit BE 4128: (12 inch) lJ.7 kg (25.8 lb)
/Issue Section mle

Technical deswipth Tl 2
Nov+benber21, 89
(Export version TNC 355 GR [YR] ) ‘)
I
1
contml veni+ls lNC 366 with visual display unit BE 4128 (12 inch, monochrome)
- TNC 366CR (QR) = without PLC-board

- TNC 366SR (YR) = additional inputs and output on PLC-board PL 300
control type i - Contouring conlrol for 6 axea plus spindle orientation. linear interpolation in 3 out
of 5 axes”. circular interpolation in 2 out of 5 axes (only if 4rh or 5’” axis is parallel to
another linear axis: Contourin programming with the 4* and 5’” axis conditionally
possible), helical interpolation 9
Program merfory Semi-conductor store for 32 NC-programs, with buffer battery backup. total blocks: 3100:
Programmable erase/edit protection
Central tool file UD to 99 tools. esoeciallv for toolchanaers with flexible addressina
Max. tmveni g range f 30000 mm or 1181 in.
Max. tmvenihg speed 30 m/min or 1181 ipm
, Encoders i HEIDENHAIN incremental linear encoders (with or without distance-coded reference
marks). .~ -aratina period 0.02/0.01 mm (or 0.1 mm for encoder inputs for squarewave
signals, conneition via an appropriate’ EXE-unit);
HEIDENHAIN rotan/ encoders
PLC-cycle time = 20 ms (22 ms for more than 2048 commands)
3072 commands
1000 User-markers (volatile)
1000 User-markers (non-volatile)
32 counters
49 timers
Inputs and outputa for lNC 366CR (OR)
57 inputs, 31 outputs (24 V=. max. 100 mA)
Inputs end outputs for lNC 366SR (YR)

In addition to the 57 inputs and 31 outputs of the logic unit the TNC 355% (YR) also
includes an external PLC-board PL 300 with 63 inputs and 31 outputs (24 V =, max. 1.2 A)
Control input$ Encoders: 1 sinusoidal input, 6 squarewave signal inputs
Electronic handwheel (HR 150/HR 250 or HR 130/HR 330)
Touch probe sYstems TS 120 (TS 111/X 511 via APE 110/510 or APE 511 and cable adapter)
3contml OutP&
one analogue output for spindle (S)
operating vo$age NC-part of LE 355: 24 V-, ImaX= 1.5 A
PLC-part of LE 355CR (GR): 24 V-. Imax= 1.8 A If half of the inputs/outputs are driven
PL 300: 24 V-. Imax= 21 A I ‘.srmultaneously
BE 4128 mains voltage: voltage ranges 85 V - 132 V and 170 V - 264 V:
Frequency 48 .62 Hz
Power consumption NC-part of LE 355: approx. 30 W
PLC-part of LE 355C (G): approx. 6 W. if approx. t/3 of the inputs and outputs are driven
simultaneously
PL 300: depending on the number of connected consumers; approx. 25 W, if approx. l/3
BE 4126: approx. 40 W
Ambient temperature Operation 0 45O c/32 113OF. Storage - 30 700 C/- 22 155O F
Weight Logic unit LE 355CR (GR): 8.4 kg (18.5 lb); LE 355SR (YR): 11.6 kg (25.6 lb)
Visual disolav unit BE 4128: (12 inch) 11.7 ka (25.8 lb1
j Issue section hv
Technical deaorlption
November 21, 89 Tl 3
I
Hardware components
4-axis contouring control with spindle orientation
The hardware of the TNC 355 with 4 axes consists of the following components:
The logic unit LE 355 contains the control logic for the 4.aws contouring control wth spindle orientation and graphics
It IS available VI four versions:
Logic unit Logic unit

LE 355B LE 355Q
is equipped wth a total of 57 PLC- is equipped with an additional PLC-
inputs and 31 PLC-outputs (0.1 A). board PL 300. PL 300 has 63 Inputs
and 31 outputs (1.2 A). In comparison to
LE 3558, the total number of inputs/
outputs is increased to 120 PLC-inputs
and 62 PLC-outputs.
LE 355 F Export version” LE 355 W Export version” Visual display unit BE 4128
connected to the logic unit wa special
cable
I: ,.:-.:.
!
I
i :. “” ..
,:
Until Aug ‘89 lti -Nr. 237660. Until Aug ‘89 Id.-Nr, 238324 Id -Nr 24184501
Since Sept ‘89 Id.-Nr 254581 Stnce Sept ‘89 Id -Nr 254582 I
TNC Keyboard unit TE 355A

a connected
cable.
to the logic unit wa special
TNC Keyboard unit TE 3558
as TE 355A. but width as per BE 4128.
HEIDENHAIN Machine operating
tmnel MB 301
connected to the TNC keyboard unit via
ribbon cable supplied
%
1 :, ‘.‘. ‘.
-2. ‘L, ‘L i* .I
Until Aug ‘89 Id.-Nr. 237 66102 Until Aug ‘89 Id -Nr 24196401 Until Aug ‘89 Id -Nr 24289401
Since Sept. ‘89 Id.-Nr 25501501 Smce Sept. ‘89 Id:Nr 25501601 Since Sept ‘89 Id -Nr 2438RG03
ISSIE Section Page

Technical description
November 21, 89 T2 1
Hardware components
5-axis contouring control without spindle orientation
0 (until Feb. ‘89)
The hardware of the TNC 355 with 5 axes without spindle orientation consists of the following components:
The logic unit LE 355 contains the control logic for the 5-axis contouring control with graphics.
It IS wallable in four versions:

LE 355s LE 3550
is equipped with a total of 57 PLC- IS equipped with an additional PLC-
inputs and 31 PLC-outputs (0.1 A). board PL 300. PL 300 has 63 inputs
LE 3556. the total number of Inputs/
and 62 PLC-outputs.
LE 355F Export version’i LE 355 W Export version” Visual display unit BE 4128
connected to the logic unit via special
cable.
Id-Nr 242a07 Id.-Nr. 24184601
0 TNC Keyboard unit TE 355C

TNC Keyboard unit TE 355D
as TE 355C. but width as per BE 4128.
cable
UIIIII Aug ‘89 ICI~Nr 24196402

Snce Sept ‘89 Id -Nr 25501602
Issue
November 21. 89
I Section
T2 /
Page
2
Hardware components
The logic unit LE 355 contains the control logic for the 5.axis contouring control with graphics.
It is available in four versions:

LE 355C LE 355s
is equipped with a total of 57 PLC- is equipped with an additional PLC-
LE 3556. the total number of Inputs/
outputs IS increased to 120 PLC-inputs
and 62 PLC-outputs.
LE 3556 Export version” LE 355Y Export version’~ Visual display unit BE 412B
cable.
Until Aug ai! ICI-Nr. 246813 Until Aug ‘i’s id:Nr 248055 Id -Nr 24184501
Smce Sept. ‘89 Id:Nr 254819 Since Sept ‘89 Id -Nr 254820

as TE 355C. but width as per BE 4126
cable.
Until Aug. ‘89 Id -Nr 23766103 Until Aug ‘89 Id ~Nr. 24196402
Since Sept. ‘89 Id.-Nr. 25501503 Since Sept. ‘89 Id -Nn 25501602
I
Issue Section we
November 21. 89 T2 21
Hardware components
0
Up to 5 encoders with squarewave signals can be connected to the TNC 355CR (SR).
The logic unit LE 355 contains the control logic for the 5-axis contouring control with graphics.
It is avatlable in four versions:

LE 355CR LE 355%
IS equipped with a total of 57 PLC is equipped with an additional PLC-
LE 3558. the total number of inputs/
and 62 PLC-outputs.
LE 355GR Export version” LE 355YR Export versionli Visual display unit BE 4128
cable.
Id -Nr. 24951G Id -Nr. 249517 Id -Nr 24184501

connected to the logic unit VIZ special
as TE 355C. but width as per BE 412B.
cable.
Until Aug 89 Id Nr 237c,T103 Until Aug ‘89 Id -Nr 24196402

Since Sept 89 Id -Nr 25501503 Since Selx ‘39 Id ~NI 25501602
Issue Section Page

November 21. 89 / T2 I 22
components
ce between TNC 355 variants
signal input for spindle orientation,
squarewave signals is used for the 6’” axis. This eliminates the possibility of having spindle
is provided for the Sm axis.
without spindle orientation will be superseded bY the LE 355C (S) in the first quarter of 1989.
LE 36bC (S)
5-axis contou ing control with spindle orientation.
The conrol is quipped with 4 inputs for encoders having sinusoidal signals and 2 inputs for encoders with squarewave
signals. Furth rmore, the LE is equipped with 2 additional inputs for connection of the new touch probe system TS 120 and
the electronic andwheel with axis selection keys. This handwheel will be available as of mid-19BY.
1
with spindle orientation.

quipped with an input for an encoder with sinusoidal output signals and 5 inputs for encoders with square-
to LE 355C (S), 3 of the encoder inputs for squarewave signals are combined in a 25-pole Sub-D.
ther specifications as per LE 355C (S).
the 5-axis contouring controls (TE 355C (D)) has, instead of the &key. a key for the programming of
initiation for Q-function programming is performed via the m-key.
Special feat ree of of the 6-axis contouring controls

- The position display of the 5th axis is displayed in the VDU-screen beneath the 4’” axis. For this, the display of datum shifts
and mirror-i aged axes has been simplified.
“,
Example: ~
NXY ~
The above rsplay signifies that a datum shift is programmed in the axes X and Y and that the X-axis has been mirror-
imaged. 1
ys the last axis to traverse the reference mark.
tool axis (Tool Call)
functions do not apply to axis V:
brication after a programmed distance

axes (only applicable to LE 3558 (Q))
Issue Seotlon me
Teohnioal deaoription T2 3
Fe ruan/ 8, 90
locations on LE 355 B (Q) (unti~tAugust ‘89)
Closed Pmcessor
loop board board
CfOSOdlOOp:
Xl = Encoder 1
X2 = Encoder 2
Standard allocation
X3 = Encoder 3 (switchover via machine
parameters 253 257)
X4 = Encoder 4
X5 = Encoder 6,I
X6 = Electronic handwheel HR 150/HR 250
X7 = Touch probe system
X8 = Nominal value output for X. Y. 2. IV. S (V)
X9 = Visual display unit BE 4128
X10 = Reference pulse inhibitor
x21 = PLC-output
X22 = PLC-input
X23 = KeYboardunit TE 355
X24 = Power supply 24 V- for PLC
X26 = Data interface RS-232~C/V.24
X27 = Machine operating panel
Power aupp1y:
X31 = Power supply 24 V- for LE
ISSUO section me
Techniaal dosaription T3 1
November 21. 89
Conn&tions
Conne/ctor locations on LE 355B (Q) (since Sept. ‘89)
’ Closed PrOCeSSOr clossd loop:

loop board board
Xl = Encoder 1
X2 = Encoder 2
Standard allocation
X3 = Encoder 3 (switchover via machine
parameters 253 257)
X4 = Encoder 4
X5 = Encoder 5
X7 = Touch probe system
X8 = Nominalvalue output for X. Y. 2. N. S (V) Red
X9 = Visual display unit BE 412B Blue
X10 = Reference pulse inhibitor Yellow
Xl 1 = Test I/O (for test purpose only) Red
S = Signal ground
x21 = PLC-output Red
X22 = PLC-input Yellow
X23 = Keyboard unit TE 355 Blue
X26 = Data interface RS-232-W/.24 Red
X27 = Machine operating panel Green
Power supply:
I Ieeue Technical desorlptlon Section me

No mber 21. 89 T3 1.1
closed loop board of LE 355B (Q)
Xl, X2, X3, 4 4 Enceder 1, 2,3,4 with rinu5oid5l5Ignal X6 Encoder 6 with squamwave signal input
input ~ (tW rpindb iSI or fcr a machlna axis)
Flange socket/ female (g-pole) Flange socket, female (12-pole)
Ccnteot NC. 1 1 Allcceticn ccntsct NC. 1 Alloo5ticn

1 I I Ilo+ 5 U.1
2 Ov- 6 K
5 900f B U.7
6 I go@- 1 IU 82
7 I RI+ 3 U.0
8 Rl- 4 IK -_
3 +5 v (Ud -
Uasnot included
4 0 v (UN) 7 Iui
I 9 ! Internal screen 2 +5V (sensor line)”
Housing i External screen = Unit housing 12 +5 v (UP)
11 0 V (sensor line)”
X6 Electronic/ handwheels HR 150, HR 250 10 0 v (UN)

9 (via spring) screen = Housing
Flange socket4 female (g-pole)
Contact NC. 1 I Allocation

1 go+
2 I oo-
X8 Nominal value output fcr X, Y, 2, IV, S fcr the 4-axis

ccntcuring scntrcl
Flange socket, female (15-pole)

The LE 355 is equipped with 5 analogue nominal value
outputs (f 10 volts) for the axes X Y, Z, IV and S-analogue.
Loading of analogue nominal value outputs:
Housing ~ External screen = Unit housing R min = 5000 Cl
7.8 ~ do not assign C max = 5000 pF
ccntsot NC. I Allccatlcn

1 Analogue output X-axis
X7 Tcuch pr he system
4 3 1 Analogue output Y-axis
Flange socket.!female (7.pole)
5 1 AnaiOgue output Z-axis
ccntsct NC. I 1Allccaticn 7 1 Analogue output axis N
1 1 I 0 v (UN1 I Analoaue outout axis S
2 I +l5...+19v(up)
3 Start
!
4 Biaaer siana12’
5 1 Standby
6 1 Batten/ warning
7 1 internal screen (0 V, U,) HOUSing External screen = Unit housing
Connector ho ing External screen 2, 4, 6. 10. 12 1 do not essign
on closed loop board of LE 355 B (Q)
X8 Nominal lue output for X, Y, 2 IV, V, S for the X10 Refwemx pulse inhibitor
5-axis conto ring oontml
Flange socket, female (g-pole)
The nominal v lue output for axis V is located on connector
X8, pins 4 an 1 6.
Flange socket.i 4female (15-pole)
Contact No. 1 1 Allocation

Reference pulse inhibitor input X2
1 1 Analoaue output X-axis
Reference pulse inhibitor input X3
3 ’ / Analogue output Y-axis 5 Reference pulse inhibitor input X4
5 1 Analogue output Z-axis 6 Reference pulse inhibitor input X5*’
7 I Analogue output axis IV 8 +24 V (PLC)“”
/
4 Analogue output axis V 9 0 v (PLC)”
8 Analogue output axis S 7 do not assign
’ 9 OV X-axis
11 OV Y-axis
13 OV Z-axis
14 OV axis Iv
6 OV axis V
15 / OV axis S
Housing ! External screen = Unit housing
2.10.12 / do not assian
X8 Visual d play unit SE 4128
Flange socket./ female (15-pole)
Conteot No. Allocation

1, 8, 11 ov
2. 7 +24 V (not used)
9 V SYNC
10 ! H SYNC
12 1 LIGHT/DARK
13 VIDEO
Housing 1 External screen = Unit housing
3 to 6.14.15 1 do not assign
‘I Only for LE 35$ with Id.-Nr. 237660. .: 238324. .: 242408. .: 242407.. (untilAug. ‘89)
I8SU0 Seotion me
Teohniosl dumrlption T3 3
Nov mber 21, 89
on LE 355C (S)
P+Ve, Closed PrOCeSSOr

SqPPlv loop board board
cloeed loop:
Xl = Encoder 1
X2 = Encoder 2
X3 = Encoder 3 Standard allocation

1 (switchover via machine
X4 = Encoder 4 parameters 253 257).
X5 = Encoder 5
X6 = Encoder S I
X8 = Nominalvelue output for X Y. 2. IV. V, S - Red
X9 = Visual display unit BE 412B Blue
Xl 1 = Handwheelwith axis selection keys Red
Xl 2 = Touch probe system TS 120 (TS 111/511) Yellow
B = Operational ground
-r:
X23 = Keyboard unit TE 355 Blue
X26 = Data interface RS-232~C/V.24 Red
X27 = Machine operating panel
Power eupply:
~ Ieeue Section me
Teohnlcal domiption
No mber 21. 89 T3 3.1
I
on closed’ loop board LE 355 C (S)
Xl, X2, X3.4 Encoder 1,2,3,4 with dnwoidal rl~nal X7 6lsotmnio hsndwhwl HR 160, HR 260
input !
Flange socket female (g-pole)
Flange socket.lfemale (g-pole)
cofjtwt No. 1 Allowtlan
Contact No. 1 I Allacstlon 1
5 90”f
6 900-
7 RI+
8 1 RC
9 1 Internal screen (0 volts)
3 I
I +5 v (UP) Housing 1 External screen = Unit housing
4 0 v NJ,) ) do not assian
’ 9 / Internal screen
Housing I External screen = Unit housina
X6 Nomlnsl value output for x Y, 2, Iv,v, 8

sr 6, S with squarewave signal input
Flange socket. female (15-pole)
(K&pole)
ContsotNo. I AllocatIon
Contaot No. I !, Allooation 1 Analogue output X-axis
5 1 USl 3 I Analogue output Y-axis
6 1 K 5 Analogue output Z-axis
8 Ua2 7 Analogue output axis IV
1 I G 4 Analoaue outtwt axis V
3 Ua0 8 Analogue output axis S
4 G 9 OV X-axis
1
lLa not included 11 OV Y-axis
7 1 I&-s 13 OV Z-axis
2 I +5 V (sensor line)” 14 I OV axis IV
12 +5 v (UP) 6 OV axis V
11 / 0 V (sensor line)” 16 I OV axis S
10 0 v (UN) Housing 1 External screen = Unit housing
9 (via spring) i Screen = Housing 2. 10, 12 do not assign
Isum Section
Technical dowrlptlon T3 TY
pril 4, 89
closed loop board of LE 355C (S)
X9 Visual dl play unit BE 4111) Xl2 Touob probe system TB 120 (TB 1lliTB 611 only via
1 oabk adapter)
Flange socket female (15pole)
Flange socket, female (male] 15-p&
Contact No. 1 Allocation
1.8.11 I Iov co~ct-No. 1~Allocation
I
2.7 ~ +24 V (not used) 1 0 V screen
I 3 Standby
9 1 V SYNC
10 H SYNC 4 Start
12 1 LIGHT/DARK 5 + 15 v
1
13 VIDEO 6 +15...+19v(up)
I1 I
7 Battew wamino
I
Housing I External screen = Unit housing
3 to 6,14,15 I 1 do not assign 8 OVWN)
9 Trigger signal
I
10 Trigger signe12’
X10 Referen pulse inhibitor
+ 2, 11to 15 do not assign
Flange socket female (g-pole)
contact No. 1 I Allocation

1 SCB3”
2 Reference pulse inhibitor input Xl
3 Reference pulse inhibitor input X2
4 Reference pulse inhibitor input X3
5 1 Reference pulse inhibitor input X4
6 I
Reference oulse inhibitor inout X5
/
8 1 +24 V (PL$
9 I 0 v (PLC)”
7 ( do not assian
Flange socket/ female (male) g-pole
Contact No. 1 I Allocation

2 1 ov
3 ! 1+5v
I
4 + 12 v
5 I -15v
6 DTR
7 I RxD
1. 8. 9 I do not assicln
Housing 1 External screen
I
ISSUe
Technical dworiptlon
Fe ruarv 8. 90 I
on ‘LE 355,CR (SR)
P+Ver Closed PrOCaSSOr

SllPPlV loop board board
Clond loop: color
P) ode
Xl = Encoder 1
Xl3 = Encoder 2.3.4 Standard allocation Blue

(switchover via machine
X5 = Encoder 5 parameters 253 257)
X6 = Encoder S t
X8 = Nominal value output for X. Y. Z, N, V, S Red
X9 = Visual display unit BE 4128 Blue
Xl 1 = Handwheel with axis selection keys Red
Xl 2 = Touch probe system TS 120 (TS 111/511) Yellow
B = Operational ground
Rocuror:
X23 = TNC-keyboard unit TE 355 Blue
X26 = Data interface RS-232~QV.24 Red
X27 = Machine operating panel Green
43
443
44
” Power supply:
I Ieeue secuon me
Nohmber 21. 89 I T3 3.4
:ctors on closed loop board of LE 355CR (SR)
D Xl Encoda 1 with slnuadded slgnsl input X6,XBl%nwdw6,Swithrq- s-1 -Jwl
Flange sockei. female (g-pole)
Flange socket female (12~pole)
Contscl No.j 1 Allocstion
1 I 00’
UaS not included

7 uas
I 2 +5 V (sensor line)”
Housing i External screen = Unit housing
12 +5 v (UP)
11 0 V (sensor line)”
Xl3 Encode1 2,3,4 wtth squamwaw signal
Flange socket, female (25pole) 10 0 v (UN)
9 (via spring) Screen = Housing
Contscl No. 1 I AllcwUon
1 U.1
X7 Elwtmnlo hndwheela HR 160, HR 250
2 G
3 G Flange socket. female (g-pole)
4 a-i lhlaot No. ,I Allwstlon
Encoder 4
14 U.1 1 I oo+
15 U.92 2 o* .
16 U.0 6 900’;
17 ov
6 .900-
3 +5 v (UP)
4 I 0 v (UN)
9 ) Internal screen (0 volt)
Encoder 3 HousinQ 1 External screen = Unit housing
) do not assicn
20 U&
21 ov
9 i&i
q10 i&Y
11 G
12 IU
Encoder 2
13 do not assign
, Housing I 1 External screen
1
1 lssus Section
Technioal dmctlptlon
4pril4, 89 T3 FE8
Conn dons
Conn t ;ctors on closed loop board of LE 355CR (SR)
B I
x8 Nomiwi WIUO 0tiput x, Y, 2, IV, v, s Xl0 Refwanw pulse inhlbitor
I
Flange sock? female (15.pole) Flange socket. female (g-pole)
Conteti Noi I Allooation Contaot No. 1 AllooaUon

1 Analogue output X-axis 1 I Screen
3 Analogue output Y-axis 2 1 Reference pulse inhibitor input Xl
5 Analogua output Z-axis 3 1 Reference DUka inhibitor input X2
7 Analogua output axis IV 4 Reference pulse inhibitor input X3
4 Analogua output axis V 5 Reference pulse inhibitor input X4
8 Analogue output axis S 6 Reference pulse inhibitor input X5
9 OV X-axis
11 OV Y-axis 9 I 0 v (PLC)”
13 OV Z-axis I do not assion
) 14 ~ OV axis IV
8 OV axis V
Xl1 Handwhwl with axle s&ction keya
15 OV axis S
Housing I 1 External screen = Unit housing Flange socket female (male) g-pole
2, IO. 12 do not assign Contnot No. AlloccrtlOn
2 ov
Xa Visual di+play unit BE 4128 3 +5v

4 +12 v
Flange socket! female (15-pole)
5 -15v
Conlaot No. ~ 1 AlkJoalion 6 DTR
I. 8.11 ~ I0v 7,
I I RXD
2.7 ) +24 V (not used) 1.8. 9 do not assign
9 1 V SYNC
10 1 H SYNC
IOzotzhtml”P syatam TS 120 (TS 1llRS 611 only via
12 ) LIGHT/DARK
.n . ,,--,.
IJ YlLmU
Flange socket female (male) 15.pole
Housing External Screen = Unit hOUSing
3 to 6, 14. 15 1 do not assign Conowl No. 1 Allocation
1 I 0 v scman
___ -..
3 1 Standby
4 Start
5 1+15v
6 + 5v (UP)
7 Battery warning
8' 0v (UN)
..~
9 Trigger signal
IO Trigger signal”
2. 11 to 15 do not assign
i ISSUO Section me
Teohnical dawription 3.6
Nov mbar 21.89 T3
processor board
B
x2lPLGo+ut
Flange socke . female (37-p&)

t
Contect No.1 Allocation
1 1 A0 3)
2 I Al s)
3 I A2 3’
4 ~ A3 3’
5 1 A4 3’
6 1 A5 s’
7 ~ A6 3’
8 I A7 3j
1 A8
1 A9
12 ~ All
13 1 Al2
14 i Al3
15 i Al4
16 1 Al5
17 1 Al6
18 1 Al7
19 I Al8
20 1 A19
21 i A20
22 ’ A21
23 ! A22
1 24 A23
25 A24 2’
26 A25 *’
27 A26 *’
28 A27 ‘I
29 A28 ”
30 I A29 *I
31 1 A30 *’
32,33 j do not assign
34 Control operational
35, 36, 37 24 V via external EMERGENCY STOP
disconnectible (PLC ‘I)
Housina External screen
” If required. the upply voltage for the disconnectible outputs can be assigned to connector X24. pin I
” not disconnecti le via external EMERGENCY STOP
I A0 A23 are b isconnenible via enemal EMERGENCY STOP
3’ Al... A? dupli+aad on X27. Machine operating panel
Technical description Section

T3
Contl dons
Conn crctors on processor board
) ~
X22 PLC-In
Flange sock+, female (37-p&)
Conteot Noi ( Allooation

1 ~ EO
2 ~ El
3 1 E2
I
IO E9
11 1 (El0
I
12 ~ El1
13 ! (El2
15 ~ /El4
16 (El5
17 ~ El6
18 ~ IEl7
20 ~ El9
21 E20
22 ~ E21
1 23 E22
24 E23
29 ~ 1 E28
30 ~ 1 E29
31 ~ I E30
32 ~ 1 E31
33,34 1I do not assign
35. 36. 37 ~ 1 0 V M-C,‘)-
) la-sue Technical description

Section me
hpril 4, 89 T3 5
dons
ctors on processor board
X23 Keybo+d unit T6 366 31 El41

Flange socka$ female (37-p+ 32 El42
I 33 f143
34 Spindle override (wiper)
36 Feed rate override (wiper)
36 +12 V Override potentiometer
37 0 V Override potentiometer
for key matrix Housina I External screen
El28 El43 duplicated on connector X27 for machine

operating panel.
~ El28
1 El29
11 1 El30
12 i El31
13 ~ El32
14 I El33
15 1 El34
16 ~ El35
17 ) El38
18 1 El37
19 ‘~ ( El38
-
20 ~ 1 OUT0
for key matrix

X24 Power supply for PLC
Connection terminals
I
Contest No. Mocntion
28 1 1 El39 1 +24 V EMERGENCY STOP disconnectible”
29 ~ 1 El40 2 1 +24 V EMERGENCY STOP
~ +15 V (Supply for buttons on machine not disconnectible
/ operating panel) 3 0 PI
I Ieum Twhnlcal dowdptlon Seotkm me

qpril 4, 89 T9 6
processor board
X26 Data i&fsoe RS-232-C/V.24 11 El38”

Flange sock female (25-p&) 12 El39”
13 E140”
14 E141”
15 El42”
16 E143” ,
17 El44‘ ’
18 El45
19 El46
6 ~ DTR
20 El47
7 ~ GND I
21 ( El48
8 to 19 ~ do not assign
22 I f149
B 20 1 DSR
23 El50
21 to 25 ~ do not assign
24 f151
Housina ~ External screen
25 El52
20 AO*’
27 Al”
X27 Machin operating panel 28 AZ?
29 A3”
are insufficient inputs on the 30 A4”
31 A5”
Contact No. ~ I Allocation 32 A#’
1 : ( El28”
2 1 1 El29”
3 ! E130” 35 0 v (PLC)
4 ~ El31’) 36 +24 V (PLC)
L 5 i E132” 37 +24 V (PLC)
‘( X.31 Power
Tamdnal
supply for logic unit (LE)
1 Allocation
I ov
+ 1 +24V
Section me
T3 7
Corm !cAions
Connc ztors for input/output board PL 300
II 366Q b gtipped wtth an additional board # 300.
i b.k3
Technicaldnaripth section me
pril 4. 89 T3 8
ctor layouts for input/output board PL 300
xl x4
Contact No.i Allocation Contaot No. Alloodon
1 I A32 1 El26
2 ~ A33 2 E74
3 ~ A34 3 E73
4 ~ A35 4 E72
5 ~ A36 5 E71
6 ~ A37 6 E70
7 ~ A38 7 E69
8 ~ A39 8 E88
9 ~ A40 9 E67
10 i A41 10 E66
11 ) A42 11 E66
12 not assigned 12 E64
I, ~
X6
Contaot No. j Allooatlon
Contnct No. AllooaUon
1 I A43
1 E86
2 ~ A44
2 E85
3 ~ A45
3 E84
4 ~ A46
4 E83
5 ~ A76
5 E82
6 ~ A48
6 E81
7 I A49
7 E80
8 I A50
8 E79
9 A51
9 E78
10 ~ A52
10 E77
11 ~ A53
11 E76
12 ~ not assianed
12 E75
1 x3
Contoot No. ~ 1 Allooatlon X6
1 Contoot No. Allooatlon
1 1 A54
2 1 E98
‘~ A55
2 E97
3 ~ A56
4 ! A57 3 E98
I
5 ; ( A58 4 E95
6 E94
6 ~ 1 A59
6 E93
7 1 A60
7 E92
8 ( A61
8 E91
9 ~ A62
9 E90
10 ~ Control operational
10 E89
11 1 do not assign
12 11 E88
~ +24 V not via external EMERGENCY STOP
disconnectible” 12 E87
Issue Seotlon pfw

Teohnloal &sorlptlon
April 4, 89 T3 9
ctor layouts for input/output board PL 300
x, ~
Conteot No AllOC4ltiOll
1 ~ El10
2 ~ El09
3 ~ El08
4 ~ El07
5 El06
6 ~ El05
7 i El04
8 I El03
9 ~ El02
10 ~ El01
11 ~ El00
10 ~ El13
) 11
12
x9
Conteot No. i Allooetion
1 do not assign
2 do not assign
3 do not assign
4 El25
5 ~ El24
6 El23
I -.--
~ Iesue Sootion page

bpril 4, 89 Teohnioel dmorlption
T3 10
ctors for TNC-keyboard unit TE 355
Xl For CoIm Lion of tb machine qaamting panel
Flange socke emale (25-p&) 11 fl30

12 El29
Contact No. Allocation
13 El28
1 1 El40
14” 0 V (override potentiometer)
2 El39
15” +12 V (override potentiometer)
El38
16” Feed rate override potentiometer (wiper)
El37
17” Spindle override potentiometer (wiper)
El36
18 to 21 do not assign
22 +15 V (Supply for buttons of machine
El34 operating panel)
23 El43
24 El42
25 El41
Issue Seotion me
Technical descdption T3 11
November 21.89 I
Conn dons
Conn ,’ ctors for TNC-keyboard unit TE 355
) ~
X2 For conb#ctlon of the kgk unit LE 366
Flange socke . male (37-pole)

i
Conteot No.’ AlloclltiOll
1
I
RLO
2 RLl
3 RL2
for key matrix
9 El28
10 El29
11 El30
12 El31
13 El32
14 El33
15 El34
18 El35
17 1 El36
18 1 El37
19 I El38
for key matrix
+15 V (Supply for buttons of machIne

q
32 El42
33 El43
34 , Stindle overMe P.vipar)
35 1 Feed rate override (wiper)
36’ +12 V Override potentiometer
37 ) 0 V Override cotentiometer
Ieum Seotion
Teohnkd dnoriptkn T3 T
pril 4. 89
Cgnn ions
Conn ” ctor for
B HEIDqNHAIN machine operating panel MB 301
HEIDENHAIN offers a universal machine operating panel. The connection of the operating panel is via connector Xl on the
TNC-keyboar unit (cable, refer to sheet M3/l4).
1
The operatrnA panel has 15 pushbuttons which are connected to the control via PLC-inputs.
The button f d r SwtChlnQ-On

” the control voltage. the appropriate lamp and the emergency stop button must be wired
separately. ~
Allocation of t he 15 operating buttons to the pins of the connector and the PLC-inputs:
Allocation IButton ) Mrnlng
El40 Axis direction button

la
El39 ( Axii direotion button

IkD
)3 ~ El38 ) Axis direction button

IQ
4 El37 ( Axis direction button

IQ
5 El36 1 Axis direction button

IQ
6 El35 1 Ayes direction button

IQ
I Axis direction button
a El33
IQ
I Axis direction button
9 El32
I0
10 El31
IO
11 El30
I@ SPINDLE STOP
112 ‘~ El29
I@
COOLANT ON
13
,,
El28
lb
I
TOOL UNCLAMP
22 +15 v
(suPPfY)
!
23 El43 I0
24 El42
I@
14to21 ~ do not assign
~ keue Technical dewipth

April 4. 99
ctors for visual display unit BE 412B
Mains fuse
I
Mains voltage selector
Xl for connection of
the logic unit LE 355
x2 Power supply
selectable for 110 V-
or 220 v-
F&ion test
Xl for connation of the logic unit LE 366
Flange socke’, male (15-pole)
Ccntsot No. Allccstlon

11 ov
9 V SYNC
10 H SYNC
12 LIGHT/DARK
13 VIDEO
b Housing External screen = Unit housing
1.3 to 68.14 15 do not assign
V- or 220 V-
ksue Section me
Tschnksl dsscription T3 14
April 4. 89
of PLC-inputs and outputs
B
LO@ unit 366
PLC-inputa 32 inputa on connector for PLC-inputs(EOto E31);

Feedback signal for test “control operational” on E3;
26 inputa on connector for machine operating panel
(El28 to E152):
El28 to El43 are also located on the connector for the TNC-keyboard unit
These inputs may onlv be circuited against the internal 15 V-voltage.
Nominal value of power supply: 24 V-;
Voltage ranges: ‘1’~Signal: Ue = 13 V to 30.2 V;
“0”~Signal: Ue = - 20 V to 3.2 V;
Current ranges: ‘1’~Signal: le = 3.7 mA to 9.1 mA:
W-Signal: le = 1.5 mA at Ue = 3.2 V:
1
Pw-wtpul tsl 32 outputs on connector for PLC-outputs
(A0 to A30 and “control operational”);
A0 to A7 are also located on the connector for the machine operating panel;
A0 to A23 are EMERGENCYSTOP-disconnetiible:

A24 to A30 and “control operational” are supplied vie a non-disconnectible 24 V-voltage;
Nominal value of power supply: 24 V-;
Min. output voltage for “I”-signal: 3 V below supph/ voltage;
Nominal operational current per output: 0.1 A:

Permissibleloading: Resistanceload: inductive load only with a quenching diode parallelto inductivitv:
Several outputs may not be short-circuited simultaiB5Ay:
The short circuiting of one output will not lead to overloading.
-~-
PLC-Input/ ltboaKlPL300
PLC-inputa 63 input8 (E64 to fl26);

1
Nominal value of power supply: 24V-:
Voitage ranges: “I”-Signal: Ue = 16.5 V to 36 V:
‘0”~Signal: Ue = - 20 V to 4 V:
Current ranges: “I “Signal: le = 6.2 mA to 12.6 mA:
W-Signal: le = 1.6 mA at Ue = 4 V;
PLC-OUtpU RI:/ 32 outputs (A32 to A62 and “control operational”):

Nominal value of power supply: 24 V-:
A32 to A55 are disconnectible via the external EMERGENCYSTOP:
A56 to A62 and “control operational” sre supplied via a non-disconnectible 24 V-voltage.
Min. output for ‘I”-signal: 3 V below the power supply VOkege;
Nominal operational current per output: 1.2 A;

Permissibleloading: Resistanceload: inductive load only with a quenching diode parallelto inductivkv.
SW@ SectIon m@
Technical dascriptbn T3 15
.il 4. 89
Lineal and rotary en&
I
B
The TNC ha encoder inputs for sinusoidal and squarewave signals.

The followin table indicates which inputs are intended for sinusoidal signals (2/j and which for squarewave signals (II-).
“s
LE 3558 (Q) LE 355C (S) LE 355CR (SR)
Inout Xl I, CL I ‘L I CL
Input X2
I
Input X3
Input X4 I
lnputX5 ~
Inout X6 ~
The maximu input frequency of the sinusoidal input is 25 kHz. This permits a maximum traversing speed of
.30 m/min (11 1 ipm) for linear encoders with a grating period of 20 pm and
15 m/min (5 0 ipm) for linear encoders with a grating period of 10 pm.
B
The maximu input frequency of the squarewave signal input is 260 kHz. This value permits traversing speeds of up to
30 m/min (11 1 ipm) - also for a 2-fold evaluation of the encoder signal. However, in this case, the maximum traversing
speed applic ble to input X5 is limited by the maximum input frequency of the external interpolation and digitizing a1eCtronic.s
j
WE). ,
The encoder Inputs can be randomly allocated to the machine axes (see sheet T4/2),
The sinusoid I signal inputs (Xl to X4) always undergo a 5-fold interpolation. The interpolation factor of the external
electronics ( 4 E) should be taken into consideration for the squarewave signal input (X5).
The addition? signal evaluation can be determined for each axis via machine parameters.
MP 12 ~Ltxla Entry values:

MP13 AxbY 1 A 4-fold
NIP 14 hd8z 2 P 2-fold
MP 16 ‘&Ida IV
MP 327 IAxis V
1 (With an en& value of 1 a signal subdivision of 20-fold is obtained with e.g. [i-fold interpolation).
1 Iaaue TechnIcal dowriptlon

6sctlon me
pril 4. 89 T4 1
Linead and rotary encoWs
Allooation of ee to the enoodor inpute
Encoder input r for sinusoidal signals and squarawave signals are located on the logic unit. The encoder inputs can be
allocated to th machine axes vie MP 263 to MP 257.
1 .
If “0” is enterJd for MP 253 MP 257, the standard allooetbn applies as follows:
Encoder input Xl
Encoder input X2
Encoder input X3
Encoder input X4
Encoder input X5
6 the allocation of encoder inputs to the axes can be varied as requlmd:
If, for example the squerawave input X5 is to be employed for an X-axis”, the machine parameters ara to be programmed es
follows: !
6 A Encoder Input X6
2 A Encoder input X2
MP 265 Axis 2 3 p Encoder input X3
4 A Encoder input X4
1 0 Encoder Input Xl
hotion paw
TechnIcal douxiptlon T4 2
1~ ,:, ~,
Linea and rotary encoders
Linear jand rotary encoders for sinusoidal inputs
The TNC controls the actual position with a digital step of 0.001 mm or O.OOl” and subdivides the grating period of the
encoders by 20 x or 10 x.
Linear enoodbm
Incremental linear encoders with a 20 pm or 10 urn grating period such as
- L3 107/LS 107C (measuring lengths 240 mm to 3040 mm)

- L3 704/L3 jO4C (measuring lengths 170 mm to 3040 mm) or
- L9 403/L9 04lL3 403C/L3 404C (measuring lengths 70 mm to 1240 mm; up to 2040 mm with mounting spar)
- LID 300, LI;t 310 (measuring lengths 50 mm to 3000 mm)
- LID 311/LID 311C/LID 351/LID 351C (measuring lengths 50 mm to 1500 mm)
should therefobs be used.
When using lieear encoders with distance-coded reference marks (LS 107C. L3 704C. L3 403C. L3 404C). the absolute
position value can be recovered after a traverse of max. 20 mm.
If accuracy requirements permit, measurement with e.Q. a rotary encoder type ROD 450 directly connected to the ballscrew.
is possible. The required number of lines for the encoder is calculated as follows:
ball screw pitch [mm/rev]
line number/revolution =
0.001 [mm] x signal interpolation x gear ratio
where signal sbbdivision = signal interpolation x signal evaluation
The signal evafuation can be selected via machine parameter (see sheet T4/l).
Example:
20-fold signal interpolation without grating
line number/rev = 50 x ball screw pitch
1O-fold signal fnterpolation without gearing

line number/rev = 100 x ball screw pitch
(with axes N, V) rotary encoder types ROD 250 and ROD 700 as well as RON 255 and RON 705
with 18000 or!36000 lines are available.
The above formulae assume direct coupling of the rotary encoder to the ballscrew. If intermediate gears are being used, the
line numbers have to be correspondingly calculated.
! Isrue Section page

Technical deeoription T4 3
November 21, 89
I
Lineatj and rotary encoders
Linear pnd rotary encoders for squarewave signal inputs
I
To inputs inteided for squarewave signals. only encoders having either separate or integral digitizing electronics may be
connected”. i
Rotary ens for oriented spindle stop
For orientation! of the main spindle, the rotary encoder ROD 4288 with 1024 lines and monitoring signal is recommended,
The max. rpmiof the ROD 4288, and hence the spindle, is 12000 rpm.
The max. freq’ ency response of the encoder, 300 kHz, and the limiting frequency of the signal input of the TNC-control,
250 kHz, lie a i !ove the mechanical slewing speed permitted by the bearing assembly.
The cable lendth between ROD 4288 and LE 355 must be limited to 20 m (66 ft) to ensure adequate power.
Issue SUCtiOll me
Nov&nber 21.89 I T4 4
Lineatj and rotary encoders
Linear kmd rotary encoders for squarewave signal inputs
I
Enoodero for binear machine axes
The allocation 0f the encoder inputs to the axes via parameters MP 253 to MP 257 offers further possibilities (see sheet T4/2).
If, for instancej a machine is equipped with en X-axis greater than 3040 mm traverse, thus necessitating the use of LB 326
with an EXE-unit. an encoder input for squarewave signals can be allocated to the X-axis.
Encoder : meting period ExEwkh Mar. c&l lanoth

slgnal rubdMelon IEXENNC
I
iB 326 EXE 816. 25-fold 50 m/l64 ft connecting cable
EXE 839. 25-fold Id.-Nr. 233764
Id.-Nr. 246510
EXE 650. 25-fold 10 m (33 ft) connecting cable
Id.-Nr. 246510 _.
TNC 3658 (0) lNC 366C (S)
Encoder input X6:

20798501 20072001
50 m/164 ff max.
LB 326 /
Connecting cable compl.
I 1r LiYcY (10 x 0.14) + (2 x 0.5)
3m/lOft -- 233 764
L8 326
I i I
3 m/10 ft Z3
or 50sfold
I-NC 366CR SR)

On the TNC 3 $ 5CR (.%I). the encoder inputs 2.3 and 4 are combined into one connector (Xl 3). For connection to EXE 839,
we recommend the HEIDENHAIN connecting cable Id.-Nr. 245973
LB 326
i Issue Seotion mm
Teohnical deaodption T4 5
February 8. 90
Linea4 and rotary enccbrs
Linear land rotary encoders for squarewave signal inputs
,
If a rotary encbder is being connected to a squarewave signal input, interpolation and’digitizing of the encoder signals via
EXE-electronic+ is required.
with 18 000 ME with Max. cabis length EXE/lNC

signal intwpolqtlon
ROD 250/ROq 700 EXE 901. 5-fold 50 m/164 ft connecting cable
RON 255/RON 705
ROD 250/ROq 700 EXE 602D. 5-fold 1 m/3 ft cable on EXE+
RON 255/ROv 705 9 m/29 ft extension
ROD 271 : 5-fold 1 m/3 fl cable on ROD+
RON 275 integral with ROD 9 m/29 ft extension
When using ROD-integral electronics or the external digitizing electronics EXE 602D. the power supply for the digitizing
electronics anti the encoder is supplied by the TNC 355.
I
In order to en$ure the correct supply voltage. the total length of the connecting cable between EXE and the control is limited
to 10 m/32 ft.
ROD2
0
ROD7 ! 0 LiYCY (IO X 0.14) + (2 x 0.5)
233 764..
ROD 271 9 m/29 ft max.

RON 215
1 m/3 ft
: Iesuo Section
Teohnicgl desoription T4 7
February 8, 90
I
Evalujdion of reference marks
After switch-r% * the reference mark of each axis must be traversed.
The following ifunctions are therefore possible:
- Traverse range limitation through software-limits.

- Re-generatien of the last workpiece datum after an interruption in machining.~
- Reference fbr PLC-positionings and positionings using the supplementary functions M91. M92
The traversing of the reference marks can be performed as follows:
- BY pressing/the external start button, the axis sequence being determined via machine parameters.
- With the adernal direction buttons, after entry of the code number 84189. The axis sequence is determined by the
machine operator.
The behavioui of the control during reference mark evaluation is determined via the definition of machine parameters.
lkwsnlng s&ad when approaching the rsfemnce marks
The speed for! reference mark approach is determined bv machine parameters.

I
MP9 Entry range:
MP9 E::! 80 .2999B [mm/min]
MP 10 is 2 Roten/ axis:
MPll is IV 80 29998 [“I
MP 323 is V
lhwerslng dlkti when approaching the mfemncs marks
The traversingi direction for reference mark approach can be separately programmed for each axis
MP16 i is x Entry range:

MP 17 is Y 0 A plus direction
MP 18 is 2 1 P minus direction
MP 19 is IV
MP 329 E is v
MP 59 fxis sequence when apprcsching ths Wrenca marks
The axis sequence for reference mark approach is determined bY MP 59 for the axes X. Y, 2 and IV.
Axis V is always the last axis to be traversed.
fhe axis sequence determined bY MP 69 can be altered via markers within the PLC-program. This is
advantageous for operation on machines with changing tool axes.
Via the code number 84169 the operator can traverse the axes over the reference marks in any desired
sequence via the external axis direction buttons, e.g. for backing-off the tool after a power failure.
Entry values for MP 59 determine the sequence for reference mark approach as follows:
OAXY 2 IV 12pzx Y N
,l &X Y IV z 13AZX NY
i2AX z Y IV 14PZY x N
3AXZ IVY 15AZY IVX
:4Ax IV Y z 16&Z N x Y
:5Ax IV z Y 17bZiVY x
6&Y x z IV 1BAlVXY Z
7AYX NZ 19PIVXZ Y
:8&Y Z X IV 2OP IV Y x z
;9AYZ NX 21 AIV Y z x
1OAY IV x z 22P IV z x Y
11PY IVZ x 23 AIV Z Y X
I Iwus ssctlon m9e

Tschnicsl description T5 1
April 4. 89
Evalu$tion of reference marks
Encod$rs with @stance-coded reference marks
,
In connection with TNC 355 we recommended the use of linear and rotary encoders with distance-coded reference marks.
On C-type endoders” with distance-coded reference marks a reference mark track is located adjacent to the incremental track
on the scale. :
By counting the measuring steps from one mark to the next. the absolute position can be determined.
When using lieear encoders, this version reduces the traversing distance for the reference mark routine to only 20 mm
With distancejcoded reference marks. software limits and positioning procedures with M91, M92 are referenced to the
so-called “zero-reference mark”. The zero-reference mark on a linear encoder is the first reference mark which is located
5 mm from the beginning of the measuring length. (On rotary encoders, the zero-reference mark is indicated).
Encoders haviig one reference mark can be used in conjunction with the distance-coded versions on the same machine
If. for examplei the distance-coded reference marks of the Z-axis are traversed after switching the power on. the axis will stop
after only 20 mm. Backing-off the tool from the workpiece is therefore only manually possible, via a code number.
An encoder without distance-coded reference marks can, therefore, also be installed for the Z-axis
From machine parameters, the control determines if encoders with distance-coded reference marks are being used.
Rsfsmnce *k spacings fcr distsnce-coded limr snd rotary enccdan
MP 242 Entry range:

M? 243 i22 0 65535
MP 244 Axis 2 0 p No distance-coded reference marks
MP 246 his IV 1000 p Linear encoders with 20 urn grating period
MP328 +dsV 1000 A Rotary encoders with 36 reference marks and 18000 lines
The entry value is determined by the following formula:

Constant spacing (e.g. 20000 urn)
Linear encoders: Entry value =
Grating period (a. g. 20 pm)
tine number x 2
Rotary mmkw: Entn/ Wlue = Number of reference marks
I’ LS 107C. G 7OAC. LS 403C. Ls 404C. ROD 26OC. ROD 271C. RON 26.X. RON 276C. ROD 700C. ROD 8OOC
~ hue
November 21, 89
I-I T5
hw
2
I
Evalu+tion of reference marks
Linear lencoders with one reference mark at the end of the
traversing range
Behaviour during reference mark approach depends on MP 69.
MP 69 @fwcmoe mark approach
MP69=0
After traversing the reference marks. the axes traverse to the software limits (MP 44 to MP 61). lf the axis position is past the
reference mark when switching-on. the machine traverses to the EMERGENCY STOP switch. To prevent this, the reference
mark must be; located outside the software limit.
~ r- I--< ‘::::::::n the

EMERGENCY STOP limit switches
A Measuring length ~-1 1 Linear encoder

t-
Reference mark
MP69El
After traversing the reference mark each axis returns to that reference mark. In this case, the reference mark location must be
inside the sof&vare limit.
~ VT ~~~~e~~~n the
A Measuring length -II Linear encoder
Reference mark
If, in the secoed case, the spindle head is between the reference mark and the software limit when starting the reference
mark routine, the machine traverses to the EMERGENCY STOP switch.
MP 69 = 2 see sheet T5/7
Issue Section me
Technical deactiption T5 3
April 4. 89
Evalu tion of reference marks
Cams “Ior reference end position
If the axis poskion is past the reference mark. i.a. just before the software limit. the EMERGENCY STOP limit switch is
automatically approached when performing the reference mark routine.
In this case the axis must be manually traversed in the opposite direction. prior to the reference mark routine.
This procedure can be automated with the aid of a reference cam.
For the operation sequence of automatic reference mark approach with ‘reference end position” sac flow diagram on
sheet T5/6.
Software limit
Range between the
Linear encoder
Cam ‘Reference end position”
Open
Switch %sfarence and position”
“reference end position” any required number of vacant inputs can be assigned via the PLC-program.
end position function is executed bY markers M2556 to M2559 (see sheet P3/22).
~ Issue SectlOll me
April 4. 69 T5 4
tion of reference marks
measurement via ballscrew and rotary encoder
If measureme t IS berng performed with a rotary encoder and ballscrew. a reference mark is traversed with every rotation of
theencoder.
$I’rth the ard of the control inputs “reference pulse inhibitors” at connection X10, undesired reference mark
signals can be suppressed by means of a cam. Inputs for reference pulse inhibitors must be activated via machine
parameters.
MP 20 Entry values:
MP21 Bit 1
NIP 22 + 0 A Reference pulse inhibitor inactive
MP 23 + 2 A Reference pulse inhibitor active
MP 239 is 8
MP 330 is v
For function of Bit 0. see sheet CWl6.
~ Issue SSCtiOil page

Tschnicnl dwoription T5
4pril 4. 89 5
I
tion of reference marks
,ar measurement via ba,kcrew .and rotary encoder
c 4 Software limits
Range between
Possible reference pulses from
AAAAA rotary encoder
ired~reference pulse
I Cam
I I I “Reference end position”
,I
closed I open Switch “Reference end position”

I ’i Cam
I I “Reference pulse inhibit”
closed W dosed Switch “Reference pulse inhibit”
Start reference ma& approach
/
SWitCh YES
“Reference end position. I
1 I
Machin in programmed Machine traverses opposite
direction [ achine parameters to programmed direction
16.17.1 ,19) towards the (machine parameters 16.17.
cam ” eference end 19.19) way from cam
position’ i ntil the reference “Reference end position-.
marlj is traversed.
J I I
I
I
NO
switch opens reference
mark is traversed.
YES
Machine stops.
Ibun
pril 4. 99
asmment via bakcrew and rotary encoder
Special pmc+htm for spproeohin0 mfmn~~ mafkdw’
The special pr &we for reference mark approach is only required if there ara several reference marks within the axis
traversing ran e (e.g. when employing rotary encoders for feedback) and there ere no additional cams installed for reference
pulse suppres r ion, but only one cam for the reference end position. The special procedure for reference mark approach can
be activated via MP 69.
In this case. tde switch for the reference pulse inhibitor is also used for the reference end position. Since e number of
reference mar can be covered by the “reference end position” cam, the axes which are located within the range of the
reference end PposItIon
” must be backed-off from the reference end position cam prior to approaching the reference marks.
The display a ss over X,NlZ/lV reference mark” for the axes on the reference end position cams is displayed in inverse
characters. If.p$u ring the backing-off procedure. reference marks are traversed, they are not evaluated. When all axes are off
the reference bnd position cams. the reference mark approach is carried out as normal and. in each case, the lst reference
mark after thejclosing of the switch “reference end position’ is evaluated. After traversing the reference mark. the axis is
stopped (see {low diagram, sheet T5/8).
MP 69 iafa- mark ammach

@Xly value 0 or 1 s& sheet T5/3
+ 2 A Special procedure for reference mark approach active
i- -l Sofhwre limit
Range between
A A A &A Possible pulses from
quired reference pulse ‘~ rotary encoder
-
I
) I! Cam “reference end position”
closed I I open Switch “reference end position”
I II
Switch ‘Reference pulse inhibitor”
closed
Switch for ‘reference pulse inhibitor” and “reference end position”
Cam switch” TNC 355
<r. Reference pulse inhibit
must be a normally closed configuration. driving the “reference pulse inhibit’ input directly. This avoids any
clay associated with the PLC-program.
For recognitioti of the reference end position the signal must be inverted via the PLC.
I
~ kmle section
Techt$cal de8erimtbn T5 ?
qprit 4. 89
suremen * ix&crew and rotary encoder
ND YES
“Pass over reference mark

in inverse che&ters.
After pressing the external START

button machine axes traverse
opposite to programmed direction
until the switch ‘reference end
position” opens.
nca end position’
MaFhine stops.
~ Ieeue Seotion me
Technical dwcriptkm
hpril 4. 89 T5 8
Acce ories
Electra7 ic handwheels
Four versions gre available:
Portable hand+heel with magnetic fasteners. Conne&ible via cable adapter (see sheet T7/8):
IliR 250 Axis selection via axis keys at the TNC
tiR 330 Axis selection via axis keys in handwheel housing. Additional keys for emergency stop, rapid
traverse and traverse direction are integral on HR 330.
Handwheel fad incorporation in machine operating panel: connectible via extension cable or directly onto the LE 355
(see sheet Mq4)
ly 150 Flush-mount version of HR 250
R 130 Flush-mount version of HR 330

1
The HR 330/dR 130 handwheels can be installed only on the LE 355C/S and LE 355CR/SR.
A machine pa ameter must be set to correspond to the handwheel model employed. This is possible only with a special
software avail a:ble from HEIDENHAIN.
MP171 ~
Bit0 election of handwhwl

f 0 P HR 150/HR 250
i 1 A HR 130/HR 330
Machine vibrations can be transmitted to the handwheel and therefore lead to unwanted axis movement. The response
sensitivity can ibe reduced via machine parameter MP 247.
MP 247 maia for electronic handwheel

ntn/ range:
” 65 535 [increments]
1 increment is l/10000 of a handwheel revolution.
~issue SWllOll me
Novkmber 21. 89 I T6 1
Acce ries
T probe systems
3D-Tovch
The 3D-touch~probe systems from HEIDENHAIN are available in three versions:
.TS 111 with ble transmission to APE-unit (interfere electronics)

.TS 120 with ii ble transmission and integral APE interface electronics
.TS 511 with idfra-red transmission to SE 510 (receiving window) and APE-unit (interface electronics)
For connections, see sheet M3/5
The touch probe system can only be used if marker 2503 has been reset in the PLC. Locking of the spindle. especially for the
application of hhe 3D-touch probe system TS 111or TSl20. should be provided by the machine tool builder.
Machine par+ten for 3D-touch probe systems
MP 171 ~=$n,d*fw’-w-s
I z P, TS 111or TS 120
MP *” k Z$O?%lO [mm/min]
MP 216 &lwswing range

Entry range: 0 19999,999 [mm]
ff the measuring point is not reached within the measuring range, the following error message is displayed:
~ TOUCH POINT INACCESSIBLE
MP 235 #afaty clearance above mea~~~uring point for automatic meaauremerit

&try range: 0 19999,999 [mm]
The axes are positioned in rapid traverse (MP 251) until the safety clearance is reached. Probing is then
executed at a programmed feed rate (MP 215).
MP 261 Rapid traverse for probing

Entry range: 80 29998 [mm/min]
Issue Section Page

Technical dwcripthw
April 4. 89 T6 2
Dimensions mm/INCH
1
1. Dimensions LE 3568
Issue Technical description Section me

AMI 4. 89 T7 1
Dimensions mm/INCH
1
2. Dimensions LE 3650
.’
,,
.,,
‘,
,‘ ‘,
Issue Section me
Technical description T7 2
April 4. 89
Dimensions mm/INCH
3. Dimensions TE 355AJC
_1
::: -:‘.:
;i,;:, .i
:,,
::,
Issue Section me
Februaw 8. 90 T7 3
Dimensions mm/INCH
4. Dimensions TE 3558/D
.,
.;,:.: ,,
,,
Issue Section mle

February 8, 90 T7 4
Dimensions mm/INCH
5. Dimensions HEIDENHAIN Machine operating panel MB 301
ISSUS
February 8.90
Dimensions mm/INCH
6. Dimensions BE 4128
ISSUB
April 4. 89
Dimensions mm/INCH
7. Dimensions Pt. 300
Issue Section mle

Technical description T7 7
ADril 4. 89 I
Dimensions mm/INCH
8. Dimensions Adapter
-
Installation hole f&wall thickness S < 4/.157 Installation hole for wall thickness S > 4/.157
Cableade+rforHR330 ~5 , -
Id.-Nr. 2491889 . . I I
Installation hole for wall thickness S < 41.157 Installation hole for wall thickness S > 4/.157
Id.&. 23916801
Issue Section me
November 21. 89 I T7 8
Dimensions mm/INCH
,,
., .’
Issue Section mw
November 21, 89 I T7 9
Standard an export version
In addition to the standard software which contains all capability features of the TNC 356. an export version is offered.
Until sofM’ar versions 12 (4 axes) and 06 (5 axes) the following functions were not included in the export version:
- 3D interpol tion
- blockwise t ansfer end simultaneous execution
- automatic ompensation in one axis, dependent on another axis.
Beginning wit software version 13 (4 axes) and 7 (5 axes), the only inhibited function is the -automatic compensation in one
axis depende t on another axis.” This function is also called axis sag compensation (see sheet X2/6.1).
NC-eoftw.9 number owwfw

~
Depending o li the software variation and the language, a diierent software number is designated. English language is
available es the second language for every control. The last two digits of the software number indicate the software version.
1
TNC 366 for 4 axes with spindle odemtation
Standard vers on (TNC 355 B/Q) kq.xart version (TNC 365F/w)
NC-software 4 umber Language NC-software number Language

237320.. I D (German) 237330. D (German)
322.. / F (French) 332. F (French)
323.. / I (Italian) ,333. I (Italian)
324.. j E (Spanish) . ..334.. E (Spanish)
326.. / S (Swedish) 336. S (Swedish)
327.. / DK (Danish) 337. DK (Danish)
,328.. j SF (Finnish) 338. SF (Finnish)
329.. 1 NL (Dutch) ,339. NL (Dutch)
TUC 366 for 6 axes
’ TNC 3556/D&W without spindle oriantation (phase-out as of February 89)
TNC 35X/S/~/Y end CR/SR/GR/YR with rpindie orient&iOn
Standard vers n (TNC 3558/Q and C/S (CR/%)) Export version (TNC F/W and G/Y (GFWR))
NC-software ‘umber Language NC-software number language

1
237340.. ) D (German) 237350. D (German)
,342.. / F (French) 352. F (French)
343.. / I (Italian) 353. I (ltaliin)
344.. / E (Spanish) 364.. E (Spanish)
346.. I S (Swedish) 356. S (Swedish)
347.. i DK (Danish) 367. DK (Danish)
348.. j SF (Finnish) 368. SF (Finnish)
,349.. / NL (Dutch) ,369. NL (Dutch)
/ Iaaue Sootion ml0

Tuohnloal dsaorlptkm T8 1
Nov mber 21.89
lNC366fo~4axw
NC-software kion Date of release

2373. .Ol j July 1987
2373. .02 I October 1987
2373. .03 I November 1987
2373. .04 j December 1987
2373. .05 j May 1988
2373. .08 ; October 1988
2373. .09 / November 1988
2373. .lO 1 Februan/ 1989
2373..11 : March 1989
23733.13 i October 1989 Only for export version
1 ~
lNC 366 for! 6 axoa
NC-software jersion Date of release

2373. .Ol I May 1988
2373. .OZ ~ April 1988
2373. .04 January 1989
2373. .05 ; March 1989
23735.07 ~ October 1989
leesue Technical dmcdption

Fe@xy 8. 90
Cont+its
Section F‘age
Pmvlskns f+ installation Ml
Electrical intei-ference Ml
Temperature Ml
Air humidity ~ Ml
Mechancial vibration Ml
Instfalling th+ logic unit LE 366 M2 1
Ekctrkal CO~IWCUO” OI the logic unit LE 356 M3 1
Connecting tlje encoders M3 1
Connecting t$s electronic handwheel M3 4
Connecting tde touch probe systems M3 5
Connecting ttje nominal value outputs M3 6
Connecting the data interface RS-232~C/V.24 M3 8
Connecting tIie PLC-inputs and outputs M3 9
Inputs for refqrence pulse inhibitors M3 12
Connecting t& TNC-keyboard unit TE 355 and the machine operating panel M3 13
InstallIng thq vkwl dispky unit BE 4128 M4 1
Potwsrsup& M5 1
,
Logic unit LE 355 and PL 300 M5 1
Visual displayjunit 8E 4128 M5 2
Dsslgnatlon b units M6 1
chmrvkwof~bks M7 1
Gmunding d(ngram M8 1
TNC 3558 (0j ME 1
TNC 355C (S) ME 2
-
; Issue Section hw
Mountlngandekctrk?ll-ion
November 21,89 MO 1
Remember, a atironic equipment with faster signal processing and increasing responsiveness is also more susceptible to
interferencel erefore. protect the equipment against interference by following the instructions and recommendations given
in this manua i”
F’oasible sou of l~lfaNnw alu:

.stmn@ mag atic flak4 from tNndorman or elwtric motoN
.rdays, clmu braakem and solenoid valvaa
.high fraqw Inetrummts, pulse garwatom and atray magnetic 8ekls from day power suppIle
.powar lhme if-/ nd fad lines to the abovamantlonad aqulpmant
Int~ivotta80 is mainly produced and transmitted through cap8&hm or induc%s v stray pickup can
be caused vi4 power lines and equipment inputs and outputs.
The following pmtacthm measures must be taken to avoid electrical interference:

.Mlnlmum dl noe from the LE 355 and its signal conductor@ to Intarfann+pmdudng lntrumante: 2 20 cm/8 In.
.Minimum dl k nee from the LE 355 and its signal conductors to Intarlenncwonductlng cablw: 2 10 cm/4 In.
uwea note::
) When leyin8 bll LE 355 signal lines together with other interference-conducting cables in metal cable ducts, sufficient
decoupling cE(n be attained through a grounded partition.
The lines mu be shielded according to DIN WE 0180.

For rlgnal linljs onl@ spa&l HEIDENHAIN cable may ba usedI
Lay signal lines as short as possible and. if possible. without I~rmodlnta clamp twmlnal&~
For nominal value connections to a transfer unit, only HEIDENHAIN cable should be used.
Always use HklDWHAlN plug connector and wuplings for connecting signal lines.
flaaw note :
Follow the mbly kwttuctions for plugs and couplings (see diagram page M3/3).
.If there are Tpl g connections within a line, coincidental contacts between plug/coupling housing and other metal parts must
be preventedje.1. either lnaulate or sacurn connactor hourlngl
Besides cablaishielding. matal howims of encoders. digitizing electronics, controls etc. also serve as shielding.
They must ha’e aqua1 potential and be connected to a common opwatlonal ground via the machine housing or a
separate pota 1.trel equalization line.
In thls ragad, note the special twnarka In the IndMdual sections.
I
The potantlal~ equalization lines of the appropriate units must have cross-sections of at laaot 6 mm’ Cu.
The potantialjaquallzatlon Ilna of the LE 355 must be connected to the terminal on the LE 355 and to the pmtecUw
ground. I
~ I8sUO 8eotion pa80

Mounting and alwtrical connactlon Ml 1
April 4. 89
for installation
Pemtiuibk ~mblent temperaturn In opemtkn: 00 C . . .48 C (So F . . . iiao F).

See rneasurir/g points 1 O C (sheets M2/2: M2/3).
Remember ‘hat the mlkblllty cd ekctronk equlp~nt d ocmaas# greatly during prolonged operation at high
tampamtu I
Use appropri4 te procautlans to ensure compliance to permissible ambient tamperaturas:
Maintain the #ree space necessary for adequate air circulation (see sheet M1/3).
When mounting. refer to figs. on sheets M2/2: M2/3; Ml/3 regarding temperature
maw nota
Select a mou/lting location that provides good air circulation for the LE 355.
.LE 355 muat /not be located in the flow of pre-heated air from another source.
The control cabinet must be dustproof. i.e. cable grommets. the cabinet door etc. must be properly sealed against penetration
of dust.
b :
For olowd &ml hourings wlthout artlflcial coolly the Mndard v&to for heat extractIon ir sppmx. 3 W/m*
surfaw and br o C tsmomtum rka betwean Intarnal end oxtwnal air.
Plww note:1
When calcule ing the excess temperature the total power dlsslpatlon oi all lnetrumenta that are operating in the control
cabinet must bi e included.
HElDENHAl ’ recommends the instalktion ol a vantlktor for bettor heat extraction.

v
The ventilator,should amplih/ the effect of natural convection.
It must be m&axed so that the warm air is extracted from the LE 365 and that no artificially heated air is blown in.
The extratiediair should, if possible, run along surfaces that provide a good outward heat conductivity (e.g. sheet metal).
A further impdovement for heat removal can be attained through the UI of a heat exchange# (with separate external and
internal circuljtion).
Cooling by o changing exterior with interior air in the control ablnet: If this cooling method is intended, the ventilator
must be mou 1ted such, that it extracts the air from the control cabinet and that only flltemd external air can flow into the
control cabin ‘.
HElDENHAl I$ advlsea against this cooling method, since the functional reliability of electronic components is endangered
by air contaminants (fine dust. vapours, etc.).
I Moreover, in ddition to the abovementioned disadvantages, an inadequetly maintained filter causes a progressive decrease in
cooling efficie1 cy
Regular maltjtenance of the filter Is therafom im~rativel
i issue SWtlOll kw
Mounting and dwtdwl oonnactlon Ml 2
April 4. 89
ions for installation
i b~tue Mounting and elaotrkal camction

Sectlon ,mY
Ajxil 4, 89 Ml 3
Fermidble bir humidity: 5 76 % (permanent operation)
5 96 % (maximum 30 days/year, naturally distributed).
recommended not to turn the control off, if the danger of condensation on the FCBs exists!
the control itself prevents condensation and has no other disadvantages.
I IesuO SOCtlObl
Mounting and hotriaal connoedon Ml ?
pril 4, 89
‘.
Provi Ions for installation
Mech 1! nical vibration ~’
) I
Fwnlleelble
~htlo”:s 0.6g
Mounting and elacbhl connection

lnstal~ing the logic unit LE 355
b / \
valid in your country for mains power supply.
mcommends the horizontal mounti~ attitude for I.6 366, see illustration sheet M2/2
re then on the left, verlically arranged.

ounting position (illustrated on sheet M2/3) is less favourable due to insufficient heat ventilation.
for servicing purposes (exchanging subassemblies) must be maintained

(see figs. on dheets M2/2; M2/3).
for the plug connectoral

on the basis of the permissible cable bend radii: > 110 mm/4.3 in (see figs. on sheets M2/2: M2/3)
1 for servicing: approx. 250 mm/l0 in.
and rating plates,

number stickers, and
6ectlon me
Mounting and electrical connaotlon 1
M2
ing the logic unit LE 355
ontd mounting
Minimum clearanc
recommended: =
approx. 250 mm/l0 in
Identification plate
Maintain clearance
for screwdriver
swivel movemen
of the control
Y Measuring point for

*O ambient temperature
---- Free space for air circulation
-a-- Free
._. soace
.p___ for
._. __. .._... jl
mrvicinn
Illustration of
max. swivel range.
The minimum angle of
:?%&%!;:valuld
be at least 900
Issue Section mle

pril 4. 89 Mounting and elaotrical connection
M2 2
lnstal ng the logic unit LE 365
LE3s6vw IImounting-
Minimum c earance Measuring point for

for swicin I ambient temperature
recommen 4 ed:
Free space for air circulation
= approi. 450 mm/l0 in
Free space for servicing
viiw x (opened for exchange

of subassembly)
.yr-‘ .
\\.\ \\ 8” \ ‘\
\\ _----_- 1
fl!fL
L.;.
Connecting cables must not hinder

free movement of the control
Recommended swivel angle > 900

1 for accessibility of plug connectors
and identification plate
( Issue 6ectkm mle

ril 4. 99 Mounting and elo&kel connodon
M2 3
..Q ~,.~,), i
ical cbnnectioti of the IQgic unit LE 355
cting the encoders
to the mounting instructions of each respective encoder!
cable. refer to the general remarks in section Ml “Electrical interference”1
be laid without intermediate terminals.

plug connectors and couplings to connect encoder lines.
Use only HEI ENHAIN double shielded cable with twisted wire pairs. Id.-Nr. 200775.., as extension cable for the X, Y, 2 and
N encoder a s!
.The inner shi Id (pin 9) must have no electrical contact with the outer shield (plug housing)1
.The outer shif Id of the encoder cable must be connected to the ground connection of the LE 355 (see Grounding diagram
section M8). ~
.The encoder ib grounded via its mechanical fixings; with sealed linear encoders via the mounting block and the scale housing
(see Groundi g diagram section M8).
, The maximu cable length between the encoder scanning unit and LE 355 (or the EXE-unit) is 20 m/65 ft. with the standard
cable (Id.-Nr. ” 0077502) and 30 m/98 ft. with the special cable (Id.-Nr. 22856701).
Use only HEI ENHAIN single shielded cable, Id.-Nr. 246512.. as extension cable for the encoder connection X5.
.The shield m st be electrically connected to the LE 355 via the plug housing and to the machine housing via the ground
connection of9 the LE 355 (sea Grounding diagram sheet M8/l).
i
With external tiigltmng electronics (EXE). the ground connection must be electricalh/ connected to the machine housing
Required crosk-section 2 6 mm’.
1 Ieeue Swtlon me
Mounting and elwtrlc3l oonnwtion M3 1
Fedwary 8. 90 I
Electr =a1connection of the logic unit LE 355
Conne ting the encoders
Please note:
Check electric connection between the mounting block of the scanning unit and the scale unit housing. Since the encoder
connector an’ he mounting block of the scanning unit are connected via the external shield of the cable, this check can be
made betwef the encoder connector and encoder housing.
During this cl :k, no connection should be made to the LE 355.
IIIsaue Mounting and ekotrioal commotion

seotion
lril 4. 99 M3 T
?
Elect1 cal connection of the IOgic unit LE 355
Conm sting the encoders
1 Aeeembllna
M Plug connector 228661..
Y Couplln(l228682..
Fig.
la+ Do not open a DIUQ connector or

2a coupling by co&t&acting with a
mating connector1
1b To assemble the plug an

assembly tool Id.-Nr. 23614601
and s 22-mm open jaw spanner
must be used.
2b To assemble the coupling an

adjustable pipe wrench with
plastic jaw-linings must be used.
This figure illustrates the various

parts for plug and coupling and
the two different gland versions
PG7 and PG9. for the armoured
tubing. The F’G9 gland, Id.-Nr.
20962901. consisting of the
parts XI. Y,. 2,. must be ordered
separately.
Slide parts A - D onto the cable

thereby assembling the gland for
the armoured tubing, according to
fig. 3 if applicable. Remove 22 m/
0.67 inch from the outer insula-
tion. Twist outer screening open
and fold back.
Cut the outer screening back to

3 mm/O.12 inch of the outer layer
of insulation and slide the contact
bushing E between the inner layer
of insulation and the woven
screening.
Remove inner insulation to 5 mm/

0.20 inch.
1) Twist inner screening together.

2) Insulate the twisted inner
screening with thermo-shrink-
able sleeve.
6 Remove 3 mm/O.12 inch of insula-

tion from all the strands. Twist. tin
and solder onto G or G, according
to the connector layout plan.
9 Assemble part F.
10 Close connector together.
lrue 8ectlon mm
Mounthg and electrlcel oonnectlon
lril 4. 89 M3 3
connection of the bgic unit LE 355
,cting the electronic handwheel
marks in section Ml “Electrical interference” when laying the cable

see grounding diagram on ME/l.
be connected directly to the logic unit LE 355. The HR 250 must be connected to the logic unit LE 355 via
An extension can be made with the original HEIDENHAIN encoder extension cable (Id.-Nr. 235806. .)
Layout for handwheel adapter and

encoder etiension cable
Cable ada ter for HR 250 Kll col0ur

Id.-Nr. 21,P!228 1 green
: ~ 2 yellow
3 brown
4 1 white
blue
1 red,
I
grw
1 pink
9 white/brown
The maximu cable length between LE 355 and HR 250 is 20 m/65 ft. i.e. with a
3 m/10 h cab e on the HR 250 the cable adapter may have a max. length of
1
l7 m’55 ft. )
HR 330lHR 130
Is HR 130 and HR 330 can only be connected to the LE 355W and LE 355CWSR (see sheet T6/1).
n be connected directly to the TNC. The HR 330 must be connected to the TNC via the HEIDENHAIN cable
adapter.
I
Cable ada’ ter for HR 330
Id.-Nr. 24 1,889
length 38 m (124 ft)
’ Iseue Mounting and elootrical connection

SOCUOll me
Fe wary 8, 90 M3 4
connection of the Ia@c unit LE 365
the touch probe systems _-
Mounting /
When mounti g. refer to the mounting instructions of the touch probe system being employed!
1
Ekotrkal i kenoe
Use only HEID

‘“r NHAIN double shielded cables as specified in the respective mounting instructions!
The inner shiejd and outer shield must not be electrically connected.
When laying t e cable refer to the remarks in section Ml “Electrical interference’.

i
rounding see grounding diagram on sheet MS/l.
APE llO/APE 510 must be grounded via the grounding terminal by means of an earthing cable with a
k?-%f&ii+ E TNC3566(Q)
Id.-Nr. 232984
TNC 355C (S)

Id.-Nr. 244893..
Connector layout TS 111 APE IlO-connection to subsequent electronics

Connector. male. 7-pole : (7-pole flange socket, male)
Contact No. / Allocation API5 110 1 sub8sqwnt~elaotmnlcll

1 Reference voltage 1 Pin Signal I Signal
2 Symmetry lines 1 + 2 I 1 U. e-l-ov
3 ! LED Anode (+ 5 V) -2 UP ---+24v(15...29v)
4 LED Cathode 3 not assigned
5 Sensor signal 1 ,4 Trigger signal -(I Trigger signal
I
6 Sensor signal 2 -6 Bridge to Up ~Raady
7 Internal screen (0 V) -6 Bridge to Up Battery warning
Connector hodsing Outer screen 7 Internal screen 4 0V
Connector External screen --/- Housina ootential
1 housing I -
6y altering the switch setting St. Ss in the APE 110 the trigger
signal can be inverted.
! Issue Sectlon
Mounting and alectrloal wnnegtion
February 8, 90 M3 T
_
Elect1 A connection of the logic unit LE 355
Contx ting the touch probe systems
Ts 120
The interfacf fctronics (APE) are incorporated within the touch probe system TS 120.
Connecting cable complete. max. 60 m/164 ft
TNC 355C (S)

Id.-Nr. 244991..
Connector laVh it TS 120

Lemosa-con tor
I
Contact No . I 1 Allmation
1
2
3
4
5
6
Housing
connection of thm lqk unit LE 365
ing the touch probe systems
ls611 !
TNC 3558 (Q)

Id.-Nr. 231917
maxm TNC 355C (S)

aid.-Nr. 244893..
Mount the trahsmitterlreceiver unit SE 510 insulated or electrically conductive with the machine!
ust be distinctly conductive or insulated in the avant of a. g. vibration
APE 510 Connection to subsequent electronics

(7-pole flange socket, male)
contacl No. / 1 Allocation APE 6101611 I Subsequent eleolmnlcs

I
1 I 0 v IUul,.. Pin Sianal I Sianal
1 I
2 i + 12 v (Up) 1 UN 4 ov
3 I Vacant 2 UP -./w +24V(15...29V)
4 I Flash signal
5 I I Vacant
6 I I IR-sional
7 ) Internal screen (0 V)
Connector ho$sina 1 External screen
By altering tha switch settings S, to S., in the APE 510, the

signalscan be inverted.
L;
1
ISWe Seotlon ml@
Mounting and deotrlal oonnectbn
pril 4, 89 M3 5.2
,, ..,~
Electr(cal connection of the ,aogic unit LE 355
Connefzting the nominal value outputs
,
SpdflCSti0n
Nominal value output 0 - 9v
t max.loadZmA
max. capacitance 4.7 nF
nd electrical p&on against Intwfenncs
cable, refer to the remarks on section Ml “Ebatdcml I~rfamnce”.
lue outputs must not have more than one Intennodl~ twnlnel clamp.
clamp must be either in the control cabinet or in a grounded metal terminal box1 This is necessary if
necessan/ to servo-inputs with remote location. This is the only possibility for sufficiently grounding the lines
lnternwdiete terminal connections with a grounded terminal box wlthln thy intetfece ceblnet
4 in.“nschieldad
LE355
I
caution
HEIDENHAIN ecommends the connection of motor regulators with nominal value difference input.
1
If required. ter/ninal boxes are available from HEIDENHAIN, Id.-Nr. 25124901.
!
beus seotbn
Mounting and electrlcel cOmwcUon M3 T
November 21. 89
Electr’d connection of the logic unit LE 355
Conne 1ting the nominal value outputs
-4 gumtion for connection of shields in the twmlnnl box Id.-Nr. 26124901.
LE 355
i Insulated against housing
Leads ara provided with end

sleeves
Cable screens are led onto

0.14 mm2 insulated strands
(A.W.G. 25lS.W.G. 26) via
I I I I I I crimp eyelets.
SERVO
Layout:
-renninal I
1 Analog a output X-axis
2 Analog&e output 0 V X-axis
3 Analog i-1a outpti Y-axis
4 Analogbe output 0 V Y-axis
5 Analogbe output Z-axis
6 Analogbe output 0 V Z-axis
7 Analogbe output axis IV
10 Analogiue output 0 V axis V
11 AnalogIJe output axis S
12 Analohe output 0 V axis S
13
14
Screens
15
16 I
YIssue
No ember 21. 89 I Mountlng and elwWcnl connection
Swtlon
M3
Me
6.1
connection of the logic u:nit LE 355
the nominal value outputs
n LE 365 and terminal box with lCpole8, female lnoludlw transfer unlt
only applicable if the distance between the transfer unit and the input of the servo-amplifier is not greater then
Transfer uni
PHOENIX C NTACT Type FLKM-D 15 SUB/S Order No. 22811131
I Murrelektro Type UGSub 15 S Order No. 54031 + 2-off 54079
Murrelektronik
Fabrikstr. 10
7155 OppenweilevWest, Germany
.Tel. (07191) 470
FAX: (07191) 4730
cablebao+ n LE 365 and terminal box

I
I
Id.-Nr. 24448
a+=====- Screen is beneath rubber sleeve,

If necessary. extend with strand.
Connector. l&pole, solder terminals . .

for prefabricated cable
Id:Nr. 2439712Y
Layout: ~
CF
Assembly
.* Layout. see below
ol cormrotor
1’
1 = brown ~ Outer insulation removed Screen folded back
2=vacant ~
3 = yellow ~
4 = red/blue1
5 = pink
6 = greY/pin
7 = red 1
3 Insulation removed, not tinned
8 = violet ~
9 = white ~
10 = vacant l-T=-
11 = green
12 = vacant
13=grey
14 = blue
15=black
I 12 Cable sleeve over screen and cable
ISSIlO M~lrtlng and okctdoal mnneotlon

April 4, 89 M3 T
of the logic unit LE 355
e data interface RS-232-C/V.24
Cable layout and &ctd I protection against interfwenca
Use only HEI ENHAIN ca les and adapters.

b
With proper c nnection wd guarantee trouble-free dftta tmnemirlon up to 20 m/66 ft between the LE 355 and the
peripheral uni
P
diagram on sheet M8/l
external RS-232Gdata transmission cable Id.-Nr. 24286901 with 3 m/10 ft is being used, the internal
transmission cable may have a max. length of 17 m/65 ft.
LE 355 and RS-232~C/V.24 adapter Lug for drawing-in

the cable. The con-
nector housing is
supplied in a sepa-
cable has been
Layout for ca les Id.-Nr. 2319760

1 nd Id.-Nr. 24286901 Cable VB. V.24
RS-232~C-connection to peripheral units, 3 m/IO ft long
Location A ~ Looatipn B colour Id.-Nr. 24286901
Pin Pin ~
1 ! 1 ~ white/brown
3 2 vellow
2 13 ~ green
5 14 1 pink
A 8
4 5 ~ wv
20 6 ~ brown
6 20 blue
RS-232XJV.24 adapter
In the RS-232kC/V.24 adapjter the pins of the sockets are Id.-Nr. 239 75801
connected one-to-one.
Issue ~ 6aotlon Me
Mounting and eIocbioal connectbn M3 8
April 4. 89 ~
I
connection of the logic unit LE 355
the PLC-inputs and outputs
/
Cable /layout
To connect th PLC-input/outputs to the LE 355, use one of the following cables (see sheet M3/lO):
Permissible ble length: S 20 m/66 ft, with cross-section of core Z 0.14 mm* Cu.
4
terminals of the PLC-input/outputs of the PLC board PL 200 sre indiiidualh, wired
le length: S 20 m/66 ft with cross-section Z 0.6 mm* Cu.
against i~rhmnca
twaan the LE 355 end PL 300 to hate!femnoe-pmdudng oqulpmont Z 20 cm/8 Inchee, to

cablee Z 10 cm/4 inches, see also section Ml ‘Heetrical I~mnw”.
urces of interference (e.g. breakers. relays, solenoid valves. etc.) can be significantly reduced through an
es etc. in and outside of the control cabinet - even those that are not used or triggered
provided with en interference rejagion circuit (e.g. a quenching diode).
lfiwtlws when udng an IWmnco mjwtkm dmultl
r the PLC-lnput/outpata of the LE 355 and PL 300 must be electrically connected to

e mwhiw (= operating ground + [Bl)l
(see grounding diagram, sheet M8/1).
aIasw
pril 4, 89 I
Mountl~ and dwtrlwl connwtlon
connedion of the logic unit LE 355
LE 355 and terminal box with 37 poles. female
Recommen ed transfer unit from:

PHOENIX C NTACT Type FLKM-D 37 SUB/S Order No. 2281115
Murrelektro ik Type UGSub 37 S Order No. 54096 + 2-off 64079
n
PHOENIX CONTACT Murrelektronik
Elektrizit8tsgesellschaft Fabrikstr. 10
Postfach 1341 7155 Oppenweiler
4933 Blomberg West Germany
West Germany Tel. (07191) 470
Tel. (05235) 550 FAX (07191) 4730
Telex: 935863
FAX: (05235) 55200
Cable be “LE3Flbox ,, I.
Id.-Nr. 244 05
Assembly, see next sheet
I IsaIm SMtlOlt m@
Mounting anll electrical connectkat M3 10
#pril 4. 89
connection of the kq#c wit LE 355
Cut back outer insulation LOW:

--
1 = greylred
2 = brown/black
3 = white/black
4 = green/black
5 = brown/red
6 = white/red
Remove insulation. d6’not tin 7 = white/green
8 = red/blue
9 = yellow/red
10 = grey/pink
11 = black
12 = pink/brown
over screen insulation 13 = yellow/blue
14 = green/blue
15 = yellow
16=red
17=grey
18 = blue
19 = pink
20 = whlle/grey
21 = yellow/grey
22 = green/red
23 = white/pink
24 = greylgreen
25 = yellow/brown
26 = grey/brown
27 = yellow/black
28 = white/yellow
29 = grey/blue
30 = pink/blue
31 = pink/red
32 = brown/blue
33 =,pink/green
34 = brown
35 = yellow/pink
36 = violet
37 = while
aleeoe
oril 4. 89
Electrkal cqmmction of tb Iq#c unit LE 355
Inputs for reference pulse inhibitors
I
A g-pole plug connector can be supplied by HEIDENHAIN for the connection of the reference pulse inhibitor.
I Mounting and rkotrlcrcll confw&bn

Electr ‘Cal connection of the unit LE 355
Conne & ing the TNC-keyboard unit TE 355 and the
machije operating panel
Cable layout nd decbtcal protwtbn against intetinnco
i
Use only the EIDENHAIN cable Id.-Nr. 239759.. to connect the TE 355 to the LE 355
free space for avows to oonnsotiona in the event of service,

blo banding radius: r Z 5D mm/2 inehea.
Screening an! gmmding must be executed as per the grounding diagram on sheet ME/l. \
The machine ‘perating panel can be connected to the LE 355 ekher directly or via the TN&keyboard unit (TE 355).
j
HEIDENHAIN &commends the following cables and also offers a connector, should the operator be compelled to manufacture
his own cable./
Cable betw n LE 355 and TNC-keyboard unit or machine operating panel

Id.-Nr. 2397 9 Lug for drawing-in
f cable. The con-
m nector housing is
- tiE% FG and
is assembled after
the cable has
been installed.
Connector. 7-pole
Id.-Nr. 2439 “b 7ZY see assembly instructions sheet M3/11 max. cable length 20 m/65 R
Plug oonn for machine tran8pwtation

For large-size
* machines, a plug connection is advantageous wfthin the cable between the LE and operating panel. Due to
interference. h wever, only one separation is permitted with the TE. The additional cable can be supplied as an extension cable:
Extension cabl 1 , 37-pole, Id.-Nr. 244505
Connection an external feed potantbmstar

Instead of the integral feed potentiometer on the TE 355, an external potentiometer may also be connected. If an external
potentiometer 1 ,in being installed, the feed potentiometer on the TE 355 must be disconnected.
Connector Xl on TE 355
,owAo Pin 18
The 4.75 kQ resistor is used for current limitation in the

event that the connectors for the keyboard unit and machine
& Pin 14 operating panel are interchanged.
luus Ssotlon haa

Mounting and 0bcbiceI wnndon M3 13
Egril 4, 89
connection of the logic unit LE 355
unit TE 355 and the
Ccnnecting MO lNCkeyboard - Machine operating panel
lf no PLC-out iuts ars required and 16 PLC-inputs ere adequate, the machine operating panel can be connected to the LE 355
via a short ce le which extends to the TNC-keyboard unit.
HEIDENHAIN % ffers a universal machine operating panel.
between TNC-keyboard unit and HEIDENHAIN Machine operating panel
lewe Sectlon page

Mounting and hctrlwl connwtion
pril 4. 89 M3 14
Install)ing the visual display unit BE 412B
, Refer to temF/eratura and air humidity requirements in section Ml.
Ekctdcal p kn sgainst intatfsrsncs

+-
When installi the visual display unit, remember that it is s+tiie to stmy magnatk pkkup. The position and geometry of
the picture n be impaired by magnetic interference fields. AltomatIng flelde lead to periodic dislocations or distortions of
the picture.
Maintain a m nimum clearance of 0.6 m/20 inchas between the BE 4128 housing and the source of interference
(e.g. perman1 int magnets, motors, transformers, etc.).
EIDENHAIN connwting cable to connect the BE 4128 to the LE 355.
and gmundlng, see grounding diagram sheet MB/l.
Measuring point for

D ‘[* ambient temperature
--*- Free space for air circulation
Cable b&w n LE 355 and BE 4128 Lug for drawing-in

Id.-Nr. 242 ki74 the cable. The con-
natior housing is
max. cable length 20 m/65 R supplied in a sepa-
rate bag and is
assembled after the
cable has been
installed.
this cable connection can be supplied with a separation point.

ordered from HEIDENHAIN:
, lbpde, Id.-Nr. 244504
luus Saction BY
Mountkg and aketrksl ccnnsctlon M4 1
ril 4, 89
nit LE 355 and PL 300
ust not ba supplied by the machine control voltagel The LE 366 needs its own, external. separately generated
to VDE 0551.24 V DC-voltage with a permissible oscillated AC-component of 1.5 Vpp (recommended filter
0 uF/4O V-).
c
t
and outputs of the LE 356 and PL 300) is operated on the 24 V control vokge of the machlne
according to VDE 0550.
oscillated AC components which derive from an uncontrallad three-phase non-filtered bridge circuit with a
DIN 40110/10.75.Section 1.2) of 5% ara permitted. This results in a maximum absolute value of 33.4 V for
limit and a minimum absolute value of 19.5 V for the lowar limit.
20.4 V
18.5V
The 0 V-llma of the two power sources must be connaotul tog@h#r (0 ZzB mm2) and to the central opamtlng ground
of the .ma&l a ( + q
) via an earth ground (0 Z 6 md).
The voltages ust comply with the definitions given below:

m
Unit Supply voltage Voltage range Max. current Power consumption
I Average DC voltage consumption
--YE 24v Lower limit 1.5 A approx. 30 W
(VDE 0551) 20.4 V 7
LESS6 jplc
1.8 A approx. 6 W
if half of the inputs if approx. l/3 of the
I and outputs are inputs and outputs
driven simultaneously ara driven
24V simultaneously
ii3Gi-L (VDE 0550) Upper limit 21 A approx. 25 :W
31 v :‘I if half of the inputs if approx. l/3 of the
and outputs ara inputs and putputs
driven simultaneously ara driian
simultaneously
” V&age inmas up to 36 V = for t < 100 ms am permissible.
ISWO Section
Mounting snd docbkel cowmoth
P,pril 4. 89 M5 p”p
../i
POW6 SUPPlY
Visual lisplay unit BE 412B
The visual d sy unit BE 412B is supplied by an AC mains voltage. The operating voltage can be sat from two ranges via the
voltage sale1 : Before connecting the VDU. check the voltage selected and the mains fuse rating.
I=
Supply VOH ) Voltage range Frequency range Power consumption Mains fuse
IlOV- 85V--132V- M2A
46 62 Hz approx. 40 W
220 v- 17OV--264V- M 1.25 A
Mains fuse
!rom LE 355 (X9)
I
Power supply
(Mains voltage)
Fun&on test
1
’ lwue Section ble
Mounting and dootrhl connwtlon
pril 4, 89 M5 2
Desigeation of units
ossibilities are available for the designation of the units with numbers (e.g. A.. .):
Hole pattern for plug-in label SS2 of Messrs. L&e.
Friedrich Lutz GmbH 8 Co.

Bruckwiesens 1ral3e 17-19
Postfach 122
D-7066 Wein tadt-Grossheppach/West Germany
Tel. 07151/60 3-O
Telex 724339 %
Issue Mounting and ebct&al connoctlon

April 4, 99
Overvjew of cables
I Nominal value output X8 (sheet M3/10)

&commended -
s+lution
~ ,5-po,e ~~Ei!Ez%YY.$~am, ,,
~ ~wY+.. B z%%For
I
I
Reference pulse inhibition X10 (sheet M3/12)

plug connector 244503zY
g-pole
1
PLC In-Output X21, X22 (sheet M3/9)
Recomr+ended -
s”~ution,7~po,e ~-cml-+jj gb;ao,7
Q Fiug connector
@ 243937zY
Ill
Machine operating panel, X27 (sheet M3/l3)

TNC-keyboard cable TE 355, X23
Separate connector housing included
~ mv m TJi%tT~~Or
’ lrurue Section me
Mounting and ebctrkal connectIan M7 1
Fe wary 8, 90
Ovendew of cables
” If requireh. the machine operating panel may be connected via the TE 355;
Connectir/g cable see sheet M3/14.
2’ RS-23% .24-connection to peripheral units 3 m/10 ft long Id.-Nr. 24286901 (sheet M3/8)
3’ Instead o the HR adapter the flush-mounted handwheel HR 150 or HR 130 can be connected (sheet M3/4)
r
41 Separate ~connector housing included.
Issue Seotlon mw
Mounting and ektrioal connection
Fe wary 8. 90 M7 2
rounding diagram TNC 355B (0)
S55B (0) with Id.-Nr. 237660.,
238324..
242408..
242407..
DENHAIN recommends a capacitor with 10000 uF.

-.-. &l I
:o”plen
I-T*
-~-._.-. 4
I I i i
Grounding diagram TNC 355B (Cl)
LE 3558 (Q) with Id.-Nr. 254581.
254582..
-.MBC
Enccden
r--’
” HEIDENHAIN recommends a capacitor with 10000 pF.

32inputs El
I9 ’ ifi
1!
z>I
-@>
! j .
.- -- ..-. i ._I
a- A!-!- .- -- -.-.-.-
l-
*ounding diagram TNC 355C (S)
r
--
Febr
-.-.-.-
..l.-...-.
+iJ
t
r? 7
L.-.-.
1
Issue Section me
Mounting and electrical connection
February 8. 90 Ma 2
Contents
Section ‘age
Machine panmetm Cl 1
General Cl 1
Edit protection for machine parameters Cl 1
Entry values for muiiiple functions of machine parameters Cl 2
Complete list of machine parameters Cl 3
Entry of mach/ne parameters Cl !3

Code numbers for machine parameters Cl 13
Ently when memoly is erased Cl !4
Entry when memory is programmed Cl !6
Output of machine parameters Cl !7
Machine parameters as user-parameters Cl !8
Desdption d rnaahine parametan c2 1
Machine parameters for the axes c2 2

Axis designation for NC-machines c2 2
Rapid traverse c2 3
Manual feed c2 3
Position window c2 4
Amal-Nominal valuetransfer c2 4
Inhibited axes c2 4
Position display and encoder supelvision c2 5
Rotary fable with HiRh coupling c2 6
Error compensation of machine axes c2 6.1
Machine parameters for displays c2 7
Machine parameters for machine operation c2 8
Machine parameters for control programming c2 9
Machine parameters for program run c2 IO

Constant contouring speed at camen c2 IO
Stepover factor for pocket milling c2 IO
Erasure of status display c2 IO
Scaling factor 2 or 3 axes c2 I1
Output of M- and Sfunnions c2 II
Cycles for milling variable contour pockets c2 I2
Positioning block with Mg2 c2 I3
Datum Wrrection YiBmachineparameters c2 I3
Machine parameters for the canned cycle Tapping” c2 I4
Machine parameters for tool numbers and toolchanger c2 I6

Centraltoedfile c2 I6
Isrue S6CtlOll me
Commimioning 1
April 4. 89 co
Cont&ts
Section ‘age
Commisalon g the machine c3 1
Code number for commissioning c3 1
Checks befor switch-on c3 2
Checks subse uent to switching-on the interface cabinet c3 3
Description of position loop c3 4
Commissionin the servo-amplifiers c3 6

i Optimising the sew+amplifiers c3 6
Determining the acceleration c3 8
TNC switch-o c3 9
Selecting the ialogue language c3 IO
Buffer battery I c3 I1
c3 I2
ontrol-external emergency stop circuit c3 15
and counting directions c3 I6
Software limit~swftch ranges c3 17
NC-axes c4 1
c4 2
Operation wit speed precontrol c4 4
Voltage incre ent at nominal value output c4 5.1
Fine offset adj stment at the servo-amplifier c4 6
Fine offset adj stment through the control c4 8
Speed adjust ent through the control c4 9

1
Optimising op ration with speed precontrol c4 IO
Differencef.¶cmr c4 I1
I Optimising th* difference factor c4 I4
Optimising the acceleration c4 I6
Radial .3ccelerNion c4 I7
Optimising the overshoot behaviour c4 I7
Integral factor c4 21
Position wpwvision for the precontml mode c4 23
Optimising op ration with trailing error (lag) c4 !4

Position loop gain: K&ctot c4 14
1Charstieristic kink paint c4 !7
~Optimising the i+factor c4 !B
Supervision oft positioning c4 33
Ieaue Section me
Commi8donlng
ril 4. 89 co 2
Section IPage
KISKIONING ERROR c4 35
c5 1
c5 1
c5 2
c5 4
c5 10
Issw SSCtiOll mw
Commidoning
April 4, 89 co 3
parameters
ne can correctly execute programmed instructions the control must know specific machine data. e.g.
determined by the machine manufacturer and entered into the control via machine parameters,
functions which ten be made possible with the TNC, but are onh/ characteristic of specific machine types.
via machine parameters e.g. an automatic toolchanger.
‘User-parameters” certain machine parameters can be easiN accessed. e.g. to change over from
lain language to ISO. The user-parameters being accessible via the MOD-function are determined by the
anufacturer. See description sheet Cl/29
n for machine ~ramaten

parameters may not or can only be altered by the machine manufacturer.
parameters is controlled by a code number.
code number may also be inhibited by the machine manufacturer, by using the PCC-marker 2062 and a key-
are summated entry values which are calculated through the combination of several functions (multiple
aIuue
pril 4. 89 I I
Section
Cl I Yge
parameters
Entry values for multiple functiona of machine pannwtem
Max. 8 fun& ns can be activated by bit O-7. The entry value results from the sum of the decimal numerical values of the
bits for the fu ctions requested.
.
2s 24 23 22 2’ 2s
Decimal I I 128 I 64 I 32 I 16 I 8 I 4 I 2 I 1
numerical value I I - I
-----L--
Example: Del ermination of entry values for machine parameter 92
Parameter
Functhan Entry value8
NO.
Parameter tit, multiple function 92

Bit
0 + 0A Decimal comma
+ 1A Decimal point
_- ---- --
1 + 0p First dialogue
2A Second dialogue (English)
_- -- -- --
2 0A Perform memory test
+ 4A No memory test
--- -- -- ---_
when switching-on 3 0p Perform checksum test
8p No checksum test
-- --- -- -- ----
4 0A The precalculated contour is executed
(up to 14 blocks)
+ 16 A Interruption et current block
_- ------
5 0 p Axis Iv counts 0 29999.999 [“I
+ 32 p Axis IV counts 0 359,999 [01- 0
for MP 92 is determined by adding the entry values of the required functions

ing functions are required:
Function Bit 1 Entry~lws 1

Decimal point 0 + 1
-------___
First dialogue language 1 +T-
-- ----_____
No memory tsst when switching-on 2 +. 4
--- - - -_ - -_ -
No checksum test when switching-on 3 + a
--- - - -_ - -_ -
Interruption of current block when 4 + 16
changing over from program run single
block to program run full sequence
Axis N counts: 0 359.9990 - 0 5 + 32
Sum of entrv Lalues: 61
If 61 is entered for MP 92 the above functions are activated.
Issue Bectlon hw
Commiuioning 2
April 4, 89 Cl
Rapid traverse X 0 80”’ 29998’05’ [mm/min]
Rotiy axis:
-2 :- &, I 29998(05’ fOm
N 3
Manuel feed X 4 80 29998”s’ [mm/min] w3
Y 5 Rotary axis:
; 80 29998”s’ [O/min]
L 6
IV 7
Speed when approaching X 8
reference marks Y 9
2 10
ii 11
Signal evaluation, input Xl 12 1 A 4-fold T4/1
x2 13 (max. traversing speed 30 [mlmin]) T4/3
x3 14 2 A Z-fold
x4 15 (max. traversing speed 15 [m/min])
Traversing direction when X 16 0 A Positiie direction 1
approaching reference marks Y 17 1 A Negative direction 1
2 18 (with correct programming of parameter 1
Iv 19 Nos. 20 to 27) 1
Machine parameters with X
mukipie fkwtions Y ;: i
Z 22
ii 23 :
-- --- -- .---- -- --- -- _--.
Counting direction 8ii C3/16
0 + 0 A Positive counting direction
+ 1 A Negative counting direction
----- -- .------ --- -- _--.
Enable for reference pulse T5/5
inhibit 1 + 0 A Ref. pulse inhibit inactive
+ 2 A Ref. pulse inhibit active
-- ,-- -- --- --
Enable for non-linear axis WI 2 + 0 A Inactive CZl6.2
error compensation +4AActwe
----- -- --- -- --- -- .--.
109) + 0 A Output of 2.44 mV, when calculated W5.1
Output of smallest possible 3
vokage increment of 2.44 mV. nominal value is equal to, or greater
than 1.22 mV.
+ 8 A Output of 2.44 mV. when calculated
nominal value is greater than 0.
FUnction
No. entry veluie ewehAt
Polarity of nominal X 0 A Pas. with pas. traverse direction WI6
value voltage Y 2 1 A Neg. with pas. traverse direction
Z 26
IV 27
Integral factor X 0 65535 w3
Y ;: C4l5: C4f6
Z 30 c4m c4l9
N 31 c4f21
Factor for difference value X 32 0 65.535 C4/5; C4J6
Y c4/ll
Z E w9
N 35
L
Backlash compensation X 36 - 1.000 + 1.000 [mm] ‘36
Y 37
Z
N ii Rotary axis - l.COO _. + l.ooO [“I
Correction factor for linear X 40 - 1.ooo + 1.00J [mm/m] W6
compensation Y 41
Z 42
Iv 43
Software limit switch ranges X+ 44 - 30000.000.. + 3OOOO.ooO [mm]
X- 45
Y+ 46
Y- 47
z+ 4%
Z- 49
PJ+ Rotaryaxis:
N- - 30cOO.000 + 30000.000 [“I
- Analcgue voltage at rapid. X-axis + 4.5 + 9 M I W-lo: W24
Approach speed in precontrol mode 53 0.1 10 [mlmin] w5
34f9: al/l9
I Optim*ed
No. sntw values assshwt
Acceleration p5l 54 I.001 3.0 [m/s*] C2/3;C3/8;C4/3
GWl6: C4l24
Position supervision
for opera&n with (erasable) 56 MO1 .30 [mm] C3Jl4; c4/9
spead precontrol (Emergency-stop] 57 Cdil6:C4/23:C4/3:
Position window X Y. Z 58 cz!4
Axis sequence for reference 59 T5/1
mark approach c3/16
15AZY NX
16&Z IV X Y
17AZ Iv Y x
6AYX Z IV 18AlVXYZ
7AYX IVZ 19ANXZY
80YZ X Iv 20orV Y x z
9AYZ NX 21AlVYZX
1IOAY N x z 22AlVZXY
1IlbYlvZ x 230lVZYX
soeed orecontrol 30 ( )Aon 1 AOff C4fl . . .. C4f24
Output of tool numbers or 31 ( )~Nooutput
tool pocket numbers 1I A output 0nb when tool number changes gl;
2! P output of tool number with awv
tool call
I A Outout of tool occket number
(ii tiP 225 2 lj
32 C) A No output of spindle rpm c5/1
---- -- -- ------ --- ---
Coded output of spindle speed 1l A coded output only when rpm :5/2
changes
2! P Coded output with every tool call
-- -- ------ --- --_
Analogue output of spindle speed l A Gear switching signal only when gear :5/4
range changes
1I A Gear switching signal with every
tool call
Ei 0 Without gear switching signal
RPM code limit 33 t )199l A No limit 2513: C5l4
Oscill. behaviour during acceleration 34 CLO1- 0.999 x/4/5; c4/lo;
in orecontrol mode wl2: CM7
Wlmlnary optlmll Deacllptlon
mtw valu6s mtNvahma seesheet
OAl l.trn 145vm C2n: C4/6
Enter 0
0 65.535 [s]
Memory function for direction buttons 68 OAOff 1 Aon C2/8
Approach to reference marks 69 0 A After approaching the reference marks T513
the axes automatically traverse to the
I
software limit switches
I 1 A After approaching the reference marks T5/3

the axes automatically traverse to the
reference marks
2 P Special routine for approaching T5i7

reference marks
Nominal value voltage for spindle 70 0 9.999 M c5/3
drive during gear change
Characters for program beginning 71 0...65535 D1/6; D2f5
and end
Selection of inhibited axes 72
Bit ---
-- - - -- .--- --- ---
X-axis 0 + O~Enabled
+ 1 A Inhibited
-- - - -- -- ,------ --- ---
Y-axis 1 + OAEllakkl
+ 2 A Inhibited
-- -- -- -- ,------ --- ---
Z-axis 2 + O~Embled
+ 4~lnhibited
-- -- -- -- ,------ --- --- --
N-axis 3 + O&Enabled C2/4
+ 6 A Inhibited
-- -- -- -- ,------ --- --
v-axis 4”’ + OAEnaMed w4
+ 16 A Inhibited
Fdiminwy
FUl?Cth entry VaIlme
Advanced switchpoint for 0 65.535 [s]
Tapping’ cycle (only active with
~~BCD-output of spindle rpm) I
Feed rate and spindle override 74
Bit --- --
---- -- .- _------
Feed rate override if rapid traverse 0 + 0 A Dverrfde inactive
bu?ton is pressed in an automatic + 1 A Override active
operating mode
Feed rate override in 2%~stages 1 + 0 P 2 %-stages
or variable + 2 0 Variable
---- -- _----
Feed rate ovenfde if rapid traverse 2 + 0 0 Override inactive
button and external direction buttons + 4 A Override active
are pressed in the 7nanual” mode -- .--
--- _---------
Spindle override in 2%.stages 3 + 0 A 2 %-stages c5/9
or variable + 8 p Variables
Reference signal evaluation for 75 0 A Reference signal evaluation wfthoti c2l4
inhibited axes display ‘Pass over.-reference mark’
1 p Reference signal evaluation with
display Tass over.-refe- mark’
2 A No reference signal evaluation
FUnction
vsmnsl Preliminary optimiMd Dsscliption
uo. sntw vslues sntrv velues seesheet
Position display and encoder ‘6 z/2/5
supervision
--- --- Bit .---- --
-p-B
supervision for inhibited axes + ----
1aActive --
The supervision of encoder inputs Encoder input X
for each axis can be separately + 0 I?; With supervision
switched off bY means of bit 1 to bit 5. .-+ 2 A Without
--- supetision
This applies to inhibited axes as well Encoder input Y
as enabled axes. The display remains + 0 A Wtih supervision
active if bit 0 = 1.
.-+ 4 A Wtiout
--- supervision --
Encoder input Z
+ 0 p Wfih supervision
+ 8 0 Wahout supervision
Encoder input IV
+ 0 A Wti supetision
.-+ 16 A Without
--- supewision --
5 Encoder input V
+ 0 A with supetisio”
+ 32
---- P Wnhout supervision --
61” Encoder input S
+ 0 P Wb ?.upervisio”
+ 64 A Whout suoelvisio”
PLC-program from RAM ‘7 ‘3152
or from EPROM --- Bit .-- --
0 + 0 e l* and 2”d K commands from RAM
+ 1 A I* and 2”d K commands from EPROM
.------
-- -- --
,I051 + 0 A 3ti K commands from EPROM
+ 2 A 3ti K commands from RAM
S-analogue output 0 ‘8 0 .99999.999 [rpm] WI
Gear rpm range 1 ‘9
2 IO
I1
Gear rpm range 4 12 0 .99999.999 [rpml
Or 5 13
threshold speed 6 I4
7 )5
S-Analogue voltage with )6 0 9.999 [VI :5/4: c5/5
S-override at 100% L
Pmliminary Optimiad Deectiption
Function entry value3 entry values aaeabmt
S-analogue voltage with 87 0 9.999 M C5/4; c5/5
S-override at maximum
Maximum
---j-F-
Minimum
-- --
Designation for axis N
l&B 4av
2AC 5AW
Constant contouring speed at 91 0 179.999 [“I
comers
Muhiple parameter function
Bit
1
--- ---- -- --
Decimal character - - - --t 0 + 0A Decimal comma t c2/7; D1/6
1A Decimal point
--- ------ -- --
Dialogue language - - - 0A First dialogue WI0
2A Second dialogue (English) --
--- ------ --
Memory test when switching on 0A Memory test is carried out c-m
-3
4A No memory test
---
Checksum test when switching on
---
(RAM + EPROM)
---
---
0A
+ 16
------
80 A lntemmtion
No checksumat test
---
Checksum test is carried out
current blodc t
--
-- -- CzmJ
--
-- w9
--
Change from program run full sequence

to program run single block when
machining continuous contours
----
Counting mode if axis N operates
as a position display for a rotary
.-
4
5
+ 0 A The precalculated contour is
completed (up to 14 blocks)
----
+ 0etiz&o”“ts0...298!39.999[01
+32oAxiilVmunts0...359.999[01-0
--
--l -- C2/7
axis
Activation of functions for 6107’ + 0 P No Hitth coupling
Hirth coupling on axis IV + 64 A Hitth coupling employed
Activation of functions for 7’04’ + 0 A No Hirth coupling
Hirth coupling on axis V +128 A Hirth coupling employed
Wiih active Hirth:coupling MP 65

only determines the display step for
axes X. Y and 2. MP 260 applies for
axis IV. MP 342 applies for axis V.
Preliminary
mtly values
Actual-Nominal value transfer after + 0 A Transfer

external EMERGENCY STOP t 256 A No transfer
3t7A4l4
PLC: Counter preset value 94 I...65535
for counters 0 - 15
!Ei
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
KC: Programmed duration 110 3 65535 (in units of 20 mS) ?3/55
for timers 0 - 15 111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
I optimii
Function
Parameter
No. I.1 II
t Intry values
WC: 30 positioning values for 126 - 30000.000 + 30000.000 [mm]
PLC-positioning 127 t
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137.
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
Activation of next tool number, 157 1 A No output of next tool number
programmable with TOOL CALL J.. I P Output of next tool number only when
or the following pocket number, changing tod number (TOOL CALL /. .)
programmable with TOOL DEF 2 A Output of next tool number with every
(TOOL CALL /. .)
3 A Output of next tool pocket number.
programmable with TOOL DEF
(if MP 225 2 1)
Setting of a binary number using 158 I...65535 ‘3142
16 markers (Markers 2192 to 2207)
ParameterEntry range Preliminary Optimised Deecrlptlon
I No. I
mbv valuee I
entw values seesheat
Automatic lubrication 0 _. 65535 (in units of 65536 pm)
after programmed
N 162
Feed rate for parameter X 163 80 _. 29998 [mm/min] P3/7
Nos. 126 to 156 Y 164
z 165
N 166
Displav of current feed rate before 167 0 A No display w7
1 p Display
-i
Ramp gradient for S-analoaue voitaae 0 1.999 N/msl

. .
0.001 .30 [mm]
0 0 Control
1 A Programming s&ion: PLC active
2 A Proarammina
- - station: PLC inactive
Selection of touch probe system 171 0 A Ts 511
or handwheel onh, with special 2 A TS 111or TS 120
software (see sheet T6/1)
Polarity of S-analogue voltage 172 0 A M03: Positive voltage c5/4
M04: Negative voltage c5/5
1 A MO3: Negative voltage
M04: Positive vokage
2 A MO3 and M04: Positive voltage
3 A MO3 and M04: Negative voltage
-
Erasure of status display and
Q parameters with M02. M30 and
prowam end
Position supervision in
trailing operation Emergency-stop
173
174
0 A Status display not to be erased
1 p Status display to b-s erased
O...lOO[mm)
=---I
rl
erasable 175
Multiplication factor for Kwfactor
Kv-factor for trailing 0.100 lo.m C4/24
Characteristic kink 0 1oo.oixl [%I C4/24: C4127

Minimum feed rate override when 0 150 [%I C2/14
Wxk3
Maximum feed rate override when 183 0 150 [%I
twming
Minimum voltage for 184 0 __. 9.999 [VI C5J4; c5/5
S-analogue output
Delay for cutout of residual nominal 185 0 65.535 Is.1 C4133
value v&age when “Positioning error”
displayed
Datum for positioning blocks X 186 - 30000000 _. + 30000.000 [mm] C7Jl3
with M92: 187
z 188 -&00.000...+30000.000[01
Iv 189
Programming of rpm S = 0 permitted 180 o~s=oFwmimd CWJ
(voltage value of MP 184 can l~S=ONotpenitted
be less)
Display of current spindle rpm before 191 04m a/7: c5/9
spindle start 1 AOff
Position window axis IV 192 O.OOl 2.000 [mm or ol’07’ c2f4
(07) A.3of .%dwarel&WI07 (4 axes)/04 (5 axes).me entryrangewasextended‘mm 0.5 mm to 2.ml mm.

I
Pmliminary Optlmlssd
Functloll Zy--’ Entry range entry v&lea sntry values
PLC: Timer duration for timers 16-31 193 0 65535 (in units of 20 ms)
iii
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
-----_
~~
206
207
208
Activation of PLC-macro commands 209 0 9999 ‘3147
(Setting of markers 3200 3263) 210
211
212 I
I
‘Scaling factor’ cyc!e effective 213 OA3axes(3D) :2/m
for 2 or 3 axes 1 4 2 axes fworkino olane)
Output of M- and S-functions 214 :2,m
Bit
---- -- .- --- --
Programmed stop with MO6 0 0 A F’rogrammed stop with MO6
1 0 No programmed stop with MO6
---- -- -- ---- --- --
output of M89 1 0 p Normal output at the beginning
of the block
2 A Modal cycle call at the end of
theblock
---- -- .- ------ --- -- --
Axis halt if spindle rpm only is 2 +OAAxishatl w9
changed with a TOOL CALL +4ANoaxishalt
---- -- .- ---_-_ --- -- --
Axis standstill with output of an 3 +OAAxishatl 32nl
M-function +8oNoaxishait
Emepthm: The axis halts with
M-functions resuiting in a programmed
stop (as MOO. MO2 .) or with a
STOP or a CYCL-CALL-blo&
Funotlor~
Pammater I -range I Reliminaw I- IDeeoriDtlon I
No.
Touch probe svstem: orobina weed I215 80 3COO Imm/minl
. _ 1 T6/2
Touch probe system: measuring range 216 0 .19 999.999 [mm] 1 T6/2
BE
Programming language changeover, 217 0 A HEIDENHAIN-dialogue
HEIDENHAIN-dialogue/SO-format 1 A IS0 (G-codes)
Tansfer Blockwise” 218 0...65535
ASCII-character for data input
Transfer Blockwise’ 219 0...65535
ASCII-character for data output
‘Pansfer Blockwise” 220 0...12079
ASCII-character for beginning and end
0 12079
Data format and transmission stop 222 0 255

for data interface RS-232~CA/.24
operating“lode: 223 0 A Xtandard data intelface’
data - RS-232~QV.24 1 0 .Transfer Block&e-
Tansfer Blorkke’ 224 0...12079
Asab3de &ta tra”s”lisslo”
completed
cmtral toot file 225 0 A No central tool fila
1 . ..99~Cantraltoolfile
Entry value = Number of tool pockets
Graphics printout: 226 0...65535 D3fl
Number of control characters to set
printer interface + 1 control character
Graphi printout: 227 0...65535 D3/1
2 control characters to set printer 228
interface 229
Graphics printout: 230 0...65535 1 D3/1
Number of control characters p&Ming
every print line + 1 control character
Graphics printout: 231 0...65535 D3/1
2 control characters prefiiing every 232
wint line 233
Movement supervision
Touch probe system: Safetv clearance
orobina
--- ----
Graphics: Projection of 0 P German standard”
View in three planes- 1 a U.S. standard”
--- --- ------ ----
Coordinate system rotation of ll 0 Nn rn+a+inn
machining plane
Activation of axis S for J A Axis inactive
spindle orientation 1 A Axis serves in orienting main spindle,
without oosition disolav
1 2 A As enti value 1. hokever with
I I position display (is displayed instead
I I of axis N) I
Kv-factor for axis S (spindle) 238 0.100 lO.COO Cl/10
Counting direction and reference pulse 239
inhibit for spindle orientation axis 8ii
---- -- ----- ---------
Gnmtlng direction 0 +o~Pcsiilve c5/10
+ 1 A Negative
---- -- --------------
Reference pulse inhibit 1 + 0 A Inactive T5/5: c5/lo
+2AActFve
Position value of reference mark for 240 0 360.000 WlO
axis S (spindle)
hliminary
Function ?ntry value
Cycles for milling variable contour
pockets
--
C%!! for islands

+ 1 & Outline mill pockets CW,
CCW for islands
-- .-----
Cycle “Rough-out”: + 0 A Outline mill,
Sequence for outline milling and then rough-out pocket
roughing-out + 2 A Rough-out pocket,
then~outline mill
--- ------ --
Combining corrected or uncorrected 2 + 0 a Combine corrected contours
contours + 4 A Combine uncorrected contours
Reference mark spacing for X 242 0 65535 -512
distance-coded encoders Y 243 0 A No distance-coded reference marks
Z 244 1000 p Linear encoder with 20 vrn
Iv 245 grating period or angle encoder with
36 reference marks and 18000 lines
Position window for axis S (spindle) 246 1 65535 [increments]
Hvsteresis for electronic handwheel 247 0 65535 [increments]
Spindle rpm for spindle orientation 248 0 99999.988 [tpmliM1
Setting of a binary sum with 16 mark 249 0...65535
(markers 2208 to 2223)
Setting of a binary sum with 16 mark 250 0...65535
(markers 2224 to 2239)
Touch probe system: rapid traverse 251 180 29998 [mm/min] ‘6/2
for probing
Automatic, drive offset adjustment 252 1 _. 65535 [in units of 20 ms] I418: C4122
0 4 No automatic adjustment 316
Allocation of axes to X !53 0 A Standard allocation ‘3/l: T4J2: T4/5
encoder inputs Y 254 1 P Encoder input Xl
Z 255 2 0 Encoder input X2
Iv !56 3 A Encoder input X3
V !57 4 A Encoder input X4
5 p Encoder input X5
6 a Encoder input X6io41
Function intry range Preliminary
No. entrv valuer
Analogue output of spindle rpm if 258 1. .99999.999 [rpm]
marker 2501 is set Iirection of rotation alwavs Dositive
of the second (English) and the first

language
Increment for axis N, if Hirth coupling 260”” (1 9.999 [“I Q/6
is activated via MP 92 t Eintly value 0 is treated as 0.001
Shift for axis N, if Hirth coupling 261”” - 30000.000 + 30000.000 [“I W6
is activated via MP 92
Number of global Q-parameters which 262’05’ ) 50 u1/4
are transferred from a user-cycle to Nhen entering 40. Q-parameters
the ~rwram called 160 Q99 are global
Difference between Q-parameter 263 I... 50 Ull2
numbers for ‘DLG-DEF-block and 1 ‘DLG-CALL’-blocks only
.DLG-CALL--block in user-cycle
PLC: programmed duration for timers 264’06’ )...65535 P3/58
32 - 47 265 in units of 20 ms)
E
269
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
-
Function Preliminary Optlmlsed Desdption
,’ Wmnge entrv-w entryvalues seeehaut
PLC: predetermined counter value for I... 65535
counters 16 to 31
Limitation of feed rate wardde I 150 [%I ‘3141

in %. if marker 2509 is set
Acceleration Y ).OOl 3.0 [m/s21 2x3: c4/3
Z X3/8: C4/l6
%/9 . . . . C4/24
Amlogue voltage at rapid Y t 4.5 + 9 M

Z
N
Thl3~tlOlbg6fatiXgxir
Is-bvMP52.
Entry values for datum correction
activated by markers 2816.28l7.2819
lSt Datum correction X - 30000.000 _. + 3OOQO.000 [mm]
2”d Datum correction X
3ti Datum correction X
1 *t Datum correction Y - 3OOOO.OfJO + 30000.000 [mm]
2”” Datum correction Y
3ti Datum correction Y
105, bs Of s0fwai-e !6vd 06 I4 axes,
(06) As 0‘ software level 06 (4 wawo3 (5 axed
107) !a 0‘ software level 07 (4 amwo4 (5 axes)

I I I
- 30000.000 + 30000.000 [mm] c2/13
- 30000.000 + 30000.000 [mm] u/13
- ~000.000 + 30000.000 [“I

0...150[%] P3/35
Ramp gradient - 316”” 0 1.999 P//ms]

S-Analogue voltage for deceleration 0 A Acceleration and deceleration from MP 168
Ramp gradient for S-Analogue.
when M 2816 is set
-- - - .-- ---- +I--A--j
Acceleration 317’07’ 0 1.999 [V/msl
---_--
Deceleration 318”” .--
0 1.999 iV/msl ---- v -- t -- 1
0
Parameter Preliminary
NO. entrv valuss
(u”
--
OkA
l^B
2AC
3AU
4&V
5&W
--jr-
Rapid traverse for axis V 80”’ 29998 lmmlminl
Rotary axis: -
80”’ 29998 [O/min]
Manual feed axis V 80 .29998 [mm/min] *
Rotary axis:
Speed when approaching reference
80 29998 [O/min]
marks
Feed rate for PLC-positioning of axis V
Software limit switch ranges V + - 30000.000 + 30000.000 [mm]
Rotary axis:
V- 326 - 30000.000.. + 30000.000 [ol
Signal evaluation. input X5 327 1 A 4-fold
2 A 2-fold
(max. traversing speed limited by
EXE-input freqtiency)
Spacing of reference marks for 328 0 65535
distance-coded encoder on axis V 0 ic No distance-coded reference marks
1000 A Linear encoders with 20 pm
grating period or angle encoder with
36 reference marks and 18000 lines
Traversing direction when approaching 329 0 A Positive direction
reference marks 1 p Negative direction
(with correct programming of machine
parameters 330 and 331)
Pmliminary
entrY values
--
----------
Reference pulse inhibit of axis V
- -
Enable for non-linear axis
error compensation in axis V
------
-
Output of smallest possible voltage

-- -
1
2’09’
3’09’
--
+ 0 A Inacitve
+ZOActive
----L_
+ 0 A Inactive
----
+ 4 A Compensation effective
----- --
+ 0 A Output of 2.44 mV. when calculated
---
---
---
--
--
C2f6.2
--
C4l5.1
I
increment of 2.44 mV for axis V nominal value is equal to. or greater
than 1.22 mV.
+ 8 p Output of 2.44 mV, when calculated
nominal value is greater than 0.
Polarity of nominal value voltage 331 0 p Positive with positive traversing direction C3/16
1 p Negative with positive traversing direction
I
Factor for difference value CD
332 0 65.535 C4/5; C4f6;
c419 u
K\rfactor for trailing operation 333 0.100 1o.ooo
Datum set via axis key V 334 0 p Inacdve, datum is transferred from
MP 337
1 AActIve
Acceleration of axis V 335 0.001 3.0 [m/s21
I
Position window of axis V 1 336 I O.OOl 2.ooO lmm1i04’ I

Rotary axis: . .
0.001 2.000 [“1’04’
Datum of axis V 337 - 30000.000 _. + 30000.000 Imml
I
Analogue voltage at rapid, 338’03’ + 4.5 + 9 M

axis V
Entry values for datum correction, -30000.000...+30 000 [mm]
activated via markers 2816.2817.
2819 -~000.000...+30 .~[ol
1 8f Datum correCtion V
2’@ Datum correction V Gi.Es~~
3d Datum correction V 341”)
Machine parameters are either entered into the empty memory during the first commissioning procedure or subsequently
edited to change certain machine and control functions, i.e. alteration of entry values.
g the first commissioning of a certain mnchlne type the machine parameters are determined in the given
entered manually, values which are already known can be externally stored via the RS-232~C/V.24
interface and transferred to other machines of the same type. if required.
External storage of machine parameters is also recommended for the end customer as this permits - if need be - the quick
exchange of a control unit,
Cede numba(s fcr machine parameters
631210 - Eldpure cl machine parameter memory

Key-in code number via MOD-function and enter with
OPERATING PARAMETERS ERASEDI appears in the visual displ&.
Erase display ph @-key: the control requests the entry of machine parameters:
ElER PROGRAMMING
Elm MP 07
MPO:
Subsequently, the values are entered manually or read-in from the external data medium via the data interface
Plwse note: With this code number the PLC-markers M 1000 M 2000 are also reset to logical “0”.
96148 - Edit(ng of machine parameter list
lf values are only to be edited, or missing values supplemented, this is performed by entering the code number via the
MOD-functionj
After pressing the list of entry values is displayed commencing with MP 0.
Specific machkw parameters may be addressed with the keys e and a or
Entry is by keiing-in the numerical value and entering with
lhnsfer of n&chine parametera with external atomge unit
Machine parameters can be read-in and out via the RS-232~QV.24 data interface. normally from or to an FE 401 or ME 1011
JO2 from HEIDENHAIN. The transfer from a non-HEIDENHAIN peripheral unit, e.g. paper tape punch/reader is also possible.
The RS-232-C&.24 data interface of the TNC can be converted for the following operating modes via the MOD-function key.
FE: Data interface for the HEIDENHAIN Floppy Disc Unit FE 401. The machine parameters are stored as an NC-program
under e progmm number.
ME: Data interface for the HEIDENHAIN Magnetic Tape Unit ME 101 or ME 102. The Baud rate is set to 2400 Baud.
Standard datr~format: 7 data bits
1 stop bii (2 stop bits for 110 Baud)
Even Parity
EXlr Data interface convertible via machine parameters, see sheet Dl/B
Data entry with erased memory has limited possibilities in this operating mode. See next page.
Swticn pa80
Cl 23
Machine parameters
Entry of machine parameters
Entry with eiaeed memory
The machine @ammeters can either be entered manually or read-in via the external data interface
AfierMAlNSjZ? WER,- ON and MEMORY TEST the operating mode ME is ~lutomatiicsliy presalected by the TNC.
If read-in IS d #slrad I” another mode, selection is made via the MOD-function key (sheet D1/2).
Since no machine parameters have been entered, the RS-232~QV.24 interface cannot Yet be modified in the DCT operating
mode.
For EXT the styndard data format is therefore valid: 7 data bits
1 stop bii (2 stop bii for 110 Baud)
Even Pa&y
In contrast to LE-operation the transmission rate can be set from 110 to 9600 Baud via the operating mode EXT.
If. therefore, aj punched tape reader with standard data format is to be used for reading-in machine parameters, this is
possible in thq DCT operating mode.
~ Issue Seotion me
April 4. 89 Cl 24
Mach ne parameters
Entry 4,f machine parameters
1 Entry with e&d memoly
Display:
OPEf4ATlNQ PARAMEIERS ERASED -
Display:
hlAC(iINE PARAMETER PROQRAMMINQ
~CHINE PARAMEIER MPD T
MPO:
YES
1
I I
Enter parameters and press

With incorrect entry, machine parameters
already entered can be selected and
corrected with the g key.
After antr;stameters
(All machine parameters must be entered.)

The machine parameter display wasas.
Display:
MAC#lINE PARAMEIER PROQRAMMINQ
~ PROQRAM NUMBER =
Enk program number and press
Display:
~ EXTERNAL DATA INPUT
I
After entry of parameters

error message appears
POWER INTERRUPTED:
REjAY EXT. DC VOLTAQE MISSII
i Issue SSOtkUl
Commkdonlng
April 4. 89 Cl T
I
Machine parameters
Entry c/f machine parameters
Reed-in and itlng with a programmed memory
lf stored machine parameters are to be amended. supplemented or completely overwritten by external entry. proceed as
Display:
VACANT BLOCKS
Display:
CODE NUMBER -
4
Enter code number 95 149 and
press
Display:
MACHINE PARAbAElER PROQRAMMINQ
MACHINE PARANWER MPO 7
and comolete oarameter list
Overwrite stored values

by external entry?
1
Display:
MACHINEj PARAMETER PROQRAMMING
EftlERNAL DATA INPUT
1 After;:;sentry /
put continue as described The machine parameter display erases.
if certain machine parameters are altered within a test phase several times, one after the other, the entry of the code number
may be avoided to save time.
If the mains ia not switched-off. the machine parameter list can be selected again by pressing in the manual operating
mode. After mains power-off, this is no longer possible.
Seotlon paw
Commhbnlng
&K39 Cl 26
I
External etcr/age cf machine pramaten
After final defihition, the machine parameters must always be stored on an external data storage unit
The machine #arameter list is selected via the MOD-key with the code number or. as described, on sheet Cl/26 , with the
-key in the manual operating mode.
Data format aed interface adaptation have to be carried out as described on sheets Cl/23 and D1/2.
Enter cod;ySl49 and 1
Display:
MACHINE PARAMEIER PRQQRAMMIN~
MACHINE PARAMerajl MW 7
and complete parameter list.
Press m.
Read-out data from the control

unit
Is the J
RS-232~VI.24 operating mode
Display:
MACHINiPARAMETW PROQRAMMINQ
PROQRAM NUMBER =
Enter pr;zgber and
Display:
EXTERNAl. DATA OUTPUT
After transmisgion. the TNC automatically switches to the manual operating mode.
i Inu0
Avril 4, 99 I-I Cl 2
parameters
e parameters as user-parameters
Up to 16 mat ine parameters can be made accessible to the machine user via the MOD-function. The user-parameters can
be assigned fY the machine manufacturer as required.
Assignment bf user-pfimmetem
0
If a machine parameter is be made accessible to the user the P -key has to bs additionally pressed during programming.
The following r message appears if it is attempted to program more then 16 user parameters.
the letter P suffixes the entry value.
The following dialogue texts for the dialogue display of the user-parameters are stored in the PLC-EPROM:
Machine pammeter
Machine parameters with the lowest parameter number
USER PAR.
USER PAR. i
USER PAR. 4
USER PAR. .fj
USER PAR.
USER PAR. 9:
USER PAR. 8 Machine parameters arranged according to increasing parameter numbers
USER PAR.
USER PAR. 1
USER PAR. 1)
USER PAR. 1
USER PAR. 1i
USER PAR. 14
USER PAR. 16
USER PAR. 16 Machine parameters with highest parameter number
Instead of US R PAR. 1 etc. any text with up to 16 positions can be displayed. This requires an alteration of the standard
PLC-EPROM. e PLC-EPROM is altered at our works in Traunreut. West Germany. Please contact HEIDENHAIN in Traunreut or
one of our for j ign representations.
flwae note: I
The dialogue USER PAR. 1 to USER PAR. 16 are stored in the PLC-EPROM under the addresses of the PLC error messages
PLC ERROR PLC ERROR 99. If error messaaes are rewired instead of the disolavs for user-oarameters. the corresoond-
in the PLC-EPROM have to be Changed (address of USER PAR> lo= address of PLC: ERRGd 64 etc.).
ues for user-parameters were defined in the customized PLC-program, the allocation ot the texts to the
eter No. is shifted if further user-parameters are ru~smnkly inserted.
~ IlJsue SClCtiObl mP
April 4. 69 Cl 28
Desctjption of machbe parameters
The descript’ of machine parameters for related functions can be found in the pertinent sections.
The sections $ ire listed in the machine parameter list (see Sheets Cl/3 to Cl/22).
eters which cannot be clearly assigned to a section of the manual are compiled and described on the
! Ieeue Section psee

Commbeloning c2 1
/+pril 4, 99
Descr ption of machine parameters
Machi 1 e parameters for the axes
/ Axis daslgn ion for NCmaohinea
The~coordinat axes and traversing directions for numerically controlled machine tools are defined in the DIN-standard 66217.
The three mai,1 axes are clearly defined by a standard. The traversing directions can be determined by means of the “Right-
Hand-Rule”. I
In addition, thl movement of the tool towards the workpiece constitutes a negative traversing direction,
+ Z-direction,
middle finger
+ Y-direction.
-m ,4 forefinger
“Right-Hand-Rule”:
The coordinate directions are
represented by the fingers.
mung. only the tool mowment is considered (relative movement of tool), i, e. whilst programming the operator
the tool is moving.
With the universal milling machine as illustrated above, the
milling tool should. for example, traverse in a positive direc-
tion in the X-axis. However. due to the table moving in this
Movement of mill + X axis and not the tool, the table must move in the left-hand
- direction. The relative movement of the tool is therefore in
the right-hand ~direction. i.e. in the oositive X-direction. In this
case-the traversing direction of the table is designated to
DIN 66217 as + X’.
-L Movement of table + X
the fourth axle is to be used for a rotary table or as an additional linear axis and
the display screen:
*z
*”
+w
t
iv
ILL-
-*” +x
Fourth axle aa Wear axis

is designated with letters A, B or C: the If the fourth axis is to be used as a linear axis. the designation
he main axes and the rotating direction is of this axis is U, V or W.
shown in the above illustration. The correlation to the main axes is shown above.
: I88ue Seation
Comml88lonlng c2 ??@@
Aqil 4. 89
of machine parameters
parameters for the axes
Rapid tram+
The maximumi traversing speed of an axis (rapid traverse) is defined via machine parameters. The respective rapid traverse
has to be adlqsted with 9 Vat the input of the servo-amplifier.
MPO Entry range:

MPl 80 .29998 [mm/min]
MP2 Rotary axis:
MP3 kzv 80 29998 [O/min]
MP321 +isV
The minimum ientty value depends on the acceleration entered in MP 54. MP 297, MP 298. MP 299, MP 335
(see sheets C&3: CWl6).
3
_ 2.777
2.083
1.388
w
80 500 1000 1500 2000 2161
Min. entry value for rapid traverse [mm/min]
Manual feed :
The maximum’ feeds in “Manual” can be limited via separate machine parameters.
MP4 Entry range:

MP6 fzzf 80 29998 [mm/min]
MP6 Rotary axis:
MP7 80 29 998 [“/min]
MP 322
leeue SOCthNl page

Comml88kmlng c2 3
April 4. 89
parameters for the axes
Pa&ion wlnqlow
MP 68
,*2 bsition window for axis x, Y, 2
ition window for axis IV
MP 336 FE ition window for axis V
Entry ranbe:
b.001 2.000 [mm] or [“I
MP 246 bition whlow for axi s
Entry range:
1 65535 [increments]
The position v#indcw determines the limits in which the control considers the position as being achieved. After having reached
the position window. the control begins with the execution of the next block. The entry of 0.05 means, for example, that the
machine ccns(ders a position as reached if the actual value of the position reaches the nominal value to within f 0.05 mm.
Although the $cntrcl begins with the execution of the next block. it continues in trying to position the machine exactly to the
nominal pcsitibn value.,The entry value for the position window should not be less than 0.01 mm. If the entry value is too
small, the pcslticning time and thus, the transition from program block to program block may be prolonged.
’ Actual-Nomi@ value tmnsf#
By setting maChine parameters it is possible to determine whether the current actual value should be transferred as a nominal
value after an /external EMERGENCY STOP. By not having a transfer of the actual value, possible drifting of the axis after an
EMERGENCY STOP can be corrected. k should be noted that an axis drift which is greater than the position window leads to
the error mesiege “Gross positioning error”.
MP 92 &i 9 Actual-Nominal vah~ transfer after an external EMERGENCY STOP
Entry value: + 0 A Tmnsfer

+ 256 4 NC transfer
MP 72 Sele$tlon d the axes inhlblted for oontmlllng
The position ldcp for each axis may be separately inhibited by means of bits 0 to bit 4 of MP 72.
Bit0 &is x + 0 p Enabled

+ 1 p Inhibited
Bit 1 +XiiY + O~Enabled
+ 2 P Inhibited
Bit2 Axis 2 + 0 A Enabled
+ 4 P Inhibited
Bit3 hxi8 IV + 0 A Enabled
+ 8 P Inhibited
Bii 4 Axis v + 0 A Enabled
+ 16 A Inhibited
In addition, th reference signal evaluation can be cancelled via MP 76. The position display and encoder supervision can be
cancelled via $4
: P 76.
MP 76 Ref ‘mnoe signal evaluation for inhIbIted axes

0 P 91 c display “Pass over reference mark’ for inhibited axes. The position display begins to count on passing over
the reference mark.
1 P fPass ever reference mark” is displayed for inhibited axes. Reference marks for inhibited axes must be
pprcached in the sequence. as programmed under MP 69.
2 * fi c display “Pass over reference mark”. The position display is set to 0 after a power interruption and counts
without having to pass ever the reference marks.
: .__-_
lasue Sotion f+w
-0mmi~ioning l-3 A
Nov&mber 21. 89 I
Descrjption of machine parameters
Machine parameters for the axes
MP 76 Posblon dlsplsy and encoder supervision
The position display and the encoder supervision of axes inhibited by MP 72 can be ,oancelled by means of bii 0 of MP 76
Bit0 Position display and encoder supervision for InhIbited exe8

+ 0 A Inactive
+ 1 & Active
The supervision of encoder inputs can be separately switched off for each axis by means of bit 1 to bit 6. This applies to both
inhibited and enabled axes. The position display remains active if Bit 1 = 0.
Encoder supervision for inhibii and enabled axes

Bii 1 k&r input X
+ 0 A With supervision
+ 2 A Without supervision
Bit2 Encoder input Y

+ 4 p Without supervision
Bii 3 Encoder input 2

+ 0 0 With supervision
Bit4 Encoder input IV

+ 16 P Without supervision
Bit6 @coder input V

+ 0 0 With supervision
Bii 6 Encoder input S”“’

& 0 A With supervision
+ 64 P Without supervision
Axis design&n for axes IV and V
The axis designation is determined with MP 90 for axis N and with MP 320 for axis V. Axis designation A, 8 or C signifies
that the axis is to be used for the control or for the display of a rotary axis. In this case, this axis is excluded from mm/inch-
conversion and can operate with one of the other axes in linear interpolation without tool compensation. If U. V or W is used.
the axis is defined as an additional linear axis. The mm/inch-changeover is applicable and can operate either in linear inter-
polation with ane or two of the other axes. or with one of the other axes including tool radius compensation.
MP 90 Axis designation for axis IV

Entry values:
QAA 3&U
!A8 4AV
2pc 5pw
MP 320 &xi8 designation for axis V

Entry values:
OAA 3AU
IA8 4AV
2pc 5AW
ISSUe Seotion me
Commimaioning c2 5
November 21. 89
Descr/ption of machine parameters
Machihe parameters for the axes
Spsoial fun$ions for a rotary table with Hitih coupling
The special functions for a Hirth coupling in the fourth or fifth axis are activated by MP 92, Bit 6 or Bit 7. Activation of Hirth
coupling is only appropriate if the fourth or fifth axis is a rotary axis.
After activatioh. the display step from MP 260 or MP 342 takes effect.
Via MP 261 or MP 343 a shift of the Hirth coupling with respect to the encoder reference mark can be. entered.
MP 92 Rrameter for multiple functions
sii 6 kctivation of functions for Hirth coupling of axis Iv’o71

+ 0 P No Hirth coupling
& 64 A Hirth coupling employed
Bit 7 ktlvation of functions for Hirth coupling of axis v(04’

Jr 0 P No Hirth coupling
+ 128 P Hirth coupling employed
Bit 1 to bit 4 and bit 5 see sheet Cl/9
MP 260 Increment for axis IV if Hirth coupling ls acthrated via MP 92.

5ntry range: 0 9.999 [O]
Entry range: 0 is treated as 0.001
MP 342 lncremant for axis V lf Hirth coupling is activated via MP g2.(04’

EntrY range: 0 9.999 [“I
Entry range: 0 is treated as 0.001
MP 201 $hlft for axis IV lf Hirth coupling is aotiwted via MP 92.

Entry range: - 30000.000 + 30000.000 [“I
MP 343 $hii for axis V if Hlrth coupling is activated via MP 92.‘04’

Entry range: - 30000.000 + 30000.000 [“1
Hints on opebting and programming.
Manual operating mode:
.Traversing with external directional buttons: after releasing a direction button the axis moves to a position which corresponds
to the next multiple of the display step
Datum set: lf a value which is not a multiple of the display step is entered, it is automatically rounded-off upwards or
downwards.
Automatic operating modes:
When programming, nominal position values which are not a multiple of the display step may also be entered. During
execution of the block, the ermr message “ENTRY VALUE INCORRECT” is displayed.
j Issue Ssotion me
commlesloning c2 6
November 21,89
ption of machine parameters
e parameters for the axes
Error oompe&tion of machine axea
Backlash oo+pnnaation
With a linear measurement via spindle and rotary ancoder a slight amount of play between table movement and rotary
encoder can be compensated for bY machine parameters. An entry value of 50 pm should however, not be exceeded.
MP 36 &;; t Entry range:

MP 37 - 1.000 + 1.000 [mm]
MP 38 L2 Rotary axis:
MP 39 biti IV - 1.000 + 1.000 [O]
Correotion f+tor for linear compwwatbn
Linear compe$sation of individual axes can be programmed by machine parameters. The correction either extends or
shortens the measuring range.
MP 40 Axle x Entry range:

MP41 Axis Y -1.000...+1.000[mm/m]
MP 42
MP 43 Ev
MP 344 h “‘04’
Note: The linear compensation is only effective if the non-linear axis error compensation is not.
Non-linear azfs error compensation~Og’
In all axes, no!-linear corrections can be made at 64 points in each axis. These corrections are stored and edited via tables
The relationship of the correction of a certain axis can be randomh/ programmed to the same axis or to any other axis
Format of display: e.g. X = F (X)
/ \
axis to be corrected erroneous axis
The axis in brdckets is the erroneous axis, the deviation of which, is corrected bY the axis which is to be compensated.
Example for sPindIe pitch error compensation of X-axis:
Axis to corrected X = F (X)
Example for deflection compensation of Y-axis:
Axis to corrected 2 = F (Y)
On a machine:having an overhanging horizontal Y-axis, the deflection of this axis can be compensated for via the Z-axis.
i ~SW section
CommMonlng C2 2
Fetiruaty 8. 90
I
ption of machine rs
e parameters for the axes
Non-linear axis error compensation is activated bY machine parameters,
MP 20 Bit 2, enable for non-linear axis error compensation

MP21 Entry values:
MP 22 + 0 A Non-linear axis anor compensation inactive
MP 23 + 4 A Non-linear axis error compensation active
MP 330 bds v
Depending on the correction value list, 64 correction points can be stored for each axis.
Wish the code number 106296, the dialogue for entry of the correction value list is initiated.
The following :is displayed:
COMPENSATION VALUE LIST
Dialogue line ~ AXIS FAULTY ?
1” line X=F(m)
Znd line DATUM + 0.000
3” line + DIST 1
as of 4’” line 0 x + 0.000 x + 0.000

: x + 0.002 x + 0.000
x+0.004 x + 0.000
3 x + 0.006 x + 0.000
After calling-up the correction value list via the code number axis X = F (X) is displayed corresponding to the ballscrew error
compensation; for the axis in the 1” line. The enoneous axis (X) is displayed in inverted characters.
By pressing the appropriate axis key the erroneous axis can be changed.
E.g.: Pressingiof axis Y results in X = F (VI.

cl
key another compensation axis can be selected. i.e. another table can be edited.
means 2 = F (X).
For each axis to be compensated, only one table can apply
Individual lines are selected via the cursor kevs As of line 4, them-key can also be used
em
Datum for odrreotion values (2d line)
The datum is the starting point for compensation of the erroneous sxis. This point is entered in absolute and is referenced to
the reference mark. The correction value of the datum is stored under the address 0.
The datum shpuld be allocated such, that corrections increase in the positive counting direction. If. for example. the datum is
located to the:left of the reference mark. the distance to the datum is entered as a negative value.
: Issue SectIon m90

Commladonlng
April 4, 89 c2 6.2
I
Descrfption of machine parameters
Machine parameter for the axes
I
Spacings llejween correction points (incmment) (3d line)
The spacing i&xement for the 64 correction points is entered as an indice to the base of 2. The entry range is 1 20
corresponding 2 pm 1048 m
Example: Fiiqpre$ spacing 32 pm
t
the&fore. entry value for DIST = 5
As of the 4’” $x& up to 64 correction values can be stored in addresses 0 to 63 for each table. Only the kink-points of the
error curve h&e to be entered. means that an entry is not made). Linear interpolation exists between the kink-points.
La
It should be &ted that the maximum possible gradient of the compensation curve of 1 mm/m should not be exceeded,
otherwise the;error message COMP. VALUE DIFFERENCE MCESSIVE is displayed.
Example: Z =,F (Y): DIST = 11 =+ Spacing 2” = 2.046 mm; Datum = 10

,
Z
[mm1
0.013
A b
f-7 10 10 12.048 14.css
IS.144 18.192 20.24022.288 24.33828.384 28.432 SO.480 Y [mm1
Refdrence mark
I
Datum
The editing procedure is ended by pressing However, for every correction point, the keys must be pressed:
l/ii. 4
otherwise the ierror message “COMP. VALUE DIFFERENCE EXCESSNE’ is displayed.
Input and o&wt ol co-n lists via the RS-232~CN.24 data intwfaw
In addition to manual entry, the tables can be read-in via the RS-232~QV.24 data interface. Similar to the machine parameter
list, this program is called-up via a program number. Date transmission is carried out, as normal. via the m-key.
i Issue Commls8ionlng
SWtiW mw
April 4. 89 c2 6.3
parameters for displays
The 5 urn display step is normally sufficient for milling and boring.
The optimisation of approach behaviour is carried out with a 1 pm display step
For entry valug = 1 the programmed nominal value is rounded to 0 or 5 pm.

With active H!rth coupling (MP 92 Bii 6, see sheet C2/6), MP 65 determines the display step only for the axes X. Y. Z. Axis IV
is governed bi MP 260.
MP 92 (vlultipla function parameter
9lt 0 &nal character

* 0 A Decimal comma
$ 1 A Decimal point
Bit 0 of MP 92 influences the decimal sign of the position display as well as the decimal sign for data output via the
RS-232~1X.28 data interface (see sheet D1/6).
Bit6 punting mode If the axis IV operates aa poeitlon display for a rotary table
+ 0 P Axis IV counts 0 29999.999 [“I
+ 32 A Axis IV counts 0 359.999 [“I - 0
If the axis IV operates as a position display for a rotary table and is always rotated in the same direction. the counter will over-
flow after 29d99.9990. The position display after 359.999O is reset to 0 by setting bit 5 of MP 92.
Bit 1 to bit 4 and bit 6 see sheet Cl/g.
MP 167 pisplay of momentary feed prior to start in manual operating mode

0 A No display
1 P Display
If a display of ‘the momentary feed is requested. and if the feeds in MP 4 to MP 7 and MP 322 vary, the feed in all axes is
reduced to the lowest value within MP 4 to MP 7 and MP 322,“s’
MP 191 $i;pFla of the momentary spindle rpm prior to start
1 AOn
paramters for machine operation
MP 68 rro;ry functkm for diredon buttons
:I Aon
MP 68 activates the memory function for the external direction buttons which can be realised via marker 2450 and
complement marker 2466 (see sheet P3/22).
The memory function permits continuous traverse of axes even after the release of the external direction bunons.
MP 74 Feed and spindle overrides
Bii 0 m override If the rapid traveme button is preswd in opwatlng mode “Program run”
+ 0 P Override inactive
+ 1 A Override active
Bii 1 bed override in 2 %-stages or variable

+ 0 A 2 %-stages
+ 2 A Variable
Bit 2 Faad override if the rapid travwse button and the external dhactlon buttons are pressad in the
“manual” mode
+ 0 P Override inactive
+ 4 A Override active
Bit3 Spindle override in 2%~stager or variable

t 0 A 2%~stages
+ 8 A Variable
Datum set f& axis V
The datum of:axis V can either be set via axis key V or MP 337.
MP 334 beturn set via axis key V

b P Inactive. the reference mark is transferred from MP 337
1 A Active
MP 337 Datum for axb V

Entry range: - 30000.000 + 30000.000 [mm]
: Issue seotlon
Commiwionlng c2 77
April 4, 89
I
parameters for control programming
MP 170 ntrul a* programming atatiun

p A cantrol
? P Programming station: PLC active
2 0 Programming station: PLC inactive
The TNC 355 ican be used as a programming station without additional wiring.
MP 217 hangeover HEIDENHAIN dialogue-pmgramming - 180-pmgnmmlng

1 P HEIDENHAIN dialogue
3 A IS0 (G-codes)
When compilihg programs directly at the machine, we recommend programming according to the HEIDENHAIN-dialogue-
concept.
With external icompilation of programs. the ISO-format (G-codes) can be advantageous, since postprocessors in the
ISO-format ar6 often less expensive to create.
When changidg over, all NC-programs contained in the TNC-memory are translated into the appropriate programming
language.
,
MP 236 pphiw
Bii 0 Changeover ol the “PmjecUon in three plan&
+ 0 A German standard
4 1 A U.S. standard
“Projection in three planes’ can be changed over from the U.S. standard to the German standard with bit 0.
Bit1 ’
rotation of the coordinate system by 90’ in’the working plane
jt 0 A No rotation
p 2 A Coordinate system rotated
With bii 1 the bking plane can be rotated by 900 in the graphics display. This is convenient if e. g the Y-axis operates as the
tool axis.
g-7
Bit 1 = b
T---+
8iil=l
1
i lwue -6@
Commiaaionlng c2 9
ril 4. 89
I
parameters for program run
PAP91 !%nstsnt ccmtourlng epwd at wmm

Entry range: 0 179.999 [“I
ines the angle with which a contour corner is milled at e constant contouring speed.
aremeter is effective for operation with speed precontrol as well as in trailing operation.
speed is necessary. e low value has to be entered for MP 91.

a high entry value is recommended.
MPW Multiple
: function parameter
Blt4 hango from program run single blook to program run full aaquenca when machining oonthwourr
t3 ntoun
b 0 A The precalculated contour is completed (up to 14 blocks)
+ 16 A Interruption of current block
Bit 0 to bit 3. bi 5 and bit 6 see sheet Cl/9
MP 93 $tspmmr fwtor for podcst milling

Entry range: 0.1 1.414
MP 93 detemjines the stepover factor for the tool path in the canned cles “Pocket Milling” and “Circular Pocket’. The feed
during rough-cut milling is calculated according to the formula:
Feed = MP 93 x tool radius
MP 93 is not effective with the cycle “Rough-out” for variable contour pocket milling.
MP 173 ~rssurs of the status display wlth MO2, MS0 and program end
9 A Status display is not erased
1 A Status display is erased
If MP 173 is programmed with “1”. the coordinate conversions, the current tool and the Q-parameters are erased at the end of
a machining program.
~ Ismm Bedkm Me
April 4. 89 c2 10
ption of machine meters
e parameters for program run
MP213
MP214 butput oi M- and S-functiolw
Bit0 ~mnmed atop with MO6

;t 0 A Programmed stop with MO6
+ 1 0 No programmed stop with MO6
Bit 1 output ol MB9

+ 0 A Normal output at the beginning of block
+ 2 A Modal cycle call at end of block
Bit2 &s haIt if spindle rpm only ia ohangod with a TOOL CALL
+ 0 A Axis halt
+ 4 A No axis hail
Bii 3 &Is halt with output of an M-funotion

!+OAAxishaii
+ 8 A No axis halt
If bit 3 is set, the M-functions still have to be acknowledged. In this mode the following functions should not
be executed:
- PLC-positioning (see sheet P3/7)
- Transfer of Q-parameters from the PLC to the NC
- Setting of gear range via the PLC
Axis halt cannbt be cancelled with M-functions which resuk in a programmed stop (as MOO. MO2 .) or by a STOP or by a
CYCL-CALL-blbck,
parameters for program run
MP 241 &olee for milling variable contour pooketa
Bit0 ;cvole Rough-out:

~~~urdimotion for outline milling of
+ 0 A Outline mill pockets CC&V,

with islands CW
h 1 A Outline mill pockets CW.
with islands CCW
Bit 1 Cycle Rough-out:

~uenca for outline milling and mughlng
w
!t 0 p Outline mill, then rough-out pocket
a 2 A Rough-out pocket, then outline mill
Bit2 Combining corrected or tmwnwad

ixmtoum (tool radius oompeneation) Enample: Two pockets which slightly intersect.
+ 0 b Combine corrected contours
+ 4 A Combine uncorrected contours
------
r '--7
I
r-----i r---- 1
I
I II I I
I
I
L---l L---J I
Bit 2 = 0: (Eritry + 0) The Control roughs-out out pockets Bit 2 - 1: (Entry + 4) The control roughs-out out pockets
separately, sinbe the corrected contours (the paths of the tool simukaneously since the incorrected contours are combinea
centre) do noi intersect. Material remains at the internal and intarsect. No material remains at the internal corners. For
corners. the combining of incorrected contours the control requires
more computing time than that for the combining of
corrected contours.
There may be: cases, especially in O-parameter programs in

which the combination of incorrected contours may lead to
undesired resolts. In such cases bit 2 = 0 should be entered
(Entry + 0).
: Irw SWUW me
Commlmkming 12
April 4. 89 c2
,ption of mach~ine parameters
e parameters for program run
Pdtbnlng flocks with MS2
If function M$2 is programmed in a positioning block, the nominal value of the position is not referenced to the workpiece
datum, but td a position which is defined by MP 186 to MP 189. (The entry velues are referenced to the reference point of the
appropriate a*is).
MP189 Axiex Entry range:

MP 187 pJ; - 30000.000 + 30000.000 [mm]
MP 188 Rotary axis:
MP 189 blent - 30000.000 + 30000.000 [“I
Three datum borrections can be entered for all axes via MP 303 to MP 314 and MP 339 to MP 341.
These datum icorrections are activated by markers (see sheet P3/38).
’ The required datum is defined with markers 2816 and 2817:
M2817 ~2816
p No datum correction
: !I 1B1 Datum correction
0 2sd Datum correction
1 ;1 3”’ Datum correction
The datum correction is activated by marker 2819.
After activatioh. the position display indicates the position now referenced to the shied datum
Example: :
X-axis (if M2819 not set) = 100
If M2819 is nbw set, the datum value from MP 303 is added to the value in the actual position display.
This results ini an actual value display for the X-axis = 120.
This correspo(ids to a datum correction (displacement) of the X-axis bv - 20.
The 1”. 2”d or!3ti datum correction is always added to the original actual value being displayed (100 in this example).
~Iseue -ng 8ecthm mse

April 4, 89 c2 13
Desc ption of machine parameters
Machi,x e parameters for the canned .cycle ‘Tapping”
~
MI:87 lbwell time for mlallcn change of working
IEntry range: 0 65.535 s
spindle for “tapping” cycle
MP 73 Advanced switchpoint for switch-off time of spindle during ‘tapping’ cycle (oniy effective with ND-output of
bpindle rpm)
IEntly range: 0 65.535 s
MP 182 Minimum fed cwnide wlth “tapping’ cycle

Entry range: 0 150 [%I
MP 183
~~g$yg~!g wkh “wwing’ cwh
.
liming d&g ie m for “tapping” cycle with analogua output of rplndlo rpm
Feed F of A
tool axis
I
MO3
MO4
I
MO5 f
Feedback signal
/ I!Mue Sectlcn m@
Cmnmldonh3g c2 14
4pril 4, 89
Descr ption of machine parameters
Machi; I, e parameters for canned cycle “Tapping”
Timing diagrpm for “tapplng’ cycle with BCDsoded output oi eplndle rpm
Feed F of tabI axis
CYCLE CYCLE
START STOP
: luuo Beotlon WI@

Commbelonlng c2 15
ril 4. 89
Description of machine parameters
Machine parameters for tool numbers and toolchanger
MP61 Output of tool numbers or tool pocket numbers

0 6 No output
1 ^ Output of tool number. only when tool number changes
2 A Output of tool number wrth every tool call
3 ^ Output of tool pocket number
Entry value “3” is only significant if the central tool file has been addressed by MP 225.
MP 157 Activation d next tool number, programmable with TOOL CALL . ./. or the following tool pocket
number, programmable with TOOL DEF
0 A No output of next tool number
1 - Output of next tool number only when tool number (TOOL CALL ./. ) is changed
2 ^ Output of next tool number with every tool call (TOOL CALL ./. .]
3 ^ Output of next tool pocket number. programmable wrth TOOL DEF.
The entry value “3” is only significant if the central tool file has been addressed by MP 225.
MP 225 _ Central tool file

0 4 No central tool file
1 99 a Central tool file
The number of tools of the central tool file is entered into MP 225. The central tool file is therefore automatically addressed.
The central tool file is addressed via prodram number 0

and then e&ted. output and read-in in thk operating
mode Es programming and editing”. Up to 99 tools
can be ,,rored. The tool number. the length and the
radius a’\! entered for each tool including the tool pocket
number if a tool magazine with flexrble addressing IS
being used.
Depending on what IS selected for MP 61 and MP 157 the control transmits either the tool number or the tool pocket number
to the intetgral PLC when the central tool file is active, i e. tool magazines with
.fixed tool r,ocket addressing and
.flexible adrbsssing
can be carstrolled.
Via PLC-inputs tool and pocket numbers can be read-in in ECD-code and stored in the central tool file. e g. for automatic
.~ me
insetiron into ., toor magazrne
ISSIN? Section Page

Commissioning
April 4. 89 c2 16
i
of ma&ii pammeters
parameters for tool numbers and toolchanger
Tool magazi@e with fixad tool pocket add-
MP 61 iEnt!y value 1 or 2
If MP 61 contains entry value 1 or 2, the central tool file does not aton, tool pocket numbers. The NC-part of the control only
transmits theftool number to the integral PLC. Therefore, a tool magazine with faced tool pocket addressing can be controlled.
MP 167 3ntryvelw1w2
ff MP 157 contains the entry values 1 or 2 the entry of the number for the next tool is requested when programming a tool
call. The VDY display:
TOOL CALL; ./.
During a tool call, the control therefore outputs the number of the current tool and. in addition. the number of the subsequent
tool.
) Tool magazifa with flwdble addfwalng
MP 61 ;&try value ‘3
MP 167 pItry MIUO 3
If MP 61 and /MP lb7 contain the entry value 3 the control takes over the administration of the tool pocket numbers. The
NC-part of th control transmits the tool pocket number to the integral PLC. thus enabling a tool magazine with flexible
addressing to,be
f controlled. Flexible addressing means that during machining the next tool is being sought in the toolchanger
and, with a subsequent toolchange, the old tool is exchanged for a new tool. The control remembers whiih tool number is
stored under which tool pocket number. The tool being sought is programmed via TOOL DEF.
Tools which -i due to their size - occupy three tool pockets are considered as special tools. A special tool is either always
stored in a pdrmanent pocket or is exchanged for another special tool (depending on marker 2601). A special tool is
programmed y setting the cursor to the dialogue question
SPECIALTO L?
and respondi ! #g with the -key.
For safety reasons. with special tools, the preceding and following tool pocket numbers should be erased by setting the
cursor end pressing the m- key Instead of an erased tool pocket number a 0 is displayed.
“S” for specia( tool and “P” for tool pocket number are only displayed if the value 3 was entered in MP 61 and MP 157.
When using special tools, PO (spindle) - or another pocket in the magazine - has to be vacant1
Vacant tool pocket numbers to accomodate a special tool c
Tl T2 T& T6
P tool pbcket numbers
within the magazine
SP7 tool pocket number
for spixial tool
: Irue Section mw
Commiuloning c2 17
April 4. 89
Comrfiissioning the machine
Code pumbers for commissioning
1
Certain oper4ting conditions and functions are selected by code numbers
Coda numb;! entry is via the u-key. After pressing wand m the dialogue
CODE NlJM+lER
is displayed.
The desired dode number is entered and is pressed.
Coda numb+ Function

95148 Machine parameter mode
Exit via the m-key ormkey
961026 PLC-mode
Exit via the -key
) 531210 Erasure of machina psmnata

and PLC-markers Ml000 M2OOO
84169 ltaveming of mfarance markr

with direction buttons
76368 Automatk of&at adjuatmanl (see sheet C4/8)
105288 Non-linear axis compensation

Editing of correction tables (see sheet W&l)
Exit via the m-key
Issue 8ectlon paw

February 8. 90 c3 1 I
I
Comrllissioning the machine
Che& before switch-on
1
Check installqtion and grounding as described in sections M5 and M8,
.Check wiring .of encoders as described in section M3
cautionl
Before switc!+ng-on the interface cabinet. the 24 V-supply voltage from the NC-part and the PLC-pert of the TNC 355, as well
as the mains!supply of the VDU have to be disconnected at the terminals.
Furthermore, we recommend that all servo-amplifiers be separated from the power supply prior to switching-on the interface
cabinet.
IsaW SSCtiOll me
Commissioning
April 4. 89 c3 2
I
Commissioning the machine
Check/j subsequent to switching-on the intetface cabinet
1
Checking t+ supply voltage for the LE and PLC
The voltage frjom both power supply units have to correspond with the definition on sheet M5ll
Checking 4 main8 voltage for BE
The visual display unit BE 4128 is supplied by an AC mains voltage. The operating voltage can be set from two ranges via the
voltage selecibr. Before connecting the VDU. check the voltage selected and the mains fuse rating.
Supply voltabe Voitage range Frequency range Power consumption Mains fuse
IlOV- ‘; 85V-- 132V- M2A
48...62Hz approx. 40 W
220 v- j 17OV--264V- M 1.25 A
Mains fuse
f”m LE 355 (X9)
I I
Power supph/
(Mains voltage)
F&ion test
; Ime Section me
Commhsloning c3 3
dpril 4. 89
Com@sioning the machine
Descrijption of position loop
Black ckcu@ diagram of a position loop

------
1
Actual ’
position 1 -
I Issue Bection me
Commidoning
hpril 4. 89 c3 4
I
Corn issioning the machine
DescriT tion of position loop
B
A position lo p consists of
.tha regulator $ nd
.the- regulatin path.
j
For NC-machines the regulator is specified as a cascade regulator. The
jposition regulator ) control
is subordinatq to the
irpm regulator
and the i
current regulator 1 servo-amplifier
1 The regulaUr/g path is constituted by the machine with motor and axis slide.
i Inue Section ml@

Cammlnknlng
&il4,89 c3 5
issioning the machine
issioning the servo-amplifiers
Commissioni g has to be carried out in the following sequence for all servo-amplifiers:
l Short-cl ult the nominal value line

Disconne t-i , terminals and short-circuit the nominal value line at the servo-amplifier.
l Aouv5t5 ul5toren5bl5
Disconne b ! regulator enable at the servo-amplifier and wire externally
l &MY r SuPPlY
APPLY PO
Y/f I supply at the servo-amplifier.
l 005rs5 adjustment
If tiie axis* eves. adjust offset potentiometer such, that the axis comes to a standstill. After the offset adjustment, remove
the short-dircuit bridge at the nominal value input again.
l co5rs5s‘ 5fJ~ustmsrtt
connect cry to the nominal value input.
Adjust 9 FV at the battery and tune the driving motor via the tacho-potentiometer to the nominal rpm. The nominal rpm can
be determ/ned with a tachometer at the drive motor.
0 Optlmisi the renro-amplitier

(see belo q )
0 o5t5rmi~lon of accelemtlon
(see sheet\C3/8)
Optimieing jw3 aewo-ampliier
For the co&l lhe regulated path consists of a servo-amplifier, motor and axis slide.
Before optimiiing the position loop of the control. the regulated path has to be optimised first.
The charactedstic feature of a controlled system is the ‘stap response”.
A step functidn (9 V) is applied at the input of the servo-amplifier with a battery-operated unit. The step response of the
n be displayed with an oscilloscope. When determining the step response. the axis should be loaded with the
ight of the workpiece.
Given step
function
.
T t b-1
loops (current regulator and rpm regulator) must be optimised such, that the step response displays
m the tacho-signal picture.
/ Issue ssotion
Commk8ionlng
horil 4. 89 c3
Comrpissioning the machine
Com&ssioning the servo-amplifier
The dgnal *ouM not ba aa followa:
Several overshoots
/
cc
1 lmsl
P-pan of the ~subordinate position loops to high or I-part too low
I
1
\ P-part of the subordinate position loops too low or I-part loo high
i IaaW SectiOn ma
April 4. 89 Commisdoning
c3 7
Compissioning the machine
Comt$issioning the servo-amplifiers
Deteminin~ the aooelemtion
The maximu(n acceleration can be determined from the step response. For simplicity it is assumed that the Who-signal
shows a linepr characteristic.
I
I I
I
I
T t h-f=1
-I
The acceleration time T can be derived from this diagram,
For safetv reasons the time T is extended by 10%.
Therefore:
1 T’ = 1.1x T ‘1
The acceleration results from:
The step response has to be determined for all axes.
The values determined for the acceleration are also the entry valuea for MP 64, MP 297, MP 298, HP 299 and MP 336.
1
Issue CornmIssioning
seotion me
April 4. 89 c3 8
issioning the mach,ine
itch-on
Switch-off in i-face cabinet after checking the supply voltages and adjusting servo-amplifiers, Connect supply vokaga to the
NC and the x C-parts of the TNC and the VDU and also connect the nominal value lines to terminals.
After switch-$n, the TNC carries out a RAM memow test and check sum test for EPROM and RAM. This test can be
selectively capcelled via MP 92. Waiting time during commissioning can therefore be avoided if the mains has to be
switched-off pften.
MP 92 ;Muitiple funotion parameter
Bii 2 iMemory test when switohingon (RAM)

‘+ 0 A Memory test is carried out
!+ 4 A No memory test
Bit3 /Checksum teat when switohing-on (RAM + EPROM)

:+ 0 P Checksum test is carried out
~+ 9 A No checksum test
Bit 0, bit 1 and bit 4 to bit 6 see sheet Cl/g.

b
After the mer$oly test the control displays the message:
OPERATING PARAMETERS ERASED
Enter machine parameters as described in sheets C1/23-26.
After entry of :the machine parameters the TNC responds with
POWER INTEfiRUPTED.
If the machin+specific PLC-program is not stored in the KC-EPROM. the PLC-program has to be entered into the
RAM-memory. as described in section P4.
: Issue Section me
Commissioning c3 9
November 21. 89
Comtfnissioning the machine
Selecding the dialogue language
Two dialog& are stored in the TNC 355.
After switch&g-on the control. plain language dialogues appear in the first language on the screen.
English is cohtained as a second dialogue language in every TNC 355. The following dialogue languages are available:
First dialogue language Second dialogue language

Gemlan English
French English
It&an English
Spanlrh English
Danish English
Dutch English
Finish English
SelectIon @he second dialogue language “Englkh’

1
If the commigsioning of export machines is not possible in the language of the country of destination, the possiljlity of
the English dialogue language is possible in most cases. This therefore eliminates the necessity of a
change. Changeover is via machine parameter MP 92.
MP 92 ~Multl~le function parameter
Sltl: !Dilogue language

:+ 0 P First dialogue
;+ 2 A Second dialogue (English)
(Bit 0 and bit 12 to 6, see sheet Cl/g).
~ Issue Commlasioning me
&xi1 4. 99 c3 10
I
The buffer ttery is the voltage backup source of the RAM-memory for NC-programs, PLC-programs and machine
parameters. %il en the control is switched-off.
If the messabe
= EXCHANGE BUFFER BAlTERY =
is display&/the batteries have to be exchanged.
The batterieg are located behind a screwed m-gland within the power supply unit of LE 355.
In addition td the batteries. an accumulator is used with the TNC 355 for backup of the memory content.
The mains w$kage can therefore be switched-off when exchanging the batteries. The accumulator buffers the memory
content, witijout batteries, for approx. 2 weeks. The accumulator is onh/ charged when the TNC is switched-on.
IEC-designbtion .LRG”:
Racommdndation: Philips type LR6 1.5
: keue S@CtlOn pace

CommWoning
April 4. 89 c3 11
Corn issioning the mahine
Outp $l1 “Control operational”
B
The output ” ontrol operational” is available as an option on the LE 355 (connector X21, pin 34) and on the power board
PL 300 (te J .inal X3. pin 10). Only the loading capacity with 100 mA. respectively 1.2 A is different.
A malfunctioh of the control or the machine is displayed by this function. All important conditions of the control electronics,
encoders and machine are monitored.
A flashing error message is displayed simultaneously when switching-off the control voltage externally.
The condition Control non-operational” can only be cancelled by switching-off the mains supply for the TNC 355 after
rectification ef the fault.
If a malfunct/on of the control or the machine is discovered, the output “Control operational” is opened. At the same time,
all PLC-outputs are switched-off, i.e., opened. This also applies to the outputs which are supplied via the non-disconnectible
24 V voltage/
Checking tde “Control operational’ function
b f a fault. the output “Control operational” should switch-off the 24 V-supply voltage in the machine interface.
for safety, this output is monitored by the control for every mains voltage switch-on,
The output “Control operational” is controlled by two monoflops:
.Monoflop for’the position loop processor

.Monoflop forithe main processor
Both directions of this output are monitored when swftching-on the control (see flow diagram, sheet C3/l4).
I I
TNC 355
Electrical switch is momentarily opened 2 times by microprocessors
when control voltage is switched on.
X22/4
Acknowledgement
Control
switched off operational
h---
Emergency
OFF buttons kl
-J
PLC-lnput W (connector X22): Acknowledgement for monltorlng of output “Conttul operational”
1 lUU0 SWth pew

Commbdoning
February 8. 90 c3 12
Outp r t “Control operational”
b Check mdna for output “Contml operstlonal”
Power on.
Erase POWER INTERRU~ED with the’@.
Switch-on control voltage. YES
II t t
Control opens the “operational” contact
at LE X21. Pin 34 and PL 300 X3. Pin 10)
via monoflop of position loop processor.
I
24 volts switched-off
Switch-off mains power. Fault display

RELAY EXT-DC VOLTADE MISSINO
I I
I I
t t
Rectify fault. Switch-on control voltage.
I
I I
7 Control opens *operational” contact

we monoflop of mas7 processor.
YES
I I
Switch-off mains power. Fault display
I I RELAY EXT-DC VOLTADE MISSINQ I
I
t t
I I I
Rectify fault. Switch-on control voltage.
Machine operational.
ISEW 8aouon
Commlaakmi~
&xi1 4. 89 c3 77
Outp I;”t “Control operational”
D ~
I ‘%_
(i
Timing dia ram
hult dlrplay
1. Wait for cdntrol v&age RELAY EXT.DC VOLTAQE MISSINQ
2. The contrd voltage has to switch-off within 174 ms, other&e EMERQENCY STOP DEfECTwE
3. Wait for c+-ttrol voltage RELAY EXT-DC VOLTAGE MISSINQ
4. The contr voltage has to switch-off within 124 ms, otherwise EMERQENCY STOP D-
5. Wait for c ntrol voltage REIAY EXT-DC VOLTADE MlS8lND
6. Control-e&nal process switches-off control voltage EXTERNAL EMEROENCY STOP
The external qmergency stop is evaluated by the control es an external stop. If the external Emergency stop is activated
during an axi$ movement, the axis moved is decelerated as with an external stop. If the servo-amplifiers are blocked b an
and the programmed values from machine parameters 56 to 175 (position supervision erasable).
parameters 57 or 174 (position supervision EMERGENCY STOP) are exceeded, the error message
or GROSS POS~IONING ERROR A is displayed.
-hl I S0CtlOll
c3 I?
Chec lr,ing the external emergency-stop circuit
Check the f+ction of the external emergency-stop circuit by pressing
.the emerge -stop push-knob and

.the emerge -stop limit stitches of the axes.
alrue
pril 4, 89
Commlselonlng
SeotiOhl
c3
me
15
g the traversing and counting directions
Mains voltage on.
t
Erase error message:
POWER INlERftUPTED
with@.
t
Emergency-stop routine.
t
Display:
PASS OVER REFERENCE MARK -
(sequence from MP 59).
Press ext. start button.
direction of axis
onding axis (MP 24
Counting direction NO
1
Error message after approx. 30 s:
QROSS POSlllONlNQ ERROR
4
Axis lies in any position Mains voltage on
within position loop. and off again.
1
Erase arror massage:
POWER INTERRUITED
with a.
The flow diagram has to be followed for each axis1 Emergency-stop routine.
The traversingidirection of the axis is correct if it corresponds with
I
the value prog ammed in machine parameters 16,17, 18,19 or 329
(0 + direct1.bn, 1 - direction) with respect to the defined Correct MP 20 to MP 23.
directions of the machine. The counting direction is correct if it and MP 330. I
corresponds to the defined machine directions.
; Ieeue Section
Commidoning
&ril 4. 89 c3 2
Corn issioning the madMe
Softw ql re limit switch ranges
Detrminatio)~ of machlne-related axis limit values
In operating mode m -Menua& select

display mode REF via
I Position display show distance to the

reference mark. I
Traverse all axes until shortly before emergency-stop

limit switches - using either the direction buttons or the
handwheel - in positive or negative direction, and note
display values on position displeys including sign.
I
I Program values noted for MP 44 to MP 51.

end MP 325. MP 326. I
*,
/ Issue Section
Commlwionlng c3 7
,$pril 4. 99
Optinjising the NC-axes
Precondition
For precise a d fast positioning of the machine axes. the machine parameters have to be optimised for acceleration and
approach, at {t e control.
Before optimi(ing. the following conditions have to be fulfilled:
Operation w(th balling error or with speed pmcontml
With machine’parameter 60 it can be selected as to whether the control operates with speed precontrol or with trailing error,
MP 60 speed m”tml
0 0 Speed precontrol on
‘I A Speed precontrol off. operation with trailing error
/ leeus 6ection me
April 4. 89 c4 1
NC-axes
In the modes IManual’. “Programming and editing- and “Electronic handwheel”, operation with trailing error is always
selected, independently of machine parameter 60.
In the operatiqg modes Teach-in”, Program run single block” and “Program run full sequence” machine parameter 80 has to
be programmed with “1’ for operation with trailing error.
Adw*ges:!
.High computi g speed
.Function M 9:t- Constant contouring speed on corners” is effective,
Therefore both make the operation with trailing error suitable for 3Dcontouring operation,
Contouring edors can occur with high traversing speeds: a programmed circle radius will become smaller, depending on the
Kv-factor and fhe traversing speed.
Commbekning
ising the NC-axes
operation
With acceleraiion limitation via MP 54. MP 297. MP 298. MP 299. MP 335
Kv-factor: MP 176 to MP 181, MP 333

Servo-amplifier
63 I
AC f &ration limitation: L-r---l ‘Integral factor: MP 28. MP 29. MP 30, MP 31

MP 54. MP 297,
MP/ 298. MP 299, MP 335
y.
y A brogr.
I I t ----, ~~----
0 The control calculates the nominal value of the speed every 6 ms taking the entered acceleration into consideration (MP 54,
VP 297. MP 298. MP 299. MP 335).
@ The nominal value of the travel is determined every 6 rns from the nominal value of the speed.
$=so+“xbt s = nominal value of traval
sg = previous nominal value of travel
v = nominal value of speed
At = cycle time for the closed loop (6 ms)
@I jiw nominal value of the travel is separated in X- and Y- p necessary Z-) components.
0 The axis-related nominal value of the travel is compared with the actual value of the position and the trailing error S. is
~~%&AL - X.4flu.u S., = trailing error for the X-axis

XN~M~NAL = nominal value of travel for the X-axis
&XML = actual v.alue of travel for the x-axis
@ Fe trailing error is multiplied by the K.-factor and is transferred as the nominal value of the speed (analogue voltage) to the
$qrvo-amplifier.
~‘XNOMIW = Kv x Sax VN~M~N~L = nominal value of the speed for the X-axis
KV = position loop gain factor
S.X = trailing wror for the X-axis
@ With stationary axes. the integral factor is additionally effective: it effects an offset adjustment.
! Ieeue SOCtlOll pese

Commldoning
4pril 4. 89 c4 3
the NC-axes
with speed precontrol
In the operatirig modes “Positioning with manual input”. ” Program run single block” and “Program run full sequence” machine
parameter 60 /has to be programmed with “0” for operation with speed precontrol.
Advantage: j
High contoui$g accuracy with high speed
Disadvantag :
Less suitable f or 3D-contour machining.
Please note: i
Operation witq trailing,error is always effective for manual operating modes.
Sectlon ma@
Commladoning c4 4
‘ising the NC-axes
Integral factor
(MP 28. MP 29, MP 30. MP 31)
KV determined by difference factor (MP 32. MP 33. MP 34, MP 35, MP 332)
I
Q par operation with speed precuntml. the nominal value of the speed (analogue voltage to servo-amplifier) is generated by
g~~dWO~~~:
.$ailing error and

.]ntegrd part
Q fhe speed component allows operation with a trailing error dose to ‘0”. which means in most cases, the nominal value of
ihe position corresponds to the actual position value.
@ p deviations around the actual position value ark compensated for as described in “Operation with trailing error”.
0 $Wiih stationan/ axes the integral factor is additionally effective; it effects an offset adjustment.
j leeue Section mP
Commlssionlng
April 4. 89 c4 5
opti I* n the w-am
Voltag T
increment at nominal value output
The nominal ‘alue outputs of the TNC 355 are equipped with a 12 bit digital-analogue converter. i.e. 2’* - 1 = 4095 steps
can be outp The maximum voltage of the analogue outputs is 10 V, thus resulting in a smallest voltage increment of
10 v : 4095 j 2.44 mv.
Output of a vfltage increment. see sheet C4/11 and C4/26
By sening ma/chine parameters it can be determined as to when the smallest possible voltage increment is outpUt for a small
nominal value1deviation.‘“’
MP 20 Bii 3. output of smallest voltage increment of 2.44 mV

MP 21 Entry values:
MP 22 + 0 p Output of 2.44 mV. if calculated nominal value is equal to, or greater than
MP 23 1.22 mv.
MP 330 + 8 A Output of 2.44 mV, if calculated nominal value is greater than 0.
By entering ti-je value + B e nominal value voltage is output, even with the slightest deviation of the nominal value (i.e. one
counting pulse from the encoder.
/ Issue Section
Commiwhlng 2
pril 4. 89 c4
Optit@sing the NC-axes
Fine o#set adjustment at the servo-amplifier
Check entry /~~luea fcr the following machine parameters:
Function I Pammeter Entry value

No.
Integral factor -X 28
Y 29 i
Z 0
IV 0
Factor for diffyence value
;
Z
IV
V
Speed precon{rol 60 0 p on
Display step ~ 65 O&l pm
Automatic drije offset 252 0
adjustment ~
Iswe Section me
/ Commieslonlng
April 4. 89 c4 6
,~
set adjustment at the servo-amplifier
Erase offset n/~emoty at the TNC control as follows:
I
I
Exit from MOD-operating mode with a,
I
,
Switch on t$ling error display and select operating mode “Program nm”
Press three times.

m
1
Dialogue display:
POSITION DISPLAY
appears in front of axis designation X.
I Exit from MOD-operating mode tith,m.

I
Select operating mode “Program full sequence-

61,
“Program single blo
“Positioning with manual
carryoutfinedhet ndjuetment
Turn offset potentiometen until trailing error display
show “0’ or symmetrically oscillate about “0”.
1 Ieeue Commluioning
SSCtlOll
4pril 4, 89 c4 7
set adjustment through the control
ffset adjustment can be carried out by entering code number 76386. The control displays the offset values in
e in the sequence X Y, Z. IV, (V) in 2.44 mV-units. e.g.
Y. no offset in the Z-axis and 4.88 mV in axis N.

The automatic offset adjustment is addressed by pressing the
m-.
key The offset values displayed in the screen are
transferred an the control automatically outputs a corresponding voltage to compensate the offset values.
If the offset a ‘ustment is to be switched-off. the code number 76368 has to be re-entered and the m-key pressed.
k
Automatic dh offsot adjustment
A duration cad be programmed via machine parameter 252, after which the automatic offset adjustment is repeated
MP 262 cltlc drhm oflset adjustmant

ntry range: 1 _. 65535 [in units from 20 ms]
p No automatic adjustment
I-
fulfilled:
.i
The automstyoffset adjustment is carried out 1 the given duration has lapsed and the following conditions have been
.all axes are at a standstill

.the spindle is ot switched-on and
.the axes ere n1 t clamped.
Moreover. en ffset adjustment is immediately carried out after approaching the reference marks.
With controlle traversing sn adjustment is also possible within the duration between “Nominal value in target’ and “Actual
value not in th target windov\r, providing the nominal value is in the target for longer than 5 s.
“.
With every off et-adjustment 2.44 mV are compensated. lf the offset voltage is greater than 2.44 mV, it is completely
compensated fter several adjustment cycles.
ge
The maximum admrssrble offset voltage is 100 mV. If this voltage is reached or exceeded. the error massage
I ”
= GRGSS IllONlNG ERROR E -
*
is displayed. j
Automstk sdjuetmsnt with the aid ol the integml factor
The integral fa or (MP 28. MP 29. MP 30. MP 31) also carries out an automatic offset adjustment. The effect and the
optimisation o1P the integral factor is explained in C4/21..
ral factor is oontinuously in operation, this could lead to an instabilii of the closed loop if the drives have~a
HEIDENHAIN therefore recommends the integral factor 0 in this case.
Opti ising the NC-axes
Speed“t adjustment through the control
Check entry v$ues for the following machine parameters:
Funotion
Integral factor!
!
X
rm- En(ryvcll-
28 0
r
IV
Factor for diff$rence value X
;
/
53 1
Acceleration j 54 value from tha adjustment sheet C3/8
57
56 ii
80 0
Acceleration I Y 297 values from adjustment, sheet C3/8
Z 298
! N 299
Diff. factor forrspeed precontrol V 332
Acceleration I V 335 from adjustment. sheet .C3/8
Wiih auxiliary operating mode, switch-

over displays to trailing error.
Enter following program

in operating mode
PRWRAMMINO AND EDITINO m
LBL 1
X 100” RO F 29998
X 0 RO F 29998
CALL L8L 1 100/100
Press ext. start

in operating modes’
AUTDMATIC PRDWIAM RUN a
Machine runs,
actual value displays show trailing error.
At servo-amplifier using velocity

potentiometer (techo-feedback), tune
trailing error to a mean for both
directions as near to “0” as possible.
i
Repeat adjustment for all the other axes.
1 kule SOCtiOll ml@

Commbelonlng
ril 4. 89 c4 9
Optimi1 ing operation with speed precontrol
Machine pa metem for opamtion with speed pmcowul

f
Check entry values for the following machine parameters:
/
Function ( Fmliminnfy
sntw vdus
Integral factor; X
Y
2
IV
Factor for difference value X
Y
Acalogue voltage at rapid

Z
N iz
52 9M
Approach speed in precontrol mode 53 0.5 [m/min]
Acceleration ; X 54 Entry value from sheet C3/8 or 0.2 [m/s’]
60 OPOll
64 0.1
Acceleration j Y 297 Entry values from sheet C3/8 or 0.2 [m/s*]

Z 298
IV 299
Analogue volttge et rapid Y 300 9M
Z 301
I IV 302
Difference factor for speed V 332 1
precontrol i
Acceleration I V 335 Entry values from sheet C3/8 or 0.2 [m/s’]
Analogue voltage at rapid V 338 9M
i Precontrol Entry value correct

----- Entry value too large
-. . . - _. - Entry value too small
I Issue Commbaioning
Section
April 4, 89 c4 T
ising the NC-axes
operation with speed precontrol
Diirence*r
The difference factor is the multiplier for the voltage dllerence per urn position deviation from the nominal value
AU =Dx2.44rnV A U = Voltage difference per pm position deviation

D = Difference factor
The control can only output full converter steps.
Example: ~
.with D = 1 iposition deviation 2.44 mV is output per urn
.with D = 0.5 bositfon deviation 2.44 mV is output per 2 pm
.with D = 2 iposition deviation 4.88 mV is output per urn (double converter step).
The effect of ihe difference factor with various entry values is shown by the following diagram:
Voltage
steps t D=2
[2.44 mVj
-
1 234567 Position deviation [urn]
i Iaeuo section ww
Commbbning 11
April 4, 89 c4
I
ising the NC-axes
ing operation with speed precontrol
The different factor is effective when an axis is stationary or moving.

fi
Difference factor
MP 32 to MP 35, MP 332
If the Kv-facto- and the rapid traverse of a machine are known. the difference factor can be taken from the following table
(explanation o‘ Kv-factor see sheet C4/25).
Minimal
Rapid [m/min] voltage step Kv= 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
1 Z 4.88 mV/pm 3.68 4.42 5.16 5.90 6.63 7.37
2 2.44 mV/pm 1.84 2.21 2.58 2.95 3.31 3.68
3 1.22 1.47 1.72 1.96 I 2.21 2.45
4 2.44 mV/2 pm 0.92 1 1.10 1.29 1.47 1.65 1.84
5 0.73 0.88 1.03 1.18 1.32 1.47
6 0.61 0.73 0.86 0.98 1.10 1.22
7 0.52 0.63 0.73 0.84 0.94 1.05
8 bad regulating 0.45 1 0.55 0.64 0.73 0.82 0.91
9 behaviour
standstill at 0.40 0.49 1 0.57 0.66 0.73 0.81
10 0.36 0.44 1 0.51 0.59 0.66 0.73
11 0.34 0.40 0.47 1 0.54 0.60 0.67
12 0.31 0.37 0.43 0.49 1 0.55 0.61
13 0.28 0.34 0.40 0.45 1 0.51 0.58
14 0.26 0.32 0.37 0.42 0.47 1 0.53
15 0.25 0.30 0.34 0.39 0.44 0.49
16 0.23 0.28 0.32 0.37 0.41 0.46
luue commlnioning sectbn

April 4, 89 c4
king the NC-axes
The different factor can be calculated for higher traversing speeds and higher Kv-factors. For intermediate values it can be
calculated as allows:
1. Calculate trdiling error
Sa= 6 Sa = Trailing error (lag)

v = Rapid traverse
Kv = Position loop gain
Sa = 4 m m’n Sa = 3.333 mm
1.2 “, in
++!I?
2. Calculate v Itage step per urn position deviation
AU = umx
Sa AU = Voltage step par pm position deviation
U mBx= Output voltage with rapid traverse
Sa = Trailing error (lag)
1
A” = 9000 bhl
3333 [Lpi
au = 2.7 [Trn
q
D = Difference factor
AU = Voltage step per urn position deviation
D=2:& - i
D = 1.1
Pleaasnote:
The best regu ating behaviour resuits from a
I I Difference factor Z 1. I
If the differen al factor is substantially less than 1. operation with trailing error (lag) and characteristic kink is recommended
(see C4/2). ti
ISSUS Sootion wle

Commbvbnlng
April 4. 99 c4 13
out as follows:
Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer of the

servo-amplifier of the X-axis.

in operating mode
PROQRAMMINO AND EDlllNO 0
LBLI
X 100 RO F 29998
X 0 RO F 29998
CALL LBL 1 Rep loo/loo
Pressext. start
in operating mode
PROGRAM RUN SlNDll! BLOCK m
Machine runs.
Difference 1actor MP 32: Increase entw

entry value until position loop oscillates.
t [msl
belle Commiwbnlng
April 4. 89
ising the NC-axes
operation with speed precontrol
I
,
Diierenca factor MP 32: Reduce entry value until no oscillations can be detected.
I
I .
Repeat adjustment procedure for axes Y. 2 IV and V.
I I
AP?&l Comm~jdoning
SectIon
c4
me
15
ising the NC-axes
acceleration of the regulated path could not be determined with the batten/-operated unit as dectibed on
acceleration has to be optimised as follows:
Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer of

servo-amplifier of X-axis..
4
Entry of following values for
position wow&ion
t
in operating mode
PROQRAMMINQ AND
EhlNQq
LBL 1
Xl00 RO F 29998
X 0 RO F 29998
CALL LEL 1 Rep lOO/lOO
t
MP54
Increase “Acceleration’
in small steps. t-
t
Press ext. start
in operating mode
F’ROQRAM RUN 8lNQl.E BLOCK
Machine runs.
I
Control stops machine. NO
POSlllONlNQ ERROR
YES
Enter acceleration’kom MP 54 in MP 297 to MP 299

and MP 336.
Traverse the Y, Z. N and the V-axis with the
acceleration value found.
Reduce values, if necessary.
I
Enter the 0.7 to O.Ofold factor of the detenined
AIeeue
pril 4, 89
ising the NC-axes
Radial ao&ation
MP 66 bdlal aocalaration
intry range: 0.001 3.0 m/s*
The machine parameter for radial acceleration limits the feed for circular movements via the following formula:
v = Maximum feed for circular movements
v=JrxMP55 r = Circle radius
For MP 55 HqlDENHAlN recommends a value ranging between half and the total value of MP 54,
Optlmiaing t a ovanhoot behaviwr
The shape of acceleration curve is influenced in all axes by MP 64.
Tacho
voltag
MP 64 correct
----- MP 64 too large
b . . . . . . . . MP 64 too small
t bl
Since MP 64 effective for all axes. the worst axis determines the entry value. Overshoot should not occur in any axis
Iaaue Saotlon WI@

Commlnslonlng
April 4, 89 c4 17
‘:
ising the NC-axes
The adjuetment b cawbd out aa follows:
I Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer

of the sewo-amplifier X I

in operating mode
mDQRAMMlNQ AND EDrnNG m
LBL 1
x 100 RO F 29998
x 0 RO F 29998
CALL LBL 1 Rep lOO/lOO
Pressext. start
in the operating mode
PRDQRAM RUN SlN0l.E BLOCK
Machine runs
MP 84: In rease entry value until overshoot occws.
b t [msl
1 Check axes Y, Z. N and V and correct MP 64, if necessary 1
beue Seotbn
c4nnlnbebnlng c4 ?r
pril 4, 89
ising the NC-axes
Gradient of d hanctwietk when approaching poattbn
MP 53 influences the gradient of the deceleration characteristic in the vicinity of the nominal position.
MP 53 correct
----- MP 53 too large

*..*
* -c- . . . . . MP 53 too small
, +
Since MP 53 s effective for all axes, the worst axis determines the entry value. No nominal position of any axis should be
traversed.
Aoaae note:
lf the entry fo MP 53 is too small. the positioning durations into the nominal position substantially increase. Therefore
optimise MP I 3 carefully!
Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer

of servo-amplifier.

in operating mode
PRGGRAMMING AND SDITING m
LBL 1
X 100 RO F 29996
X 0 RO F 29998
CALL LBL 1 Rep 1oo/lOO
i
Press ext. start
in operating mode
PRGGRAM RUN SiNW BLOCK a
aIeeua
oril 4. 89 I Sectbn
c4 I?
ising the NC-axes
I
I
UMA MP 53: Increase entry value until the position is clearly traversed when approaching.
Tacho ltage The overshoot can also be observed in the actual value display.
+
I
~ n m
t ml
1
uM A MP 53: Reduce entry value until the position ceases to be traversed.
b
t h-1
I I
Control the Y-, Z-, IV- and V-axis and correct MP 53,
if necessary.
Issue Sb pace
Commia&hg
ril 4. 89 c4 20
ising the NC-axes
lntegralle rx,Y,z,IV
The integral f ctcr (MP 28 to MP 31) affects an automatic offset adjustment for standstill with slight position deviations (the
offset adjust ant of the servo-amplifier has to be carried cut before determining MP 28 to MP 31).
I
The function 4f the Integral factor for various entry values is shown in the following diagram:
Converter I x Sa = 333 Sa = Position deviation

I x Sa = 166
steps nominal position value
[2&I mv]
4-
12345 6
Example:
Position devi a io8” from nominal position value: 1 pm.
Entry value f 0 ilntegral factor 333: the control compensates with 2.44 mV after l/2 second.
Entry value f 0 ilntegral factor 83: the control compensates with 2.44 mV after two seconds.
i
lseue Seotlon pa@

Commlrsbnlng c4 21
&xi1 4. 89
ising the NC-axes
Optlmlelng the integral faotor
MP 65: “0’ (Display step = 1 pm).

Machine remains in position in closed loop condition.
1
MP 28 (for X-axis):
Increase entry value” until closed loop condition
distinctly changes (observe etiual value display).
I MP 28: Decrease entry value to a point where the

closed loop condition normalizes” again.
I Repeat adjustment for exes Y. Z N and V. I
factor is possible in connection with the automatic offset adjustment with MP 252, can only be judged by
whole machine. The optimum solution should be found during commissioning.
‘I First sntry VBLIB100 and then increaseentry valueby 100eachtime.
” For backlash~~rone drives. the entry value should be “O-.
IeeUO Se&on m@
Commbdoning
April 4. 89 c4 22
ksllion
*” rion for the pmcontrol mode
MP 65
MP 67
T rasable
Entry range: 0.001 30 [mm]
Emergenn/-step I
MP 57. ranges for constant positioning supervision of the machine are determined. This supervision is
as the machine axes are being held in closed loop by the control. When the limits of parameter 56 are
stops (error message POSlllONlNQ ERRQR). while the control initiates an -Emergency-stop” if the
are exceeded. The error message FOSlllONINQ ERROR can be cancelled with whereas the
a3
has to be switched-off every time for “Emergency-stop” end the reference marks have to be
entry values:
Machine pa meters No. Entry MIUO Supetvlsion range
Position supervision
for operation with (erasable) 0.5
speed precon rol (emergency-stop) E; 10”
Section me
Commidoning
c4 23
ising the NC-axes
ing of operation with lag
Machine pm+mtan for trailing opation

1
FUnctlon Param Fvallmlnary
I No. mtntyvalun
Analoaue vol&te at rapid X 52 9M
54 Entry Values from sheet C3/8
60 l&Off
176 1
177 1
178
179
180
181 Derived from the following formula:
max. machining feed x 100%
Entry value =
rapid traverse
Acceleration 1 Y 297
L 298
iv 299
Analogue voltage at rapid Y
7L
300 9M
301
I1 Iv 302
Kv-factor for trailing operation V 333 1
Acceleration i 335 Entry values from sheet C3/8
Analogue vo ge at rapid V 338 9M
In trailing ope ation the acceleration is proportional to the KV-factor, i.e. a higher acceleration automatically results from a
higher Kv-fa r. To avoid this effect. TNC 355 operates with an acceleration limitation.
The accelerati n is limited by MP 54, MP 297, MP 298, MP 299 and MP 335, i.e. by the same machine parameters which
are effective f r speed precontrol (same entry values).
‘B
gain: K&actor
the traversing speed of an axis with a determined trailing error, The KV-factor is calculated according
KV=g i KV = Position loop gain

VE = Rapid traverse
I Sa = Trailing error (lag)
The Kv-factor has to be matched to the machine tool.

If a very a hig Kv-factor is selected, the trailing error becomes very small at a certain speed. If the trailing error is too small.
the axis slide nnot approach the required position precisely. due to its inertia: the axis overshoots. lt may even occur, that
the position I op carries out self-induced oscillations.
a
If the KV-factor is too small, the acceleration and the approach to the position occur too slowly.
Issue SBCtiOll
Commldonlng
April 4. 89 c4 77
Optimi” ing of operation with lag
JMA
- KV correct
MP 177 to MP 180.
---- KV too large
MP297 to MP299.
. .. . KV too small
- t [sl
it is also advantageous if at least one voltage step is output for each urn position deviation,
factor” (see sheet C4/ll.. .) it is explained that the control outputs 4095 voltage steps for 10 V
this corresponds to 3685 steps for 9 V analogue voltage.
par urn position deviation is output. the trailing error should not exceed 3.685 mm:
I Sa 5 3.685 mm 1 Sa=trailingerrorfor9V
Wah increesin trailing error, a greater position deviation is required for a voltage step. With smaller trailing error, several
voltage steps re output per urn position deviation.
Example:
with 9a = 7.3 0. 2.44 mV are output per 2 urn position deviation.
Wah 3a = 1.8 2. 4.88 mV are output per 1 pm position deviation,
I
r by which a voltage step can be output per 1 urn position deviation is normally calculated to the following
= Failing error with rapid traverse

MP 52 = Analogue voltage with rapid traverse
Ieeuo Commbelaning t%CtiOll psoe

April 4. 89 c4 25
ising the NC-axes
voltego step per pm position dwlation
p per urn position deviation can be calculated by the following formula:
AU = Voltage in mV per pm position deviation

MP 52 = Analogue voltage with rapid traverse
Sa = Trailing error (lag)
Nu = Voltage steps per pm position deviation
Example:
Kv=l:VE= 4 m/min;MP52=9V
Sa=~;sa
I f [mm] : Sa = 2000 pm
Nu = 1.86 Vo/tage steps per pm poskion deviation
ISSUe Section hse

Commiwbnlng
April 4. 99 c4 26
ising the NC-axes
Kv-factor cannot be increased for machines having high rapid traverse speeds such, that an optimum
results for the machining speed or standstill. Therefore, a characteristic kink can be entered in most
the characteristic kink is determined via MP 181. The Kv-factor is multiplied within the upper range by the
176.
UM4
MP 177 to MP 18g (MP 333)
Cslculstlon the tots1 lag using the chsrscterlstlc kink
Se = T-ailing error (lag)

VE = Rapid traverse
KV = Position loop gain
”
-n-e- s charmtwistic kink
.High Kv-factor in the lower range, i.e. a higher voltage step per pm position deviation
.Lower Kv in th upper range
Plsaes n&e:
The characteri ic kink must lie above the highest machining feed.
I”
Ieum me
pril 4. 89 Commbabnlng c4 27
ising the NC-axes
Optlmising s K&mdor
To detemline he optimum position loop gain (Kv-factor) in the lower range, the adjustment has to be initially carried out with
the machinin I feed. In a second adjustment the Kv-factor is determined for rapid traverse.
MP 181 0
Kv-factor, determined by
MP 177 to MP 188 (MP 333)
* t bl
feed: the characteristic kink has to lie here or above.
AIssue
pril 4. 89
Seotion
c4
ising the NC-axes
Optimizing the K&mtcr for mnchtning feed
Adjustment is carried out as follows:

of the servo-amplifier of X-axis.
i
in operating mode
PROQRAMMtNQ MD EDtllNQ m
LBL 1
X 1OO”...RO F”
X 0 RO F”
CALL LBL 1 Rep lOwlO
1
Press ext. start
in operating mode
PROQRAM RUN StNQlB BLOCK
Machine runs.
Note: Set feed override to 100%.
MP 177: I& ease entn/ value until position loop oscillates or until an overshoot occws after the acceleration ramp.
0 Machinirg feed
I
averses as large as possible for the corresponding axes
chining feed.
tulle Sectbn m.
Commtdonlng c4 29
April 4. 89
ising the NC-axes
MP 177: R duce entry value until no oscillations are detectable.
Repeat adjustment for axes Y. 2, N and V.
PIwee note:
The Kv-factor as to be the same for axes which commonly interpolate. In this case, the worst axis determines the entry
value. I
I
Iwue Section
Commlwbning
April 4, 89 c4 7
ising the NC-axes
Optimhlng t e K&actor for rapid trmmme
Adjustment is carried out ss follows:

I
Check multiplication factor for Kv (MP 176 = 1) and characteristic kink
max. macc$y;$:ex 100% ).
(MP 181 =

of the servo-amplifier of X-axis.
1
in operating mode
PROQRAMMINO AND EDITINQ 81
LBL 1
X 100” RO F 29.998
X 0 RO F 29.998
CALL LBL 1 Rep lOO/lOO
~verses as large as possible for the corresponding axes

ising the NC-axes
Does the t cho signal show overshoot?
1 YES
1 NO
Reduce MP 176 in steps until overshoot

Characteristic kink not required.
can no longer be detected.
Repeat adjustment for axes Y. Z. N and V.

I
please note:
The worst axi I determines the entry value for MP 176.
beue Seotion
Comm*rbnhg ?z
pril 4. 89 c4
isihg the NC-axes
ision of positioning
limit of parameter 174 leads to an emergency-stop of the control; the fleshing error message QROSS
is diplaved. This error message can only be cancelled by switching-off the mains voltage for the
FUNtlon I 1 Pammater 1 Rwommondul entrv valuea

No.
Position sup&Mon in
tfalltng operation
Emergency-stsp 174 1.4x trailing error with rapid traverse’)
erasable 175 1.2x trailing enor with rapid traverse’)
Poeltlon Supsrvieii for opemtlon wlth pmcontml
For operation tiith precontrol, the ranges for position supervision are determined bv MP 56 (erasable) and MP 57
(Emergency-s:op).
Funotlon Psmnlstw Rsoemnlondul sntry vsluse

No.
Switching the residual nominal value voltage when ormr manago “Posltlonlng ermf is displayed.
lf blocked axe cause the error message “POSKIONING ERROR’ a residual voltage may remain at the nominal velue output,
A duration ca be determined via MP 185, after which, this residual nominal value voltage is switched-off with the error
message “PO ioning error”.
MP 186 clay for cutout of tu&lual nominal value voltage when wmr mouage “Positioning errof is
ieplaysd.
.: ntly range: 0 65.535 [s]
Seotion mm
Oommieslonlng
c4 33
Optidising the NC-axes
Supervision of positioning
The maximum admissible deviation of the analogue voitage is monitored by the given voltage of the nominal value as per
MP 234. If ths maximum admissible deviation is exceeded. the error message Q%SS ~IllONlPlQ ERROR is displayed
- Given analogue voltage
zz. Maxrmum deviation determinedby MP 234
““t
Funotlon Parameter RooornW jntrv Wfm

No.
Movement su elvision 234 0.03 . . 10 M
MP 234 is act a in trailing operation end with speed pracontrol,
standeull s&l don
With parameter 169 the range is determined in which the non-controlled axes may be moved. If the programmed limit is
exceeded, the control goes into emergency-stop and displays the flashing error message
OR088 PDSltKlNlNQ ERROR D.
This supervfsicn can also respond

.if. when approaching the nominal position, an overshoot occurs, which exceeds the entry value of MP 169 or
.if the axis mo\es in the opposite direction on commencement of positioning (e.g. wrong counting direction, release of
clamps).
FlUlCthl Psrametor nwom~rntyv6fue

No.
Standstill supqvision 169 0.001 .30 [mm]
Iasua Sectbn
Cemmbsbdng c4 ~2
April 4. 89
,.
Overvi w of error messages
GROS POSlTlONING ERROR
”
The error me sage GROSS POSIllONINQ ERROR can be displayed for various reasons
Suffixes A - : are displayed to indicate the specific error cause:
Emw cause
Position supervision MP 67 or MP 174 exceeded.
ONINO ERROR 6 lo-volt nominal value voltage of control for precontrol operation exceeded.
ONING ERROR C Limit for movement supervision MP 234 exceeded.
ONINQ ERROR D Limit for standstill supervision MP 169 exceeded.
Limit for automatic cyclic offset adjustment (100 mV) exceeded.
Ieaue Section paes

Commbabning 35
April 4. 89 c4
ising the main spindle
the main spindle
the main spindle is controlled via M-functions M03. MO4 and MO5 by means of a closed loop. The main
e oriented via a PLC-positioning.
eeds can be output either BCD-coded or via an analogue voltage output having up to 8 programmable gear
Iroe Section
Commirloning
pril 4, 89 c5 T
Optitlsing the ma,in spindle
Codec output of spindle speeds
The spindle s ed is programmed in the NC-block in rpm.The S-function is transferred
viamarkerZ( 1 (Bit 0, Isb) to marker 2071 (Bit 7. msb). with coded output of spindle rpms;
and 8CD-cud in two decades via the strobe marker 2064 of the NC-parttothe controlofthe PLC-part of the control.
The NC-part the control awaits the continuation of program run until the acknowledgement is given via marker 2481that
the gear was banged.
uetofootk i-functlone
Coding
of & ncliona
s-function 0.44~ I Bit

cde rpm 17664 3210 qoda Imm I%64
I
3210
s 00 0 I 0000 oooo S60 31.6 0101 0000
s 01
so2
so3
S 61
S62
S63
40
36.6
45
I0101
0101
0101
0001
0010
0011
so4 S 64 60 0101 0100
so5 S65 0101
SO6 s 66 0110
so7 S67 0111
SO8 S68 1000
s 09 S 69 1001
-
s IO S60 0000
Sll S 61 112 I 0110 0001
s12 $62 126 0110 0010
s13 S63 140 0110 0011
s14 S64 160 0110 0100
s15 S66 180 0110 0101
S16 S66 200 0110 0110
s17 S67 224 0110 0111
S18 S68 250 0110 1000
s 19 S 69 280 0110 1001
- I
s20 1 0010 s70 315 0111 0000
s 21 1.12 0010 s 71 355 0111 0001
s22 1.25 0010 0010 S72 400 0111 0010
S23 1.4 0010 0011 s73 450 0111 0011
S 24 1.6 0010 0100 s74 600 0111 0100
S25 1.8 0010 0101 S76 560 0111 0101
S26 2 0010 0110 S76 630 I 0111 0110
S27 2.24 0010 0111 s77 710 0111 0111
S28 2.5 0010 1000 S78 800 0111 1000
s 29 2.8 0010 1001 s 79 900 0111 1001
-
s30 3.15 0011 1000 1000
s31 3.55 0011 z E 1120 1000 E%
S32 4 0011 0010 S82 1250 1000 0010
s33 4.5 0011 0011 1400 1000 0011
0011 0100 iti 1600 1000 0100
E E.6 0011 0101 S86 1800 1000 0101
S36 6.3 0011 0110 S86 t
2000 1000 0110
s37 7.1 0011 0111 S87
S38 0011 1000
s 39 0011 1001 :z
-
IO 0100 0000
E 11.2 0100 oool E
S42 12.5 0100 0010 s 92
s43 14 0100 0011 s 93 4600
16 0100 0100 s 94 I5000
2 18 0100 0101 s 95 I5600
S46 0100 0110 S 96 ,5300
s47 E.4 0100 0111 s 97 7100
25 0100 1000 S 98 I
E 28 0100 1001 s 99 z%i
-
Section
C6 Y
Opti ising the main spWk
Codedm output of spindle speeds
matam for coded output of splndla spnda
utput oi spindla spsed, codad or analogua

A No output of spindle rpm
p Coded output only when rpm changes
A Coded output with avary TOOL CALL
PM coda llmlt
Number of
decades S-code number
Min. rpm 2 00 - 99
I
Max. rpm 12 1 00 - 99
Step .._..._.. 1.. 11 I l- 9
tared as an rpm-code; i. 8.. the minimum spindle speed is determined on S 20 (1 rpm). the maximum spindle
(1000 mm). The range is defined more precisely by indicating that only every second rpm is programmed.
S-code number max. speed
II S-code number min. speed
Thus. 00991 means no limitation
If an rpm whi lies between two standard table values is programmed in the NC-block, it is automatically rounded-off to the
next lower rp
value volta@ for spindle drlva during 3ur change
AIssue
pril 4. 89
ising the main spin&e
ue. output of spindle speeds
quipped with an S-override potentiometer. The minimum and maximum voltage values can be programmed
Machine pa meters far annlogue output of spindle @peed8
MP 82 utprrt of spindle speed, coded or armbgue

P No output of spindle rpm
A Gear switching signal only when gear range changes
A Gear switching signal with every TOOL CAL
A Without gear switching signal
values 1 and 2 saa “Coded output”, sheet C5/3)
MP 63
P 63 has to be programmed with OODSl for analogue output of spindle speeds!
RPM nnlges I gew mnges
MP 78 ear range 1
$
MP 79 Clear range 2
MP 80 Gear range 3
MP81 Gear range 4
MP 82 Gear range 5
is entered for each gear range with S-override 100%. Gear ranges which am not required are deleted by
with MP 82 to MP 86
ranges are to used, MP 82 to MP 85 can be used for monitoring the speed.
78 to MP 85 are divided in two groups:
in MP 82 MP 85 have to be smaller than the entry values in MP 78 MP 81; hence the control
speed supervision has to be carried out.
undershooting of the limit speed by setting marker 2006.
lnsnm suctkul
timmlrloning “;p”
April 4. 89 c5
ue output of spindle speeds
ed for S-override 100% is entered for every gear range,
it speed for gear range 1

logue voltage with S-override at 100%

ange: 0 9.999 [VI
logue voltage at maximum

ange: 0 9.999 [VI
nalogue voltage at minimum

range: 0 9.999 M
however it is inactive, if spindle orientation is active with the control.
p gradient for S-analogue voltage

ry range: 0 1.999 [V/ms]
th the same ramp for both the acceleration and the deceleration via MP 168
I 07 (4 axes)/04 (5 axes), MP 168 only determines the ramp for the acceleration of the spindle.
le deceleration is defined by MP 316.
MP316 amp gradient for S-analogue voltage for epfndk, decebation

1ntry range: 0 1.999 [v/ox]
0 = deceleration from MP 168
Ramp gradie for S-analogue voltage when marker 2816 Ir eat

axes)/04 (5 axes), the selection of a second ramp for acceleration and deceleration is possible via
range: 0 1.999 [V/ms]
S-analogue voltage
: positive; M04: negative
p M03: negative; M04: positive
0 MO3 and M04: positive
A MO3 and M04: negative
I ISSW
Nov mber 21,89 I
Section
C5
me
5
Opti ising the main spindle
Analo ue output of spindle speeds
I
speed
ran
c with four gwr ranges ii MP 88 - MP 87
UM
21 w,.,r I, i I I I I *
‘88N g g 8 1000 1500 2000 3ooo 4000
n Lwml
0 Limitation through MP 184, e.g. 2 V
ISSUO Section me
Commlrrloning
ril 4. 89 c5 6
ising the main spi~ndk
Spoad rang with four QON ren(yr if MP 86 < MP 87
UMA
-8 “.-- --l--- -
c
250 500 750 1000 1250 2Om 2600 3ooo 3750 4ooo 5000
n [rpml
SOOtlOll
Issue -knhrg c5 ?
April 4, 89
Umlteth oi S-override
MP 88 aximum
ntry range: 0 150%
MP 88 inimum
my range: 0 150%
I
UM
Gear range 2: MP 79
t t- 1 I
+ = Smallest programmable rpm
Largest programmable rpm

in gear range 2
750 1001 1250 1500 2000 n [wml

%ii&Ki+
range for
2 gear ranges
Issue Section we
CommMoning c5 a
lril 4. 89
ue out.put of spindle speeds
!
MP 74 Feed and spindle override
Bit3 pindle override in 2 %-stages or variable

0 A 2%~stagaa
8 p Variable
@ii 0. bit 1 and bit 2. sea sheet C2/8)
F
MP 190 ramming or rpm 8 = 0 permitted
A S = 0 permitted
1 p S = 0 not permitted
a voltage value in MP 184 can be leas with MP 190.
MP 191 isplay of the actual spindle rpm b&m spindle stsrt

AOIl
IAOff
MP214 halt if rpm only is changed with a TOOL CALL
Bit2 0 p Axis halt

4 A No axis halt
(8it 0. Bit 1 and Bit 3. see sheet Q/11)
MP 268 -Analogue output of spindle rpm if matir 2601 Is set

ntry range: 0 99999.999 [rpm]
irection of rotation always positive.
I
A ISSU0
pril 4, 89
the main spinc#e
tion of main spindle
An orientation of the main spindle can be programmed via the position loop for the axis S. This is, e.g.. important for an
automatic tool hange or when using a TS 511/E 120 3D-touch probe with infra-red signal transmission.
ROD 428 wit / 1024 lines (see sheet T4/4) is a suitable rotary encoder.
Spindle orien tion is principally carried out as a PLC-positioning. The nominal value of the position for orientation is either
determined vi
1
1
.the orientatio cycle or
.via MP 126 to,MP 156.
The position v Iue on the reference mark for the axis S is entered via MP 240, since the setting of a datum is not possible via
an axis key. a
Machine pejmeten for spindk, otientation
1
MP 237 hmtlcn cf axle s for rpirKh olhtatirlll
A Axis inactive
A Axis active, without position display
p As entry value 1. however, with position display
is displayed instead of axis IV)
MP 238 &wtcr for axis S (spindle)

tit* range: 0.100 10.000
1
MP 239 nting direction and refannco p&e InhibW for spindle odmtatbn axis
P
ElfI 0 0 A Positive counting direction
! 1 A Negative counting direction
Bit 1 0 P Reference pulse inhibit inactive
2 A Reference pulse inhibit active
;
MP 240 lonvflluecnthe.- meakforaxl8Sbplndb)

ntly range: 0
vo” 360.000 [“]
MP 246 ltlcn window for axis B (spindle)

ntry range: 0 65535 [increments]
f.-
MP 248 rpm for spindle orientation

range: 0 99999.999 [rpml
ISSUO Section pago

Ccmmiaeicning
ril 4. 89 c5 10
Section Page
Ul 1
Ul 2
ges for user-cycles Ul 3
Ul 4
Ul 5
in the NC-program met-non/ 2
u3 1
laeue Sootion mm
pril 4, 89 U~-fJN- uo 1
I
Prog mming of user-cycks
*
re NC-programs in which variable program data are programmed via O-parameters (see Operating,Manual).
of user-cycles within the NC-program marnon/ is performed with program numbers 99999968 to 99999999
re tested in the NC-program memory and can be subsequently assigned to an EPROM. This is carried out by
EPROM is especialfv important if YOUdo not wish to reserve program memory for user cycles. The PLC EPROM
32 different user cycles with a total of 2100 program ,blocks.
A maximum f 100 customer-specific dialogue texts for the cycle description and entry parameters can be stored in the
control.
via CYCL CALL or with the cycle definition CYCL DEF. This is determined during compila-
ser-cycle with CYCL DEF in only performed if a standard cycle is to be called via CYCL CALL within a user-cycle.
can be specified via the “dialogue block”.

cycle description and the remaining numbers define the corresponding dialogue questions for
as with the permanently stored HEIDENHAIN canned cycles

displayed by cycle numbers 88 to 99 (cycle selection via CYCL-DEF).
8lockwfse mode with simultaneous machining, application of user-n/cles is not possible, since the correspond-
Iaaua sacuon Bee

~’ Nov mber 21.89 u-f-e Ul 1
of user-
the “dialogue block”
the ‘dialogue block” is only possible with program numbers 99999968 to 99999999.
of the necessary plain language dialogues, two possibilities are offered:
Call-up of user-cycle via CYCL DEF

: Call-up of user-cycle via CYCL CALL
After dialogu initiation for the definition of plain language dialogues using the mend -keys. the following dialogue
question is ‘splayed:
a
DLQ-CALL = NO ENT
the “DLG-DEF”- or “DLG-CALr-block is programmed.
-DEF” and “DLG-CALL” user-cycles can be dontained in a main program, Q-parameters for the dialogues
rn separate Q-address locations.
Q-paramater numbers for “DLQ-DEP and “DLQ-CALL*-block

EntrY range: 0 .50
-numbers for the “DLG-DEF” and the “DLG-CALL”-blocks.
LL”-block are assigned to program parameters Ql to 014. With the ‘DLG-DEF”-block the
a Q-paramaters Q (1 + MP 263) to 0 (14 + MP 283).
e in machine parameter 263 = 50. the cycle parameters (of a cycle with “DLG-DEF’) are assigned to the
eters as follows:
Fourteenth CJ,cle parameter = Q 64
IUlKl Semtlon mle

U8U-GplW
April 4, 89 Ul 2
mming of user~b
ue language for user-cycles
As with stan ard dialogues. user-cycles can also be displayed in two languages
The antsy val e for machine parameter MP 259 is added to the dialogue number of the original language. The English text of
the appropri 4 e dialogue is stored under this dialogue number.
MP 268 Language swItchover for user-oydsr

Entry range: 0 50
Entry value A difference between Q-number of second (English) and first dialogue language.
to whether original or English dialogue - automatically takes place simultaneously to the selection of the plain
dialogue via machine parameter MP 92.
Entry value in MP 259: 50
Dialogues for user-cycle “Bolt hola circle’
0 Bok hole ci cle

1 Number of holes
2
t
FVog mming of user-
Hints or compiling user-cycles
are still stored within the NC-program memory can also be recalled via PGM-call. For testing, the operating
lock” is also possible.
L all Cl-parameters are globally effective).
d within an existing user-cycle. Max. four nesting levels are permitted.
n with spsdsl aignifksncs for uesr-cydw
simplify the compilation of user-cycles:
Tool radius last called

Currant tool axis
M-function last output for spindle rotating direction
Coolant on/off was programmed
Stepover factor for pocket milling (entry value from machine parameter MP 93)
Program contains mm or inch-data.
iptions of these Q-parameters can be found in the Operating Manual.
are stored as Q-parameters (see Operating Manual). Wiihin a user-cycle calculations may Lx?
After a return jump into the main program, the original entry values are again valid i.e..
can be altered localty.
MP 282 Olobsl a-psrsmsten
Entry range: b 50
ber of globally effective O-parameters can be defined by MP 262. “Globally effective” means that the contents
are transferred from the program being called to the user-cycle and altered if required. These altered
the program being called after completion of the user-cycle and can be altered or used as required.
40 is entered for MP 262. the Q-parameters CBO” 099 are global.
- Program rt repeats
Program rt repeats cannot be executed in user-cycles which have been stored within the EPROM.
Program art repeats can, however, be easily programmed via Q-parameters (see following example “Bolt Hole Circle’)
”
- Program II-ups
Program II-ups via PGM-CALL are not permitted within user-cycles,
- @cle 14 ” ontour”
Cycle 14 ” ontour” must be defined within the main program,
must be located within the main program or within the central tool file
, the programming of functions which interrupt the cycle sequence is not permltted. e.g. M-functions or tool
rminate the cycle.
Urr-cyclsr
mming of user-cydes
dialogues
dialogues texts for the cycle description and the entry parameters are stored in the PLC-EPROM:
USER CYCL
CYCL PARAMETER 1
CXL PARAMEFR 2
bialogue No. 14 CYCL PARAMETER14
Instead of th se standard dialogues. HEIDENHAIN can store up to 100 different customer-specific dialogues in the
PLC-EPROM.
-t ISSUCA Section me
Urr-oyob8
pril 4, 89 Ul 5
4
Exam1Iple for a user-cycle
The followin user-cycle serves as an example. This cycle is not stored within the control.
The user-cy a 68 -Bolt hole circle” requires the following entn/ parameters:
r-
Cl1 = Number of holes

Q2 = Radius of pitch circle
Q3 = X-coordinate for pitch circle centre
Q4 = Y-coordinate for pitch circle centre
Cl5 = Set-up clearance for Z-axis
Cl6 = Drilling depth in Z-axis
07 = Feed rate for drilling
-t
The first holle of the pitch circle is located on the W-axis of the X-Y-coordinate system. The variable parameter program which
is stored deNri I 9s the hole spacing from the total number of holes and executes machining.
Program e: lmple for the user-n/de “Bolt hole ciroie”
0 BEGIN F V 99999968 MM P Parameter program for user-cycle 68

1 DLG-CA ~0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/ I I I “Bolt hole circle’ (if stored within the EPROM”
2FNl :C =+Q6++Q5 of the control, display on the VDU is not
3FN4:C 3 = +360.000 DIV +a possible).
4FNO:C 0 = +o.ooo
5ccx+1 3 Y+Q4
6 LBL 11
7LPPR+ !2 PA+QGO RO F2999BM
BLIZ+C RO FQ7 M
9LIZ-c RO F29998 M
1OFN 1 :C D=+060++050
11 FN 12: +060 LT +361.000 GOT0 LBL 11
12 END PG 99999968 MM P
For the use, vcle “Bolt hole circla”. the following dialogues must be stored within the EPROM:
Dialogue Nc3. 0 BOLT HOLE CIRCLE

Dialogue Nc,. 1 NUMBER OF HOLES
Dialogue Nc>. 2 RADIUS
Dialogue Nc1. 3 X-COORDINATE
Dialogue Nc1. 4 Y-COORDINATE
Dialogue Nc1. 5 SET-UP CLEARANCE
Dialogue Nc1. 6 TOTAL HOLE DEPTH
Dialogue Nc1. 7 FEED RATE
I
Iseue Section ble
Ueer-cyolee u2 1
pril 4, 89
Example for a user-cycle
Programming of a user-cycle within the NC-program
1 mem Vy
Operethg mode
Dialogue inttlatlon
Pl?OQl?& NUMBER = Key II-Iprogram number between 99999969 and 99999999.

b0 -’
Enter into memory.

1
/lNCH=NOENT for dimensions in mm
for dimensions in inches

ii
Dialogue initiation for opening dialogues required for

0 BEDIt PQM 9999SS68
the cycle.
1 ENDPGM @SD99968
Cycle designation for DLG-DEF
Cycle designation for DLG-CALL
Second dialogue number: Cycle parameter Ql
Third dialogue number: Cycle parameter Q2
Up to 16 dialogues (O-99) can be defined.

etc.
Irue Seotlon pfw

Usmcyclos
April 4. 99 u2 2
Exadple for a user-cycks
of user-cycles for programming a
User-cycles re output in binary with the PLC-program (output of PLC-program. see PLC-description).
Data is outp t in the following sequence:

.PLC-progrs
.Macro-progr ms
.Dialogue te s
(for PLC-erro massages and user-cycles)
.User-cycles
After output f the dialogue texts, the following dialogue is displayed:
i
ML PROQRAMS ?
ms are to be read-out: Ail user-cycles within the EPROM and RAM

are output. lf a cycle within the EPROM has the
same number within the RAM, the cycle within
the RAM is output.
in programs are to be
Set cursor to desired cycle number
menue, only those programs Transfer selected cycle to data medium.

are stored within the
-ENl/END=NOENl
The curs r is set to the next cycle

number. 4
Should dz ta output from the EPROM The control finally reads-out the user-cycles
be completed: from the RAM.
PLC-E 1lllNQ FUNCTION

The contr I returns to the mode PLC-EDITINGFUNCTION
P
issue UWHWClOS
Section
April 4. 99 u2 7
User-/cycles within a machining program
CYCI. Dl
NUMBE IF HOLES Kay-in number of holes.
L Enter into rnamoly.
RADIUS Key-in pitch circle radius.
I-
X-COOF UATE Kay-in X-coordinate for pitch circle cantre.
L Enter into memory.
Y-COOF UATE Kay-in Y-coordinate for pitch circle cantra.
I- Enter into memory.
SEr-UP EARANCE Kay-in sat-up clearance.
Key-in appropriate sign.
l- Enter into mamoly.
TOTAL I LE DEPTH Kay-in hole depth.
Kay-in appropriate sign.
Enter into memory
FEED RI Kay-in feed rate for drilling.
Enter into memory
Ieeue SectIon mt@

ueer-oyoIee u3 1
lril 4. 89
I
The cycle definition requires 4 program blocks:

Cl1 = Number of holes
a2 = Radius
Q3 = X-coordinate for pitch circle centre
Q4 = Y-coordinate for pitch circle centre
QS = Set-up clearance
Q6 = Hole depth
Q7 = Feed rate for drilling
INO using the code “Bolt Hole Ckld
Blank form definition
Tool definition
Tool call-up
Cycle definition: “Bolt hole circle”
9 CYCL >EF 68.2 Q4 - + 60.000 Q6 = - 2.000 00 = - 20.000
9 CYCL >EF 68.3 07 = + 100.000
10 CYCL 1cal.L M cycle call
11 END P3M loo0 MM
Irue Ssotlon
UWr-k?YCkd
.hpril 4. 99 u3
,~ .,,
Contc its
Section ‘age
3tandmd di hterface RS-232-CN.24 Dl 1
Switchover < IE-FE-EXT transfer modes Dl 2
Floppy disc FE 401 Dl 3

Connecting ( le and adapters for RS-232~C/V.24 Dl 4
Characters fi xternal programming and transmission protocol Dl 5
Machine par aters for data transmission in MT-mode Dl 6
External prq nming Dl 8
Tinnefef bl cwlw- D2
Transfer blo lise’ with FE 401 and the IBM-K D2
Transfer blo dse’ via W-mode D2
Data protect with 9CC D2
Machine par stem for ;Transfar blockwise’ in m-mode D2

Protocol for nsfer blockwise’ in m-mode D2
Overview of ltrol characters in the various operating modes D2
Graphlee pm .OUt D3
Iwue Date I- RS-232-CN.24

3wtkm me
lril 4. 89 DO 1
Stan&d data interface IV&232-C/f/.24
data interface RS-232-QV.24
or data can be loaded down from the control memory to an external storage unit such as e
unit, floppy disc unit or another peripheral unit e.g. a printer.
is also possible from the peripheral unit into the control.
via the RS-232~Q’V.24 interlace of the TNC 355:
(ME-operation, FE-operation or operation with another peripheral unit) must be set before
ction are possible:
ACKDJAK-protocol
ng machining programs which are normally compiled externally
disc unit FE 401 can be employed. It is recommended to usa a

rating system. in order that the computer oan cam/ out other tasks while linked to one or several TNC 356-
hoet computer requirea an wpedaliy camplled wftwam In order execute data tmnefer to and from
of the matrix via the machine parameters of TNC 366 as per the instruction manual of the
ing connected. Detailed description sheet D3/l,
Issue hction me
Dete intdeoo R&232~WV.24
April 4, 89 Dl 1
Stand rd data interface RS-232-C/V.24
Switch ver of ME-FE-EXT transfer modes
ion. the TNC 355 can be stitched to the following 3 operating modes via the MOD-key:
ion of the HEIDENHAIN magnetic tape units ME lOl/ME 102.

mat and the Baud rate 2400 have been adapted to the ME.
ction of the HEIDENHAIN floppy disc unit FE 401 end the IBM-EC.”
smission, such as read-in, read-out or transfer blockwfse is performed via a special protocol for data
n. Data format and Baud rate 9600 are adapted to the FE.
tion of transmission to other peripheral units in standard data format as well as in transfer blockwise.
ce for data transmission is adapted via machine parameters and the Baud rate is freely selectable.
rix printer for graphics print-out
mode ME-FE-EXT by pressing MOD-key
several times until the mode RS-232~C/V.24-INTERFACEwith display ME, FE or EXT appears,
til desired mode is displayed.
a the Baud rate h set as follows:
repeatedly until BAUD-RATE is displayed.

for Baud rate (possible values: 110.160. 300. 600. 1200, 2400,4800, 9600 Baud).
ontrol automatically switches to the EXT-mode, regardless of the mode which has already been
Note: Leave a xiliary mode m by pressing m.
itrue Section me
Data Intwfece RS-232~WV.24 Dl
April 4. 89 2
Standard data interface RS-232~C/V.24
Floppy disc unit FE 401
FE 401 - pattable floppy disc unit for data storage.
With very long programs, which exceed the memory capacity of the control, “transfer blockwise* is possible with
SlmultaneOuS program run.
A further advantage against the magnetic tape units ME lOliME 102 is the greater storage capacity For example. up to
256 programs with a total of approx. 25000 program blocks can be stored. This corresponds to a storage capacity of approx.
790 ItBytes.
Moreover, the FE 401 is equipped with 2 disc drives for the copying of disc information.
Issue Section Page

Oats interface RS-232~CN.24
Apn 4. 89 Dl 3
interface RS-232-C/v.24
cables for RS-232-C/V.24
LE 55 Cable RS-232~CN.24/LE RS-23%C/V.24 adapter block Data transmission cable FE 401

3 Id.-Nr. 239760 Id.-Nr. 23975801 Id.-Nr. 24286901 ME 101
- -4
GND
EE
DSR
GND
SR 20 DTR
w Length max. 17 m/55 ft Length 3 m/l0 ft
For RS-232-C/V.24 data transmission with

DCl/DC&protocol. a simple wiring layout of
the data transmission cable is sufficient.
s s2c
DTR
Lw20
u
cabk between Is5 366 and RS-232~CN.24 adnpter
2-C-V.24 adapter block (Id.-Nr. 23976O.J the data lines and control lines are
the layout conforms to the data transmission unit.
the cable between the LE 355 and the RS-232~C/V.24 adapter, the layout at the
Terminal Unit. The external units can. therefore. be connected by the standard
Id.-Nr. 24286901).
AIaeue
pril 4. 89 I Data interface RI232~CN.24
SWth
Dl I
me
4
Standard data interface ,RS-232~WV.24
for external programming and
protocol
Data transmis and control via the RS-232-C/V.24 interface is governed by ASCII-characters. The following table indicates
the character
coda m coda
Character DEC BINARY Character DEC BINARY Chfaaotar DEC BINARY
NUL 000 0000000 ' 0101100 x 088 1011000
SOH 001 0000001 - iii 0101101 Y ii: 1011001
3-X 002 0000010 E 0101110 2 1011010
ETX 003 0000011 / 0101111 [ 091 1011011
EOT 004 0000100 0 E 011owo 092 1011100
ENQ 005 0000101 1 0110001 ] 093 1011101
ACK 006 0000110 2 050 01 IWIO 094 1011110
EEL 007 0000111 3 051 0110011 - 095 1011111
8s 008 0001000 4 052 0110100 ' 096 1100000
F 010
009 0001010
0001001 56 053
054 0110101
0110110 eb 097
098 1100001
1100010
% 037 0100101 Q 081 1010001 125 1111101

8 038 0100110 R 082 1010010 DEL 127 1111111
039 0100111 s 063 1010011
Issue
pril 4. 89 I DataintufaceRS-232~WV.24
SectIOn
Dl
ma
5
ard data interface FBZ32-C/V.24
e parameter for data transmission in EXT-mode
mode de& intarfaoo RS-232-C/v.24
determines the operating mode of the RS-232~C/V.24 data interface.
g mode “Standard data interface”, machine parameters MP 216 to MP 221 and MP 224 (see sheet D2/5) are
standard data interface is only being used, 0 can be entered for this machine parameter.
MP 71 hamctem for program baginning and and

efine entry value as follows: 0 65536
F
r 71 the ASCII-character code (see sheet Dl/6) for -program end’ and “program beginning” is defined for
mming. ASCII-characters 1 - 47 are acceptable.
The character for “program end” is transmitted in all cases regardless of whether a “standard data interface” or Transfer
blockwise’ is eing used. The character for “Program beginning’ is only transmitted in Transfer blockwise’.
Determinatio of entry value:
Example: Program end: FfX BINARY code 00ooo011

f Program beginning: STX BINARY code 00000010
wto-7 7 9 6 4 3 2 1 0
Value 126 64 32 16 6 4 2 1
Insert 0 or 1 as appropriate 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Bit8- 15 16 14 13 12 11 10 a 8
Value 32769 16394 6192 4096 2049 1024 512 256
Entn/ value: 1
2
+ 512
515
The entry val for machine parameter 71 is therefore 516.
mmeter with multiple funotion

hnal character
either a decimal comma or a decimal point for numerical values. When reading-in,
alters for the position display (see sheet Q/7).
l&um Section page

pril 4, 89
Data intufaae~ RS232-ClQ.24 Dl 6
rd data interface RS,-232~WV.24
e parameters for data transmission in EXT-mode
ines the data format. Bit 1 is only significant for “Transfer block-wise’
r the standard data interface.
Farema
Entry value
No.
Data format a d transmwron stop 222
* Bit
---A---- --
0 + 0 A 7 data biis (ASCII-code with Brh bn = parity)
+ 1 4 8 data bits (ASCII-code with 8’” bit = 0.
-- !P bii = periky)” +
--- ------_- --
Block Check Character 1 + 0 p BCC at randoms’
+ 2 p BCCnot control characters1 +
--- -- .----- -- --
Transmission stop through RTS“’ 2 + 0 p Inactive
+ 4pActive +
-- --- .---- --- --
Transmission stop through DC3 3 + 0 p Inactive
+ BpActive +
-- .--- ---__ --
4 + 0 p Even
+ 18ADdd +
.-----_- --
5 + 0 p Not required
+ 32 p Required +
.- -- ---_ --
‘Numbertop= - - 617 7 If3
Y--r
00 0b 12 l/2 stop bits
1 stoo bit
I I I 1 stop bit
Setting of bit 6: + 64 +
Setting of Bii 7: + 128 +
I Entrv value
be allocated with any random or control character.
the BCC with “Transfer blockwise’ results in a number less than 20 HEX (control character), a character
is transmitted before ETB. This ensures that the BCC is always greater than 20 ,HEXand therefore not a
switches the RTS-output to 0 V, the output DTR is simultaneously switched to 0 V (connected to the
the peripheral unit). If the DSR-input of the peripheral unit is not allowed to be switched to 0 V during data
, a logical “r should be circuited to DSR via a bridge connection.
a dotamhation of the entry value
Bite-7 7 6 6 4 3 2 1 0
Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Calculated a,nt+ value for parameter 222: 168
leeue hotion hoe

AL
ril 4, 89 I
Date interfr~~~ RS-232-CN.24
Dl I 7
rd data interface RS-232~C/V.24
programming
A few hints d external programming
.A program must begin with the characters CR LF or LF or CR FF or FF”
.The and of the “program end”-block must finish with CR LF or CR FF or FF and additionally EXT (control C) or instead of EXT a
character entered with machine parameter 71”.
Spaces between individual words may be left out
.Zeros after the decimal comma may be left out.
.When reading-in ISO-blocks. the “*‘-character at the end of the block is unnecessary.
.When reading-out ISO-blocks, the “*‘-character is not output by the control.
.When reading-in NC-programs, comments which are marked with “a” or “:” are overread.
A compilation of block formats for TNC 355 is available from HEIDENHAIN.
Issue SectInn paw

Data Intuface W&232-WV.24
April 4. 89 Dl 9
I
Transfer blockwise
interface machining programs can be transferred from an external storage unit or the FE-unit and executed.
ed in the PROGRAM RUN-mode with “transfer blockwlse’ and permits the execution of machining programs
capacity of the control memory.
The data inte ace can be programmed via machine parameters. The RS-232-C/V.24 interface of the TNC must be adapted to
either axtemal or FE-operation1
”
-key in the operating mode single block/automatic program run, data transmission can be started from an
it. The control stores the program blocks in the storage space which is available and interrupts data
the vacant storage space is exceeded.
discontinues to show program blocks until either the available storage space is full or the complete
are not being displayed. program run can be started via the external @-button.
only short program blocks are executed when working with an external storage unit. In order to avoid
of program run after start, a substantial number of program blocks should be stored as a buffer.
dvantageous to wait until the available storage space is full.
After start, the executed blocks are erased and further blocks are continually called-up from the external store.
Isule Data interface R2-232-WV.24

SOOtlOll
April 4, 99 cl2 p90”
using the HEIDENHAIN
disc unit FE 401 and the IBM-PC
the RS-232GV.24~interface is automatically adapted to the FE 401. regardless of the machine

have been programmed. Mode selection is initiated by the MOD-function.
from HEIDENHAIN blockwise transfer to end from en IBM-PC is possible; also from the PC to FE 401
ileble from HEIDENHAIN.
Ieeue
JA
pfil 4, 99 I Data interface RS-292-CPJ.24
Section
D2
me
2
transfer
blockwise” via EXT-mode
ected to the external computer via the RS-232~QV.24 data interface in the operating mode “W. Control
mputer link-up are specified by machine parameters.
ion can be started from the TNC 355. After starting, the control transmits a heading block to the external
contains the program number and infomlation specifying whether transmission is to be from
vice-versa. Transmission of this heading block is followed by the machining program,
ich has been transferred, is checked by e “block check character BCC”. This is an important check procedure
blockwise’ mode, since there are no further checks of the machining program possible between data
d program execution.
ram block has been recognized as error-free, the next block is called up. An erroneous block has to be
are read into a buffer memory in the TNC 355. and can be executed from this memory During program
blocks are deleted and new blocks replenish the memory
wing operation, without interruptions is therefore possible.
II-characters are used for control of data transmission (as per ISD R 646):
eading, Binary code 0000001

data transfer heading: a character sequence which contains the program number end the information “data
t’. Data check for the heading commences with the,character SOH (see sheet D2/4).
Binary code 0000010

ginning of a program block. Block protection for the text (BCC) commences with STX.
nsmission Block, Binary code 0010111

nsmission block. The character following ETB is for data check (BCC).
e, Binary code 0000110

the receiving station to confirm that the data block was transmitted error-free.
detected for a data block.
nsmission. Binary code 0000100

nsmission. This character is transmitted by the TNC 355 to the external computer et the end of e program
event of an error.
CII-characters (substitute characters) with decimal code from 1 to 47 may substitute the above
Further control characters, which cannot lx replaced by machine parameters:
DCl P Start d ta transmission (Device Control 1). Binary code 00010001

M-starts da transmission.
DC3 L lnterru t data transmission (Device Control 3). Binary code 00010011
DC3 interrupts/ data transmission.
AIs6uo I
oril 4. 89
Data intetfaw RS-232-ClV.24
section
D2
me
3
with “Block Check Character BE”
program execution requires date check procedures (IS0 1166 and IS.0 2111).For this
blockwise’ mode of the TNC 356, a perky check of the complete transmitted block (length perky)
addition to the perky check of the individual characters (cross pa@). This is performed wfth the ‘Block Check
, which completes the individual biis of the transmitted character of a data block for an even length parity
block. the control checks data trensmission via the BCC. For this, the TNC 356 generates a BCC and
th the BCC being received. If the generated BCC and the received BCC are identical, the control signals ACK to
not identical. the control signals NAK. and the block muat be re-transmitted to the peripheral unit. This
3 times and the following error message is then displayed:
With data out ut the control can transmit a BCC to the peripheral unit. The TNC 365 then waits for the signal NAK or ACK
from the peri eral unit. If the peripheral unit transmits ACK. the next program bbck is transmitted.
If, however, th peripheral unit transmits NM. the program block is repaated. The control repeats the same block up to
3 times. If the peripheral unit transmits NAK each time, the following error message is displayed:
f
a ISSUO
pril 4. 89 I Data intaface RS-PSQV.24
I-I D2
m@
4
I ,.
Tmns w blockwise
Mach e parameters for ,,lansfer blockwise” in EXT-mode
The determil on of entry values is described under parameter 71 (see sheet Dl/6).
FUllCtiOll Entlyvsl~for:
0 7 ETX or random ASCII-character. Character for program end. ETX end SlX
8 .._ 15 STX or random ASCII-character. Character for program 515
beginning.
218 H or random ASCII-character. Transmitted within heeding H and E:
block for data Input before program number. 17736
E or random ASCII-character. Transmitted within heading
block for data Input after ororxam number.
H or random ASCII-character. Transmitted within heading H and A:
block for date output before program number. 16712
A or random ASCII-character. Transmitted within heading
block for data output after program number.
220 ET8 or substitute character (decimal code 1 - 47) Ff8 and SOH:
is transmitted at the end of the hoadlng block. 279
SOH or substitute character (decimal code 1 - 47)
is transmitted at the bogInning of the hssdlng block.
221 ACK or substitute character (decimal code 1 - 47) ACK and NAK:
positive acknowledgement is transmitted when data block 5382
is received as wwect.
8 _.. 15 NAK or substitute character (decimal code 1 - 47)
negative acknowledgement is transmited when data block
is received as ermnwue.
224 0...7 EOT or substitute character (decimal code 1 - 47) EOT:
is transmitted at end of data transmission. 4
Issue
Data interfaoe RS-232~WV.24 Section page
rril 4. 89 D2 5
LCCKWISE in SINQLE BLDWAUTOMATIC PRDQBAM RUN
.z
data transmis ion from the peripheral unit to tt MC 355 is
Dotafmm
lNc+
rformed as follows:
Datofrom
sham1
Romorke
er and enter into
SOH Control transmits SOH

(Beginning of heading block)
H H = Beginning of program number
Program The program number may have
No. I 1 - B diaits”
E E = Control waits for data input
ETB ETB = End of Transmission Block
Bee BCC is generated between SOH and ETB
Del DCI = Start data transmission
ACK or The peripheral unit transmits
NAK ACK = Data transmission correct
NAK = Data transmission erroneous.
Repeat heading
six The peripheral unit transmits SlX
(Start of text)
Block Text The first program block is transmitted
ErB ETB = End of Transmission Block
BCC BCC is generated between SlX and ErB
ACK or The control transmits
NAK ACK = Data transmission correct,
next block
NAK = Data transmission erroneous.
Repeat block
ST% The second program block is transmitted
Block Text
ETB
BCC
ACK or
NAK
etc.
EOT u
Fleaee note:
CR. LF at prog am beginning and CR. LF or LF or FF after every block are not required for Transfer blockwise-. This function is
carried out by he control character.
F
P! ISWe
pril 4. 89 I Data htetfaw BB-232-CtV.24
Sootion
D2 7
I
Tmn er blockwise
% w of control characters in various modes
Over-vi
Program inp bt from a peripheral unit into the lNC 386
The lNC trahrmtte the following heading b4ock for Block format Roemm PromlNCat
actbeth of entry: end endof
“Read-in sele(tited .:Program director”

‘program” Read-in all programs’
.Tansfer bloc wise” in :“Read-in program
single block/aJtomatic offered
oroaram
- run /
SOH/H/E/ETB/BC’JDCl SWBlock text/ETB/BBC Erx EOT
(control transmits NAK
or ACK after every block)
Rosmm 4 ut from the lNC 366 to peripheral unit
The lNC transmit8 the Mowing heading block Bbck ionnat Roeram
before every program: end
SOH/H/Progrsm NoJAjETB/BCC/DCl SlWBlock text/ETB/BCC El-%
(Program No. max. B digits) (control waits for NAK or
ACK after every block)”
Heading bl k for error messagea from peripheral unit to TNC 3SB
SOH/error mebsage/ETB/BCC (the error massage may contain up to 32 characters).
I Date interfaoe RS-232-CN.24

section
D2
page
7
Graphiics printout
matrix printer can be connected to the RS-232~C/V.24 port of the TNC 355.
he matrix printer is performed via MP 226 to MP 233. Web the aid of MP 226 to MP 229 the
ansmitted prior to each print-out are determined. MP 230 to MP 233 determines the ASCII-
ikted to the printer before each line.
characters which is transmitted before each image, is determined. This entry is

control characters are defined by the ASCII-table.
n befare each line
8 - 15 the number of control characters which is transmitted before each line is determined. This entry is
All subsequent control characters are defined by the ASCII-table.
e following sequence: Firstly the information of bits 8 - 15 and then the
graphics image. the control automaticatly switches to 8 data bits

the printer 11 OMNI 800 mdol880 XL
Pammater Bit FUnction 8ntry valuae

No. tOK
226 8- 15 Number of control characters from the control for setting 3 and ESC:
the printer interface (binary) 795
o-7 Control character
227 8 - 15 Control characters A and 8:
o-7 Number of points/tine spacing (binary) 16648
228 8 - 15 unassigned 0
o-7
I- I I
o-7
230 8 - 15 Number of control characters from the control before 5 and LF:
each printer line (binary) 1290
o-7 Line feed
231 8 - 15 Control character ESC and N:
o-7 Control character 6990
232 8 - 15 Number of points per line 512:
o-7 2
o-7
For MP 222 enter value 169 and for MP 223 enter value 0.
Setting the &de switch Connactlng cable for 11-Matdx prlnte~

The TI-Matrix printer is equipped with a code switch,
The following Stitch settings are required for graphics RS-232~QV.24 Adapter output TlIpr;r input
printout: 25-pole
1 1 CHASSIS GND
Switch setting 1 on 8 bit data format 19 SIGNAL GND
Switch setting 2 off Line shift non-automatic ; DSR
20 ii DTR
Switch setting 3 off 2 TXD
16
Switch setting 4 on Letter set German CTS
Switch setting 5 on RXD
: i;
Switch setting 6 on
Switch setting 7 on 9600 Baud
Swftch setting 8 off
leeue sactlon me
Data intariam R8-232-CN.24
ril 4. 89 D3 1
Graplr cs printout
EPSON matrix printers
Entry valw #r machine parametam
Entry value
222 169
223 0
226 795
227 13080
228 0
229 0
230 1805
231 2587
232 10757
233 2
-
Setting tha do awitchea

The EPSON r !rix printer is equipped with four code switches. Two ere located on the basis PCB end two on the interface
KB. The folk ing settings are required for graphics printout:
n the basis PCB
ON
n the Intafaw PCB
ON ON
. EPSON printer
&232-C/V.: Adapter output EPSON input

25.pole 25-pole
1 1 GND
2 3 im
-
3 2 RXD
4 RTS
57 CTS
6 20 DSR
7 GND
8f
20 ---LH DTR
.
Ieeue Bsctlcn pago

Data interfam BS-23%CN.24
lril 4. 89 D3 2
Conte ts
Section I‘age
t Pl 1
Pmgmmmin of the HEIDENHAIN PLC P2 1
Description of the PLC-commands P2 1

No operadon: NOP P2 2
AND-command: U P2 2
AND-command with inverted operand: UN P2 2
OR-command: 0 P2 3
OR-command with inverted operand: ON P2 3
Exdusiw OR-command: X0 P2 3
Eud”si”e OR-command with inverted o,,emnd: XON P2 4
Programming of logic sequences P2 5

Logic sequences with U-commands P2 5
Lwic sequences with UN-commands P2 6
Logic sequences with O-commands P2 7
Logic SB~U~~CBS
with ON-commands P2 8
Logic sequences with XO/XON-commands P2 9
Programming of an arbiirary logic sequence P2 10
Setting end resetting of a marker P2 11
Address ded~nations for markers, them, oounten. PLGlnpute, PLC-outputa P3 1
Dawttptlon dt the mattme P3 2
Markers for ares X. Y, 2. IV P3 2

Axis release P3 2
Axes in position P3 3
Standstill supewision P3 3
Traversing of axes !?3 3
Traverse direction P3 3
Opening the control loop P3 4
Transfer of actual to nominal positions P3 5
Current fool axis P3 5
Traverse-dependent lubrication P3 6
PLC-positioning P3 7
Markers for N-S-T code outputs P3 9

Coded M-S-T code ouf~uts P3 9.
Decoded M-code output P3 11
Markers for s indle speed P3 13

Analague output of spindle speed ?3 13
Coded output of spindle speed P3 16
Cont nts
Section Page
Markers for C-keys P3 17
Operating mode-code P3 17
Decoded operating mode-code P3 17
Currentiy whated axi* key:X. Y. Z. N P3 18
Code ‘or external selection of TNC-keys P3 18
Markersfor inhibiting TNC-keys P3 20
Markers for ternal buttons and switches P3 22

Screen diq 3 P3 24
Markers for error messages P3 24
Markers for user-p~ra,w,ers P3 26
Markers for status displays and other dialogues P3 27
Markers for control stafus P3 28
Markers for 3transfer of numerical values P3 29
Markers for 3touch probe systems TS 1lVTS 120/F, 511 P3 31
Markers for tivating jog positioning P3 32
Markers for termining axis sequence upon approaching the reference marks P3 33
Markers for #itchingfrom X Y. or 2 axis to the 4’” axis P3 34
Markers for posing a percentage factor on the spindle voltage P3 3.5
Markers for ) transfer of a datum correction P3 36
Marker for ! tis P3 37
Markers for cds P3 38
Markers for ! ascending and descending edges of PLC-inputs P3 39
Markers for I first PLC-program cycle after switch-on or interruption of the PLC-program P3 40
Miscellanec markers P3 41
Markers aff ,d by machine parameters P3 42
Markers for ) activation of user-cycles P3 44
Markers for llchanger support P3 45
Macro-prog Iming P3 47
Markers for the c&up of macro-programs P3 47
Macro-prcgrams for the confml of tc&h.qers P3 48
Mechanical layout and functioning of o to&hanger P3 50
Extension
Ofthe PLC-memory P3 52
Co”“ten P3 53
nmers P3 55
Ieelm Section pace

N ~mbar21.89 -Duortptlon Pu 2
@rite ts
”
Section ‘age
PLC-mcdw 1 P4 1
Selection and exit of PLC-modes P4 1
PLC-editing m3de P4 2
Kqbosrd lbpd for PLC-programming P4 3
Key designations P4 4
ProgrammingFiC-commands P4 5
Call-upof a specific PLC-command P4 5
Sequmtial checkingof PLC-commands P4 6
Weting WC-commands P4 6
EntedngPLC-commandsinto an existing pmgnm P4 6
DeletingB PLC-program P4 7
TmnsferOf B Fit-program frcm EmOM to RAM stcmge P4 7
Input/output of PLC-pqmms on disc. magnetictape or printer .. P4 8
Binaryoutput of uw-c&s for compiling a FiC EFROM P4 9
PLC-trace moale ” P4 10
PLC-tables .E/&WT//M” P4 11
Off-line programming of the PLC P4 12

PLC-commandformat P4 12
PLC-operationcodes for PLC-commands P4 12
FLC-addmssesfor the PLC-commands P4 13
Addressallocationof RC-commands P4 13
Address&c&on for the PLC-EPROM P4 14
&chahge of C EPROM’s P5 1
for signal exchange belween PLC and NC P6 1
P7 1
P7 1
PLC-input801 input/output board PL 300 P7 2
P7 3
P7 4
P7 5
I !,
Isrue sectkul
PLC-Deeuiptlon
April 4. 89 Pu T
lntrodluction
The PLC (Pro rammable Logic Control) is a programmable interface for the control of signals between the machine tool and
the TNC.
For such cant 01a large number of logical combinations (PLC-commands) of inputs, outputs and markers may by necessary
These combi tions are achieved by the PLC-program.
This program as great flaxibilii and enables TNC controls to be fifed to a variety of machine tools,
The HEIDENH IN TNC 355 control has an integral PLC which gives the following advantages:
.The PLC-prog am can be entered via the keyboard of the control. no external programming station being necessary
.After the pro ramming of PLC-functions. an immediate test is possible.
.During machi e operation, error messages can be displayed on the screen of the control.
.The hardwareI for connecting the control to the machine is simplified.
A PLC-prcgra will. irrespective of length. cycle every 20 ms (with selection of th extra 1000 commands this increases to
22 ms. sea s eat P3/54).
This results in the inputs being interrogated and the outputs and markers being updated once every 20 ms (22 ms).
In the followi f sections, the PLC-commands, pre-assigned markers and PLC-operating modes are described in detail.
i hue Section
PLC-Desdption
ril 4. 99 Pl p9p”
‘mm&g of the HEIDENHAIN PLC
can consist of up to 3072 wmmantls. Each individual logic command combines two input values, of which
of the previous logic gate and the second is self-addressed with the logic command. Gates with inputs
are pbssible using a series string of multiple commands.
The following commands are programmable:
Command Abbmhtion
No Operation NOP
=
iN
1
:N
X0
Exclusive OR with negative operand (exclusive NOR) XON
Set marker or output if result of previous logic gate S
is logic “1”
Set marker or utput if result of previous logic gate SN
is logic “0
Reset marker r output if result of previous logic gate R
is “1” ,”
Reset marker r output if result of previous logic gate RN
0
is “0
ISSUS SWtiOll page

PLC-Dewripuon ‘i
April 4. 89 PZ 1
Prog ‘mming of the HEIBENHAIN PLC
Descri% tion of the PLC-commands
No Opmtio : NOP
No Operation 1 esignates an empty memory location in the command memory
Every memo4 location in the command memory which is not occupied by another command. functions as a NOP-command.
Command Abbmviatlon
No operation ~ 1 NOP
Aeaignmenti=
The preceding logic circuit is assigned to a marker or output: a logic sequence is interrupted.
Command Abbmvletlon PLC-Pmgnm

Assignment ~ = U El
U E2
= M30
d: U
the U-command. two input variables can be gated according to the logical AND-function.
The first input variable is

either
the logic resul/ of an immediately preceding gating operation (U, UN, 0. ON, X0. XON)
Or
logic “1” in th event of an immediately preceding operatjon being S, SN. R. RN or =.
Ei
The second input variable is self-addressed with the U-command.
Command Abbreviation svmm PIGProgram

AND ~ U Preceding result U E27
a
E27 II
AND-comma d with inverted operand: UN

With the aid 6f the UN-command, two input variables can be gated according to the logical AND-function.
;II;~~ input~variable is
the logic resull of an immediately preceding gating operation (U. UN. 0. ON: X0. XON)
Or
logic “1” in th event of an immediately preceding operation being S, SN, Ft. RN or =.
“i
The second inbut variable is self-addressed with the UN-command and imrerted.
Command ~ Abbreviation Symbol PLC-Program

AND with ! UN Preceding result UN El2
inverted ~ a
operand ~ El2 II
Seotion MP
Fuxb0dption P2 2
on the HEIDENHAIN PLC
tion of the PLC-commands
OR-wmman :o
Wiih the aid $ the O-command. two input variables can be gated according to the logical OR-function
z;fF inpti~variabla is
the logic resuI/ of an immediately preceding gating operation (U. UN, 0, ON, X0. XON)
!
pdsic “V in the event of an immediately preceding operation being S. SN, R, RN or =,
The second input variable is self-addressed with the O-command.
Command AbhtWkltiOll 1 svm~l 1 PLO-Program

OR IO 1 Precedina result n 1 0 E8
Okomman’ with hwerted operand: ON

Wiih the aid & the ON-command. two input variables can be gated accordingly to the logical OR-function.
Th;fF input variable is
Or
the logic resuij of an immediately preceding gating operation (U, UN. 0, ON, X0, XON)
logic “0” in th event of an immediately preceding operation being S. SN. R, RN or =,

i
The second in ut variable is self-addressed with the ON-command and Immrted.
Command ~ 1 Abbtwiation 1 svmbl 1 PLO-Pmgram

OR with ~ 1 ON 1 Precedina result n 1 ON El9
inverted ~
operand ~ - El,m
Exclurlve OR
With the aid o X0-command. two input variables can be gated according to the logical Exclusive OR-function.
The first input Ivariable is

either
Or n
the logic resu of an immediately preceding gating operation (U, UN, 0, ON, X0, XON)
logic “V in th event of an immediately preceding operation being S. SN. R, RN or =.

“,
The second in ut vanable IS self-addressed with the X0-command.
command ! Abbraviation lsvmbol 1 PLC+rogram

Exclusive OR ~ X0 1 Receding result n X0 El1
El1 --L1_1
Note:
An Exclusive R-function generates a logic “1” at the output, when only 0110input is set to logic “1”. If both inputs are logic
“1’ or logic “0?, the output generates a logic “0’.
Issue PLO-Owcriptlon sactlon mta

April 4. 89 P2 3
mming on the ~EIDENHAIN PLC
tion of the PLC-commands
Exclwi~ 0 -command with imwted operand: XON

Wiih the aid f the XON-command. two input variables can be gated according to the logical Exclusive NOR-function.
preceding gating operation (U. UN, 0. ON, X0, XON)
logic “0” in the event of an immediately preceding operation being S. SN. Ft. RN or =,
The second input variable is self-addressed with the XON-command and Iwrta~I.
command Abbrwintion Symbol PIGProgram

Exklusiv OR XON Preceding result XON El4
command wit 1 =l
inverted El4 II
operand
AIssue
oril 4. 89
PLC-Oescription
!hCtiOll
P2
of the HEIDENHAIN PLC
ming of logic sequences
The logic combends of the PLC can be arranged in chains to form a logic sequence.
Logic sequanc/es are interrupted by the PLC-commands: S. SN, Ft. RN or =: a new logic sequence begins after these
commands. ~
with Ucommnndo
U-commands effects a series switching of contacts. These contacts are normally open.
Qtiing-IoglC Ab- T 1Mhtable 1 Contact

1 El I2
I
UE2 ~
"I" El 0 0
a 0 1
=A1 ~ El E2 El-- Al 1 0
1 1
E2 Al f
b)
The lamp Ll is/ connected to the output 43 The relay Kl should energise, in the event of the contacts Sl.
The closing oflthe contacts Sl should result in the S2 and S3 closing simultaneously.
illumination of Ithe lamp. The contacts are connected to input
E27 of the PL$ PLC-program: U E28
U E29
PLC-program: iU E27 U E30
k A43 =A44
This PLC-progkm effects the following switching: The PLC-program effects a series switching of the contacts
! Sl, S2 and S3:
+2&v
t
Sl
\
52
\
53
K1
4.
I Ieeuo SectiOn
PLC-Dwcription
dpril 4, 89 P2
mming of the HEmAIN PLC
of logic sequences
with UN-commands
rice with UN-commands effects a series switching of contacts. These contacts are normally closed,
an AND gate with invened operands.
-0 Abhrmtbmd lhdh t&la ccntwt

rymbof El EC? Al axample
“1’ El 0 1
a :
El E2 II- Al 1 A :
1 1 0
E2 Al
ted from the truth table that this logic element is beheving es a NOR-function.
the mathematical rules governing Boolean algebra:
wxE=El E2
Examplea:
a) t bl
+2LV
I
+
The lamp L31 /should illuminate when the contact S14 is The relay K17 should only energise when all three contacts
opened. S7, S9 and S16 are open.
PLC-program:~UN El9 PLC-program: UN El 3
I= A53 UN E26
UN E83
= A56
This PLC-progkam effects the following stitching: This PLC-program effects the following switching:
t +2L”
51L
L31
lY---i
Iswe Sectlcn Paw
pril 4. 89 P2 6
mming of the H~EIlXWHA N PLC
with o-ocmmande
with O-commands effects a parallel switching of contacts. These contacts are normally open.
This corresponds to an OR-gate.
PLC-Pmgmm Oating-lo(liC lkuth table Contact

rFbol El E2 Al example
0 El “0 El 00 0
0 E2 21 0 1 1
=A1 El E2 n Al 10 1
1 1 1 E2
E2 Al
Examples: ’
a) b)
The relay K8 should energise when the contact SQ. S15. S21
or any combination thereof sre simultaneously closed.
PLC-program: 0 El 1
0 El8
0 E29
=A32
This effects the following switching: This PLC-program effects a parallel switching of contacts S9.
S15 and S21:
+ 24v
Ill
59 51s 521
ccl
T K8
sectbn
A ISSUO
pril 4. 89
PLC-Oeec*n P2
mming of the HBD~A~N PLC
with ON-commands
with ON-commands effects a parallel switching of contacts. These contacts are normally closed.
an OR-gate with inverted operand.
Qating-kgk Abbmvkted lhith table contect

rymbol El EZ Al example
“0 El n- 00 1
Zl 0 1 1
El E2 Al 10 1
11 0
E2 Al
from the truth table that this logic element is behaving as a NAND-function.
the rules governing the Boolean Algebra:
Examples: ’
a)
51L
El9
A33
L31
k
Lamp L31 sho/rld illuminate in the avant of contact S14 being The relay K14 should energise when contact S4, Sll, or both.
open. are open.
PLC-program: ION El9 PLC-program: ON E34

~= A53 ON E48
= Al7
This PLC-proglam effects the following stitching: This PLC-program effects the following switching:
t +2LV
su.
L3l
f-4
issue PLO-OssuipUon
Seotion
April 4, 89 P2
‘mming of the HEUXENHAIN PLC
n-iing of logic sequences
Logic aequen with XOIXON-commands

A logic seque ce with X0 or XON-commands can. for example, be used for a parity-check.
Example:
A 3 bit binary ‘” umber is to be checked for parity with the aid of a logic sequence consisting of X0-commands.
I
FtC-PrcgmmJ Oatha look lhth table
X0 El 1 I
= Al
38
T
The logic se,
I me produces a logic 7” for odd parity and a logic -0” for awn p&y.
The parity-cl 18Ic can also be carried out using a logic sequence consisting of XON-commands.
In
PLC-PmQrcl -I
4
Oeting IOQIC Wth table
XON El
XON E2
XON E3
= Al
I E3 Al 1
1
:1
1
01
1 lo
01
t
The logic sa,clwrice produces a logic ‘0” for odd parity and a logic “1” for even parity.
lrue
oril 4. 89
secucn
P2 I
ml@
9
mming of the HEbDEwtlmN PLC
Frogtnmmin of an arbitmly logic aequance

Arbitrary logic4 sequences may be assembled from various logic commands.
Example: U E27
01 El3
following switching:
1
” ”
E27
El3
E23
El8 A27
issue Secucn
PLC-Ducripticn
pril 4. 89 P2
mmhg of the Alhi PLC
and resetting of a marker
With the aid o the command S or SN. a marker can be set. dependent upon the preceding logic result.
With the aid o the command R or RN, a marker can be reset, dependent upon the preceding logic result.
FUnction Abbiwlnuon FLC-Frogram

Set marker or output S
if previous gat ng resuh / S t E.ilO
is “1 -cl S Ml5
Set maker or butwt I SN I n U El
if previous
__.. gat/ng ‘result 1 S U Ml1
IS .-u- I t-l SN Ml6
Reset marker br output I R U Ml0
if previous gat ng result R R Ml6
is “1 -cl
Reset marker or output RN U Ml1
if previous gat ng resuil R RN Ml5
is “0 cl
er
U E25
U M33
U M61
S M300
If input 25 an marker 33 and 61 are logic “1’. then marker 300 wil be stito “1”. In contrast to the = -functions, marker 300
remains set e en if the logic result in the next PLC-program cycle produces logic -0”. Normally the marker is reset by the
command R o RN.
”
b)
Resetting of a memory location
PLC-program: U El8
U E30
R M300
ISSWJ Saatbn mP
PIGDwatiption
ril 4. 89 P2 11
,,
designations for markers, timers, countars,
puts and PLC-outputs
AI#SU@
Drii 4. 89
PLC-Dewtiption
Section
P3
ption of the rmrkers
for axes X, Y, Z, IV
Markar No. 1 Function 1 signnl dimouon

2000 Enable axis X NC - PLC
2001 Enable axis Y
2002 Enable axis 2
2003 Enable axis IV
The markers fpr axis enable are set by the NC-part as follows:
I I I
NC supply switch-on:
clear the error message “MR IMMRWlED”
.PLC-supply switch-on
After PLC-supply switch-on the markers 2000 - 2003
(and marker 2016) are automatically set.
The axis enab markers remain set to 1” after the PLC-supply switch-on in order that the control holds the machine axe
closed loop.
Note:
The axis enab markers are reset if the control loop is opened from the PLC-part of the control (e.g. for axis clamping, I
sheet P3/4).
Iaslm Section mP
PLC-Daoliptlon P3 2
pril 4, 89
,. ,,.,, ,..
Desc ption of the markerrs
Marke” s for axes X, Y, Z, IV
Y, Z or N are moving and are not within the positioning-window: the corresponding markers are reset to
of the control (this also applies during the reference mark approach procedure).
ttion window tha eorrospalJdlng %ds In podtlon’ msrksr (M 2OQ2 to M 2011)

III superWon” taker (M 2884 to M 2667) IO set. II m ma&em
“ads In positIon” msdmr wlli mmain sat dsn the pa&km window Is
in position” is not set for contours which can be machined at a constant contouring speed
Waveming of ax88
Markor No. FUMtkMl Signal dim&ion
2128 X-axis traversing NC-PLC
2129 Y-axis traversing
2130 Z-axis traversing
2131 IV-axis traversing
lhveme d&ion
Function Signal dlradon
0 Traverse direction X+ NC - PLC
1 Traverse direction X-
2161 0 Traverse direction Y+
1 Traverse direction Y-
2162 0 Traverse direction Z+
1 Traverse direction Z-
2163 0 Traverse direction N +
1 Traverse direction N - I
Ie.aus Sactim ml0

PLC-Description 3
April 4. 89 I3
Description of the barkers
Marke Js for axes X, Y, Z, IV
opening the ~control loop
Marker No. Function Skmal dhction

2492 I Enable opening of control loop for the X-axis
2493 i Enable opening of control loop for the Y-axis
2494 ~ Enable opening of control loop for the Z-axis
2495 , Enable opening of control loop for the N-axis
254.4 Open X-axis control loop
2545
2646 I g::: ;I;;/,” ;:;;:I 1::;
2547 1 Open N-axis control loop
pen loop control (after a positioning procedure) generelh/ implies a longer delay in switching axes ovar. Since
unnecessary for machines with permanently activated live servo control loops, the marker “Enable control
2492 to 2496) has been made available. Only when these markers are set, does the NC-part of the control
signal “Open ocmtrol loop” (markan 2844 to 2S47). when the marker “Axis In Fwlth” (markers
the NC-part of the control has been set (see W&examples’).
out “Enable Opening of Cuntrol Loop’: the awttchlng over from one axh to anothr takes place as
be opened (e.g. for clamping of axes), the markers are set as follows:
I Set corresponding enable marker 2492 to 2495. I
I
The axis is in position (marker 2008 to marker 2011)
and the control loop should be opened: corresponding
markers 2544 to 2647 must be sat.
I
Control loop should be closed again: reset corresponding
markers 2544 to 2547.
Descr ption of the markers
Marke t s for axes X, Y, Z, IV
Markers for Iranafer of actual posltion values 831nominnl values (leach-in)
Marker No. Function Signal dlmotbn

2552 Teach-in for position loop X-axis PLC - NC
2553 , Teach-in for position loop Y-axis
2554 ~ Teach-in for position loop Z-axis
2555 i Teach-in for position loop N-axis
/
te markers 2552 to 2555 are set to logic 7”. the momentary actual position value is transformed into the
Nate:
The transfer oI actual position to nominal is possible only in manual mode or during an MST-strobe,
Currml tool Ids
Marker No. Function Signal direction

2100 ! X-axis is tool axis NC - PLC
2101 I Y-axis is tool axis
2102 1 Z-axis is tool axis
2103 , IV-axis is tool axis
The markes 2100 - 2103 correspond to the current tool axis defined by the Tool Call’ function
IWll8 Ssotkm me
PLC-Daeorlptlon
pril 4, 89 P3 5
Marke,s
t for axes X, Y, Z, IV
Tinverssde ndent lubrication pubs

4
Marker No. Function Slgnal dlrwtlon
2012 I Lubrication pulse necessary X. when traverse limit exceeded NC - PLC
2013 / Lubrication pulse necessary Y. when traverse limit exceeded
2014 Lubrication pulse necessary 2, when traverse limit exceeded
2015 Lubrication pulse necessan/ IV, when traverse limit exceeded
I
ction. after which a lubrication pulse-marker should be set, is specified for each axis as a machine parameter
159 to 162).
pm-units. i.a. to obtain the entry value, the required traversing distance in pm (microns) is to be divided by
Example: ~
Required trave/rsing distance: 100000000 Mm
Entry value: 100000000 pm ~1526
65 536 pm
When the trahrse limit for an axis is exceeded, the corresponding lubrication pulse-marker is then set to “I’ by the NC-part
of the control. I
I
The summatioh of the traverse sections covered can ba reset to zero by the Pi/Z-program using the following markers.
Funotlon 1 Signal dlmotion

2546 The summation of the traverse - dependent lubrication PLC - NC
to be reset in the X-axis
2549 The summation of the traverse - dependent lubrication
to be reset in the Y-aAe
to be reset in the Z-axis
to be reset in the IV-axis
1 Isaue SeatIon MO
PKi-Desorlptlon P3 6
pril 4, 89
Descr tion of the markers
Marke for axes X, Y, Z, IV
Marker
No. Function I Error meumg* $/gMHI( dhucth
2452 Start PLC-positioning X-axis E C-NC

2453 Start PLC-positioning Y-axis
2454 Start PLC-positioning Z-axis L
2455 Start PLC-positioning N-axis H
2468 Complemanted start
PLC-positioning X-axis
2469 Complemented start
,PLC-positioning Y-axis
PLC-positioning Z-axis
PLC-positioning N-axis
2560 PLC-position X-axis (Isb)
2561 PLC-position X-axis
2564 PLC-position X-axis (msb)
+
2565 PLC-position Y-axis (lsb)
2566 PLC-position Y-axis
2569 PLC-position Y-axis (msb) I
2570 PLC-position Z-axis (Isb)

2571 PLC-position Z-axis
2574 PLC-w&ion Z-axis (msb)
2575 PLC-position N-axis (Isb)
2576 PLC-position IV-axis
2577 PLC-position IV-axis,
2578 PLC-position IV-axis
2579 PLC-oosition N-axis tmsb)
L
With machin rameters 126 to 156 (see sheet Clill). 31 position values can be programmed, a. g. for return to toolchange
position. The ,kers for PLC-positioning are only active during the output of a G-M-S-T signal (G = gear rangesignal.
M = auxiliary ction, S = spindle speed. T = tool number).
Simultaneous :-positioning and spindle orientation is possible.
Note:
.Software limi inches are not taken into account.
.Tool compen 1”s ara not considered.
.A PLC-positic 1 procedure automatically ends path compensation
Bsue Section pa@

RC-DoscripUon P3 7
il 4. 89
P,,.,
Descr option of the markers
Marke s for axes X, Y, Z, IV
The PK-positIons are coded as follows:
PLC-code callkup the podtlon In maohlne pwamater

msb Irb
00000 126
00001 127
00010 128
00011 129
00100 130
00101 131
00110 132
00111 133
01000 134
01001 135
01010 136
01011 137
01100 138
01101 139
01110 140
01111 141
10000 142
10001 143
10010 144
10011 145
10100 146
10101 147
10110 148
10111 149
11000 150
11001 151
11010 152
11011 153
11100 154
11101 155
11110 156
Note:
PLC-code 1 1 1111 addresses the reference mark as KC-position. Wiih distance coded reference marks this is taken as the first
mark at the Ie# hand end of scale.
A PLC-positior/ing (e.g. for the X-axis) is programmed as follows:

Call-up PLC-position during a TOOL-CALL output by
setting the markers 2660 to 2564.
i
Start the PLC-positioning by setting the marker 2462
and resetting the complement marker 2468.
+
If the “PLC-position’ is reached,
the NC-parl of the control then resets the marker 2452
‘start PLC-Positioning’.
The complemented marker 2468 ia correspondingly set.
Termination $f PLC-podtioning
a PLC-positioning the markers for “start PUSpositioning” (M 2452. M 2453, M 2454, M 2455) ere
plemented start PLC-positioning” (M 2468, M 2469, M 2470, M 2471) are set.
Note: i
The feedrate for the PLC-positioning is specified in machine parameters 163 to 166 (see sheet Cl/l2). In the event of
simultaneous IPLC-positioning (up to 3 axes), the PLC-positions will ba approached in a straight line,at the lowest of the
specified feeddates.
/ Issue Section bw
PLC-won P3 8
pril 4, 89
Descr tion of the inarkem
Marke for M-S-T code outputs
coded
MS- xle output
Marker
No.
2032
2033 2. Bit T-Code
2034 3. Bit T-Code
2035 4. Bit T-Code
2036 5. Bit T-Code
2037 6. Bit T-Code
2038 7. Bit T-Code
2039 8. Bit T-Code (msb)
Strobe signal for S-Code

zl Strobe signal for M-Code
2046 Strobe signal for T-Code
2047 Strobe signal for second T-Code
(see machine parameter 157)
2064 1. Bit S-Code (Isb)

2065 2. Bit S-Code
2066 3. Bit S-Code
2067 4. Bit S-Code
2068 5. Bit S-Code
2069 6. Bit S-Code
2070 7. Bit S-Code
2071 8. Bit S-Code (msb)
2072 1. Bit M-Code (Isb)

2073 2. Bit M-Code
2074 3. Bit M-Code
2075 4. Bit M-Code
2076 5. Bit M-Code
2077 6. Bit M-Code
2078 7. Bit M-Code
2079 8. 8it M-Code (msb)
2481 Feedback S-Code complete PLC - NC
2482 Feedback M-Code complete
2483 Feedback T-Code complete
2484 Feedback 2”” T-Code complete
The markers f rt he M-S-T outputs and the markers for the strobe signals are set by the NC-part of the control when an
auxiliary func ti“0n (M), coded spindle R.P.M. (S). or tool number (T) is programmed.
Note:
The output oif ihe S- and T-functions can be suppressed by machine parameters 61 and 62
(see sheet Cll/b).
I
The program, and unsuppressed S- and T-functions are, in the event of a tool call, output in the following sequence by
the NC-part ( e control:
.first the tool I ber T
.finally the spi RPM S
With an auto c toolchanger it may be necessary to output a second tool number for the next tool after changing of the
current tool. second T-code is activated by machine parameter 157 (see sheet Cl/V) and is output after the feedback
“first T-code pleted”. A search can then be made in the tool magazine for the next tool prior to the next toolchange.
ISSU@ SDCtlOlt fJw@

PLC-Deaorlptlon
rpril 4. 89 P3 9
Desa rtion of the markers
Marks : for M-S-T code outputs
coded
M-8-11zode output
The setting i and
resetting of the corresponding markers proceeds as follows:
An M. S or T-function is programmed and output:

The NC-part of the control sets the marker for the
corresponding coda and afterwards
(0 ms or 20 ms delay) for the strobe signal.
1
After the PLC-programme has recoginised the strobe
signal as logic “1’. the M-S-T code must be decoded in
the PLC-part of the contml and output.
The NC-pan of the control waits for the feedback signal
M-S-T coda complete.
1
After the function has been executed. the marker
corresponding to the “Feedback Auxiliary Function
Complete” must be set in the WC-part of the control.
The NC-part of the control resets the marker for the
strobe signal (The markers for the M-S-T code remain
set until the next output of a M-S-T code).
Note:
The timing hor tl mecode output must be implemented via the PLC.
i Ieeue
pril 4. 99
DeSCXption of the markers
Marke s for M-S-T code outputs
Marker No. Ngnel dlmctlon

1900 Auxiliary function MOO \lc - PLC
1901 Auxilian/ function MO1
1902 Auxiliary function MO2
1904 Auxiliary function.MO4
1905 Auxiliary function MO5
1910 Auxiliary function Ml0
1911 Auxiliary function Ml 1
1915 Auxiliarv function Ml5
1916 Auxilian/ function Ml6
1918 Auxiliary function M 18
1919 Auxiliary function Ml 9
1920 Auxiliarv function M20
1921 Auxiliary function M21
1929 Auxiliaw function M29
1937 Auxiliay function M37
1939 Auxilian/ function M39
I l&ue SectIon
FiC-Description P3
kri14. 89
D-1 rtion of the mh
Marks for M-S-T code outputs
Mallw
No.
1954 Auxiliary function MS4
1955 Auxiliarv function MS5
1956 r-
/ Auxiliary function M56
1958 Auxilian/ function MS8
1963, Auxiliaw function M63
1965 Auxiliary function MB5
1966 Auxiliary function MB6
2496 Release marker for decoded M-code ‘LC - NC
output
If the markerI 214916is set the programmed M-functions are output in decoded form via markers 1900 to 1989. The release
marker 24% 3 is necessary since the markers 1900 to 1989 are located within the range of user markers. lf markers 1900 -
1989 are ret IUret I for other functions, marker 2496 must be reset.
Note:
There is no r It with markers MS0 to MSS.
laIsue SUCthMl hgs

f%c-Dewriptlon 12
pri 14.89 P3
c
DeSCS tion of the mwkws
Marke for spindle speed
Analogue 01 t of rpindk apead
Marker No. Funotion Slonal dimxtion

2004 “0” means: NC - PLC
The analogue voltage for the spindle drive
is located in the ramp.
With a change of the S-override potentio-
meter of > 2%. the marker 2004 is also reset
2005 “1” means:
The analogue voltage for the spindle drive
is OV
2042 “I” means:
The control operates with S-analogue
-0’ means:
The control operates with coded output of
spindle rpm
2043 Strobe signal gear range code (G-Code)
for S-analoaue output
2104 I. Bit gear range code for S-analogue (Isb) NC - PLC
2105 2. Bit gear range code for S-analogue (PLC - NC)
2106 3. Bit gear range code for S-anelogue (msb)
These markers are set from the NC but
may be overwritten in the PLC using marker
M2814.
2480 Feedback signal gear range code for PLC - NC
S-analoaue complete
2485 Status display and output of analogue
voltaae for MO3
2486 Status display and output of analogue
voltaoe for MO4
2487 Status display~M05
2489 Inversion of analogue vohage.
The polarity which has been determined
by MP 172 is reversed
2490 Spindle CM for gearchange
2491 Spindle CW for gearchange
These markers are active in MO5
status
2814 With this marker a different gear range than PLC - NC
that defined by markers 2104-2106 may be (NC - PLC)
selected. The markers 2104-2106 should
be overwritten by the PLC and b%activated
via setting marker M 2814. After the
gearchange marker 2814 is reset by the
NC-part. The markers 2104-2106 remain
unchanaed until the next aearchanae sianal.
2092 If the dialogue “wrong speed” is displayed, NC -. PLC
the marker is set.
2501 Wiih analogue output of the spindle speed, PLC - NC
the speed determined in machine parameter
258 is issued if the marker is set
(see sheet C5/9).
aua Seotion
PLC-Description P3
F, try 8,90
of the maskurs
speed
AMlogue o+ut of aphdk apeed
Markor No. 1 1 Fundon IWdlnctlon

2823 I I For analooue 0utDut of SDindle weed two I Flx-+NC
pairs of ramps. defined by MP 168, MP 316,
MP 317 and MP 318 (see sheet B/S). are
available. The first pair of ramps (MP 168/
MP 318) is active if marker 2816 = 0.
The second pair of ramps MP 317/MP 318)
is active if marker 2816 = 1. Marker 2823
is the corresponding strobe marker. I
2006 When output of spindle speed is analogue, NC-!=lL

this marker is set if a certain SDaed is not
attained.
“1’ = given speed not attained
‘0” = given speed exceeded
is to be used. then there are only four gear ranges available for the analogue output of the spindle speed.
are defined via machine paramtar 78 . 81.
in machine parameters 82 85 must be smaller than the entry values in machine parameters 78 81.
ar range (machine parameters 78 81) the associated value in machine parameters 82 86 is not reached.
06 is set (see PLC-examples).
in machine parameters 82 85 are greater than the entry values in machine parameters 78 81. then
are considered gear ranges and marker 2006 is not sat.
output of spindle speed (9analogue activated by machine parameter 62) the speed range for each gear is
hine parameters (machine parameters 78 - 86).
Iaaue Sootion
-it ril 4. 89 I I P3 I Tr
DeSCl rtion of the maekws
Marks ; for spindle speed
Analogw 0 rtofrphnaepnd
When a spin speed requiring a new gear range, is programmed, the markers till be set as follows:
A new gear range is neoessap/: the analogue voltage

for the previous spindle speed is ,reduced to 0.
the control sets the markers for the gear range code
and then (0 or 20 ms delay)
the marker for the ambe signal.
I
After the PLC-programme has recognized the strobe
signal as logic “l”. the gear range code must be decoded
in the PLC-part of the control end output.
The NC-part of the control waits for the feedback
“gear code complete”.
t
An analogue voltage can be output for changing gear.
For this purpose the markers 2490 and 2491 must
be correspondingly set in the PLC-part:
the markers initiate the rotation of the spindle in a
clockwise (marker 2491) or in an anticlockwise
(marker 2490) direction, the analogue voltage level is
set in machine parameter 70.
I
After the gearchange is cumplete. marker 2480 for the

feedback signal must be set by the PI&program.
The direction of rotation of the spindle is detemlined
in the PLC-programme by markers 2485 to 2487.
The status display M03. MO4 and MO5 is generated in
the VDU-screen. simultaneously with these markers.
After the gei ange is complete, the control outputs the relevant analogue voltage (determined by machine parameters 86.
87. 88. 89. ! rheet Cl/8).
For an exarr of the programming of the analogue spindle speed see Pi-C-examples.
Imus Saction me
ril 4. 89 -Drcrlptlm P3 15
mwkws
speed
Markor
2080
No. Funotlon
1. Bit for min. mm (Isb)
) Sbnol dhotlon
NC+RC
2081 2. Bit for min. rpm
2087 8. Bit for min. rpm (msb)
2088 1. Bii for step width (Isb)
2089 2. Bii for step width
2090 3. Bit for step width
I
2091 4. 8ii for step width (msb)
The minimum rpm and the step width from the machine parameter “limitation of rpm-code’ (machine parameter 63) is trans-
ferred into the markers 2080 to 2091 (see sheet C5/3).
Issue Sootion
Pl.c--rlption P3 7
April 4, 89
w=-w~--
MarkerNa /Fundon pknrranotian
2176 1 1.8it for the aoeratino mode-cc& Abb I’ NC - PLC
2177 2. Bit for the iper& mode-cock+
2178 3. Bit for the operating mode-code
2179 4. Bit for the operating mode-codw@~.sb)
The operating mode code is determined by the s&zted 0-g mode. The operating modes are coded as follows:
cc Programme entry and editing
EY = Manual operation
0010 = Electronic ha&wheel
0011 = Single block positioning with MD
0100 = Program run, single block
0101 = Program run full sequence
0110 = Program test
Marker No.
2049 Programming during program run NC - PLC
2050 Program entry end editing
2051 Manual operation
2052 Electronic handwheel
2053 Single block positioning with MDI
2054 Program run, single block
2055 Program run full sequence
2056 Program test
2057 Aooroach to reference point
Markers 204 9
t tc) 2057 depend on the operating mode which has been selected and are set accordingly.
Issue P3
)ril 4, 89
of the markers
Currently eo’ lvatal axis key: X, Y, 2, IV
Marks-No. 1 Fundon 1 Sbnel dlmotion

2096 1 Currentlv activated TNC-axis kev X 1 NC-PLC
2097 CurrentI; activated TNC-axis key Y
2098 Currently activated TNC-axis key 2
2099 Currantlv activated TNC-axis kev N I
These marked identih/ -the cunentlv activated TNC-axis key: The corresponding symbol will be displayed on the VDU-screen
can. for example. be employed for an external handwheel display. An external handwheel control panel can ba
markers in conjunction with the markers for external operation of the TNC-keys
Code for tha external selaction of TNC-keys
Marker No.
2800
I Function
1. 8it TNC key code (Isb)
Slgnal dlreoUon
PLC - NC
2801 2. 8ii TNC key code
2802 3. Bit TNC key code
2807 8. Bit TNC key code (msb)
2808 Strobe for kev code
on the front panel of the TNC can be simulated bv an external signal via the markers for the TNC-key
f a key code, onlv one PLC-cycle may be set, otherwise the same key till be simulated several times
of the function the control resets the key code strobe. After reset of the MC-kev code strobe, a new press of
I
Issue seotlon paw
PLC-Ddpth P3 18
November 21, 89
Marke i s for TNC-keys
The keys are coded as follows:
KW code w code
msb lab mab bb
0110 oooo
0110 0001
0110 0010
0110 0011
0110 0100
0110 0101
0110 0110
0110 0111
0110 1000
0110 1001
0110 1110
0110 1111
0111 0000
0111 oool
0111 0010
0111 0011
0111 0100
0111 0101
0111 0110
0111 0111
0111 loo0 (Graphics)
0111 1001
0111 1010
0111 1011
0111 1100
0111 1101
0111 1110
0111 1111
lesw SectIon hP
April 4, 89 =Ducriprion P3 19
Desc ption of the markers
Marke” s for TNC-keys
Markem for nhlbiting TN-keys

Marker No. 1 Funotlon 1 Slgnal dlmctlon
2182 lnhibiied TNC key pressed (NC-PLC
2855 I I Inhibit
2856 I I Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
2861 I I Inhibit
Inhibit
1 lnhibii
2864 I I Inhibit
2865 I I Inhibit
2867 I I Inhibit
2872 I I Inhibit
2873 I I Inhibit
2874 I I Inhibit
2880 I I Inhibit
2881 I I Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
2886 I I Inhibit
2887 I I Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
2890 I I Inhibit
Inhibit
IMUCI Seotlon
PLC-Duoorlptlon P3 T
F,pril 4, 89
c
n
‘ii
2897
The keys on the TNC front panel can be inhibited by setting the corresponding markers an Inhibited TN&key is
pressed. the NC-part signals this by setting the marker 2182.
This marker must be reset again by the PLC-program.
Issue
PLC-Description
April 4. 89
tion of the rl-mdms
Marke for external buttons and switches
Marker-No. Funotlon Errat nrrmclgu ‘1 ilgnol dhction

NC-Start A F‘LC - NC
;i.z
2450
NC-Rapid
Latching function for Manual traverse
8
C
2451 Feed release D
2456 Manual traverse X+ I
2457 Manual traverse X- J
2458 Manual traverse Y+ K
2459 Manual traverse Y- L
2460 Manual traverse Z+ M
2461 Manual traverse Z-
2462 Manual traverse IV+ z
2463 Manual traverse IV- P
2464 Complemented NC-Start
2465 Complemented NC-Rapid Override
2466 Complemented latching Function for
manual traverse
2467 Complemented feed release
2472 Complemented manual traverse X+
2473 Complemented manual traverse X-
2474 Complemented manual traverse Y+
2475 Complemented manual traverse Y-
2476 Complemented manual traverse Z+
2477 Complemented manual traverse Z-
2470 Complemented manual traverse IV+
2479 Complemented manual traverse IV-
2488 NC-Stoc IT corresconds to Stop)
2556 Reference end position for the encoder
input Xl
input X2
incut X3
2559 Riference end position for the encoder
input X5
L
Important fur ns are controlled via marker and complementary markers
Please se* St P3/38 for markers for axis V.
IIBsw Section
PKi-Doaoflption P3 7
a ruat-y 8.90
4
Marke i s for external buttons and switches
external buttons and switches must set the corresponding markers in the PLC-program and generate the
markers with the inverted information in the same PLC-Q&J. Should both markers not be correctly set or
ERROR IN C-PRCWIAM A/WC . . .
is displayed.
4
The displayed letter A, 8. C etc. indicates at which marker the fault lies (see list above).
Example:
The NC-start utton is provided with two normally open contacts. The markers are then set as follows:
b
u El8 (first contact of the NC-start button)
= M2448
UN El9 (second contact of the NC-start button)

= M2464
If onlv one Nd-start contact exists. the program may be written in tha following way:
u El8 (NC-start button)

= M2448
UN El8 (NC-W+ button)

= M2464
The followir wogtam is wrong and should not be implementad.
U El8 (NC-stelt button)

= M2448
UN M2448
= M2464
Adsfsctin memory cell M2448 oannot bs reco@nlzsd with this method of pmgrsmmlngl
of the markers
Funotlon llmnal dhctlon

-lashing error message from PLC ‘LC - NC
2924 Error message 0 from PLC to be displawd in VDU-screen
2925 Error mess@ I
2926 Error message 2
7
2931
2932
2933
Error message
Error message
Error message
7
a
9
2936 Error message I2
2942 Error message Ia
5
2945
2945
2947
Error message
Error message
Error message
21
22
23
2949 ~ Error message 25
2951 I Error message 27
2954 ~ Error messaae 30
Errdr message 31
Error message 32
Error message 33
Error message 34 .
Error message 35
Error message 36
Error message 37
Error message 38
Error message 39
Error message 40
Error message 41
Error message 42
Error message 43
Error message 44
Error message 45
Error message 46
Error message 47
Error message 48
Error message 49
Error message 50
Ermr messaoe 51
Error mess& 52
ISSUO ml.
pu;- P3 24
April 4, 89
of the markers
Marker No. Function Ngnal dimotlon

2977 Error message 53 ‘LC - NC
2993 Error massage 69
2994 Error messaoe 70
2996 Error messaoe 72
2998 Error massage 74
2999 Error messaoe~“~
75
3004 Error messaie 80
the control can display error messages from the RC-part. The NC-error messages are selected via markers
.
The error messages are coded from O-83. When a marker for a PLC-error message is set, the following error message is
displayed. e. g
FLC : ERROR 69
on the VDU-screen of the control.
Plain language error messages can also be displayed instead of the coded error messages (e.g. Oil pressure too low).
The error messages O-83 may have up to 32 characters. The error messages 84-99 may have up to 16 characters as user
parameters.
Should you require specific plain language error messages. please contact your nearest HEIDENHAIN agency.
A PLC-error rressage during program run freezes the screen block display but the program will continue to run. After erasure
of the error msssage with the current block will again be displayed. If the program run should be stopped by an error
‘(9
message, this must be done by the PLC-program.
The setting of the marker 2916 results in the markers 2924 to 3023 being checked. If one of these markers is set, then the
error message will be shown as a flashing display. Should none of the markers for the PLC-error messages be set, then
EMEROENCY STOP PLC
is shown as a flashing dislplay.
I
Ieeue Saotion me
PLC-DWCdptiOn 25
Nov mber 21.89 P3
ption of the madcars
FUtlotlOll 1 SIgnal dlmctlon

User parameter 16 PLC - NC
User parameter 15
User parameter 14
3011 User parameter 13
User parameter 10
User parameter 9
User parameter 8
User parameter 7
User parameter 6
User parameter 5
User parameter 4
User parameter 3
User parameter 2
User parameter 1
parameters can be made accessible to the machine operator via the MOD-function. These user-parameters
the machine tool builder at his own discretion,
The following dialogue texts are contained in the PLC-EPROMfor the dialogue display of user-parameters.
Dialopdtsph~ Maohine panmatar

USER PAR. 1 Machine parameter with lowest parameter number
USER PAR. 8 Machine parameters ellocrtad according to increasing parameter numbers
USER PAR. 16 Machine parameter with the highest parameter number

I
wfth a max. of 16 characters may be displayed instead of USER PAR. 1 etc. This requires en amendment of
LC-EPROM which can only be performed by HEIDENHAIN.
your local HEIDENHAIN-agency or our factory in Tmunreut. West Germany.
USER PAR. 1 to USER PAR. 16 are stored in the FLC-EPROM under the address of the FLC ERROR84 to
however, error messages are required instead of dialogues. the corresponding dialogue texts within the
ust be revised (Address of USER PAR. 1 = Address of PLC: ERROR84 etc.).
Out of the ASCII signs, the signs from HD( 20 to HEX 5F are permissible for error messages and dialogues.
ption of the markers
displays
L
Markam for &atua dbplay and othar diakguaa
I
Madcar No. Fumtlon SIgnal dhwtlon
2508 Isb; PLC-NC
2657 msb for the display of a second auxiliary function
The fkst auxiliary function is M03. MO4 or M05.

2062 Marker is set when the dialogue -code number’ NC - PLC
is displayed.
2092 Marker is set v&en the dialogue “wrong rpm’ NC-PLC
is displayed.
The second ak &aw function is coded as follows:
M2508 Display
19 (first coolant off)
/7 (second coolant off)
18 (first coolant on)
/K (second coolant on)
bsua -.-- . .. al mw
ril 4, 89 P3 27
I
Description of the markers
Screen displays
Markers for control status
Eraseable error message is displayed

Error message: “External emergency stop’ is displayed
Display: Control in operation

The initial program status is displayed in the VDU-screen of the TNC via the svmbol + (see illustration),
The NC-part of the control signals a program interruption to the PLC via marker 2183 (display flashes). The initial status is
signalled via the marker 2184 (display on or flashing).
When both markers are reset, the program run has been terminated.
Error message NC - PLC

When an eraseable error message is dIsplayed in the VOU. the NC-pan of the control sets the marker 2190.
When the error message EXTERNAL EMERGENCY STOP is displayed, the NC-part of the control setS the marker 2190
and 2191. With flashing error messages from the NC, the program run of the PLC is halted and the PLC-outputs set to “0’.
Issue PLC-Description
April 4. 89
displays
i
Markem for htur dbplay and other dialoguea
Marker No. Functbn Sl&fnal dlmotion

2508 Isb; PLC * NC
2657 msb for the display of a second auxiliary function
The first auxiliary function is M03. MO4 or M05.

2062 Marker is set when the dialogue *code number” NC - PLC
is displayed.
2092 Marker is set when the dialogue “wrong rpm’ NC - PLC
is displayed.
The second auxiliary function is coded as follows:
M2508 Display
0 /9 (first coolant off)
0 17 (second coolant off)
1 /8 (first coolant on)
1 /K (second coolant on)
/ ,
ISUl@ sectlon
FIGDWCrlptlOIl F3 7
ril 4. 89
of the markers
for the transfer of numerical values
With the following markers, coded numerical values can be transferred via PLC-inputs to parameters Q 100 to 0 107
(see PLC-examples).
Marker No. 1 Function 1 Sknel dlmction

2560 Marker for the numerical value which is to be PLC - NC
.. . transferred from the PLC to the NC.
.. .
. ..
2576 I I
2809 Strobe for transfer of the numerical value
2810 Data format of numerical value
2811
2812
2816 Assignment of numerical value to Q-parameters
2817 0 100 to Q 107
2818 I I
Flwee note:
Markers 2560 to 2576 have now been assigned double functions1
These markers are already being used for PLC-positioning.
Markers 2810. 2811 and 2812 determine the data format of the numerical value which is to be transferred.
At present, the following data format can be defined:
M2810=0
M2811 =0
M2812=0
8y resetting tte markers 2810, 2811 and 2812 it can determined that the information of markers 2560 to 2576 corresponds to
a numerical value with 4 decades, BCD-code with sign.
Marker No. Function S/anel dlmcUon

M 2560 I” decade (Isb) PiX+NC
M 2561 I” decade
M 2562 1” decade
M 2563 1%decade (msb)
M 2564 2”d decade (Isb)
M 2565 2”d decade
M 2566 2”d decade
M 2567 2”d decade (msb)
M 2568 3rd decade (Isb)
M 2569 3@ decade
M 2570 3” decade
M 2571 3’d decade (msb)
M 2572 4’” decade (Isb)
M 2573 4* decade
M 2574 4m decade
M 2575 4’h decade (msb)
M 2576 Sign
ISUIO Seotion paw

FLC-Grlptlon
April 4, 89 P3 29
Description of the markers
Market-s for the transfer of numerical values
Markers 28113.2817 and 2818 determine to which Q-parameter (Cl 100 to Q 107) the numerical value should be assigned.
2816 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
2817 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
2818 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Parameter Q 100 Q 101 cl 102 cl 103 0 104 Q 105 Q 106 cl 107
Transfer of the numerical value is effected by setting the marker 2809 if an M, S or T-function has been output.
IeeUO section moe

PLC-Deeuiptlon P3 30
April 4. 89
Dew Ytion of the markers
Marks ; for touch probe systems TS lll/TS 12O/TS 511
Marker No. Function Signal direction

2503 Release marker for touch probe system PLC - NC
2022 Probe system. prior to a Drobina cycle. is not NC - PLC
1 ready e.g. probe is not &onne&d’
2023 Stylus already deflected when starting probing

cycle
2024 Touch probe system ready or not ready during

I probing cycle e.g. transmission
beam interrupted
2025 Stylus was deflected

Probing function executed
2026 Probing function completed
2027 Battery voltage too low (TS 511)
Marker 250: reset by the NC-part of the control, if a probing function has been started. The control waits before execution
of the probir unction until the PLC has reset the marker 2503 (see PLC-examples.)
For instance. s marker can suppress the beginning of a measuring procedure if the spindle has not be cleaned with
prior to insertion of the touch probe.
If the touch , ,e stylus is deflected prior to starting a probing cycle. marker 2023 is set by the NC-part of the control.
If the stylus eflected during a probing procedure, marker 2025 is set.
If the probin! ocedure is COmpbSed (touch probe has returned to the safety clearance), marker 2026 is set. Marker 2026 is
also set if
.an error mes 18has interrupted the probing procedure or

.the probing I :edure has been interrupted by pressing the external STOP-button.
For TS 511tt is an additional markers 2024 for the message “Touch probe system ready” and 2027 in the event of
insufficient b !ry power. The marker 2024 is logically “1” if the touch probe is not ready after starting a probe cycle.
The marker : 7 is logically “1’ if the batten/ voltage is too low.
l4sue \ PLGDosoription seotion hle

No Iber 21. 89 P3 31
Descl tion of the makers
Marke for activating jog positioning
The jog posii g can ba activated via the integrated pLC. In this way it is possible to additionally enter a step distance in
the operatin< le “electronic handwheel”. When an axis direction is pressed the corresponding axis moves bY the distance
entered (see .examp!es).
Marker woo; Function Sl@nnl dlmctlon

2498 Activating jog positioning PLC - NC
2512 X + Start marker -: PLC * NC
2513 X - Start marker
2514 Y + Start marker
2515 Y - Start marker
2516 2 + Start marker
2517 Z - Start marker
2518 N + Start marker
2519 N - Start marker
2528 X + Complement marker PLC - NC
2529 X - Complement marker
2530 Y + Complement marker
2531 Y -Complement marker
2532 Z + Complement marker
2533 Z -Complement marker
2534 IV + Complement marker
2535 IV - Complement marker
SOCtiOll me
FLC--iOn P3 32
Dew Ition of the markers
Marks for determining axis sequence upon approaching
the re -ence marks
Markar No. Function SIgnal dhotion
2602 If the marker is set, the .referenca marks PLC * NC
will be approached in the sequence set
by markers 2603 - 2607. if it is reset, tiS
seauence is as defined in MP 59.
2603 Axis sequence for approaching the PLC - NC
reference marks (Isb)
2604 Axis sequence for approaching the
reference marks
reference marks
reference marks
reference marks (msb)
The axis sequence may be changed
if an axis has alreadv moved.
The markers a60:3 to 2607 determine the axis sequence upon approaching the reference marks:
2007 2II 2606 2604 2603 Ada aaaua”oa Sianal direction

X Y 2 N PLC - NC
i i : : 01 X Y IV 2
: 1 0 X Z Y N
: : X Z IV Y
1 :, A X IV Y Z
i : 1 0 1 X IV z Y
0 0 1 1 0 Y X Z IV PLC - NC
1 1 Y X N z
: 01 :, 0 0 Y Z X IV
0 1 0 0 1 Y Z N x
0 1 Y IV x Z
0 1 : 1 01 Y IV z X
0 1 1 0 Z X Y IV PLC - NC
1 i 1 Z X IV Y
: 1 1 1 0 Z Y X IV
0 1 1 1 1 Y IV X
f N x Y
1 : E 0 01 Z N Y X
i 1 0 IV X Z PLC - NC
1 : IV x r
1 0 A Iv Y X r
1 : Y Z X
1 01 :, F z X Z
1 : 1 1 1 N z Y Y
(see also PLC

f exi ampIes)
IrlSU8 Sactlon me
Apriil 4, 89 f%C-Daaoripth P3 33
of the markers
for switching from X, Y or Z axis to the 4th axis
With the markers 2526, 2542, 2590. 2591 axis moves in X. Y or 2 may be switched to the 4’” axis.
Marker No. Functbn Slgnal diiectbn

2526 Changing the X-. Y- or Z-axis onto the PC-NC
fourth axis. Markers 2590 and 2591
determine the changed axis.
2542 Complement marker for marker 2526
2590 Determination of the axis that is to be PLC-NC
2591 changed onto the fourth axis
The axis that i to be changed is determined via markers 2590 and 2591 as follows (sea PLC-examples):
2591 259 Axis

0 0 X-axis
0 Y-axis
7
1
1
:,
1
Z-axis
4’” axis
After the markers 2590 and 2591 are set the change is executed with markers 2526 and 2542 (complement).
If for example in a program the position nominal vslues for the Y-axis are to be processed with the fourth axis, then the
markers are tc be set as follows:
Marker 2590 := 1 and

Marker 2591 == 0
The NC-part of the control after a PLC-run automatically sets
Marker 2526 = 0 and

Marker 2542 := 1
but tge changa is retained.

If the change s to be reversed. then set
Marker 2590 := 1 and

Marker 2591 F 1
n be reactivated through
ISMe Section me
FIGDeeoriptlon
April 4. 89 P3 34
of the markers
a percentage factor on the
Wiih the following markers the spindle voltage may be limited to a defined percentage of maximum:
Marker No. FUWUOfl Signal dhcUon

2822 With this marker set the spindle voltage is limited to the PLC - NC
%-factor (Strobe marker) as defined in machine parameter 315.
2816 With the marker set the %-factor can be applied with PLC - NC
marker 2822.
Flww note:
M 2816 has more than one function (datum shift. transfer of numerical values to Q-parameters)
hum 86CtiObl me
PLC-Dwcription P3 36
April 4, 89
for the transfer of a datum correction
With the follo+ng markers a datum correction, previously defined in machine parameters. may be activated:
MarIcer No. Function Signal direction

2819 Wiih this marker set the 1”“. Znd or 3” datum correction is PLC- NC
activated, as defined in MP 303 to MP 314 (Strobe marker)
2816 (Isb): Marker for defining I*, Zndor 3” datum correction PLC - NC
2817 (msb): Marker for defining lst, Znd or 3” datum correction
M2817 MF816
0 Datum correction cancelled
i la datum correction
1 :, Znddatum correction
1 1 3rd datum correction
The datum co.rection updates the actual position display.
A datum correction may be active in all 4 axes

For further infqvmation see sheet C2/13.
ISEU0 Sedan mle

FLC-Desorlptlon 36
pril 4, 89 P3
I
Dew ption of the markers
Marke i s for axis S
The 5t” axis may be used for spindle orientation. The spindle positioning is effected via the PLC-program with a
PLC-positioning routine.
Msrker No. Funotion Signal dltuotion
2499 Open control loop for axis S. PLC-NC
A pre-marker is not required for opening
the control loop.
2527 Start PLC-positioning of axis S.
2543 Comulementaw start of PLC-oositionina
for a& S.
PLC-position axis S (Isb)
PLC-position axis S
PLC-position axis S
PLC-position axis S
PLC-position axis S (msb)
2656 Spindle orientation from standstill PLC - NC
I ‘0” Orientation with MO3
-1” Orientation with MO4
(static marker)
I
Markers 2580 to 2584 call-up the following PLC-positions:
Ftc-code 1 1 calls positIon in machine parameter
00000 126
00001 127
00010 128
00011 129
--I
00100
00101
00110 I
130
131
132
00111 133
01000 134
01001 135
01010 136
01011 137
01100 138
01101 139
01110 140
01111 141
10000 142
10001 143
10010 144
10011 I 145
10100 146
10101 147
10110 148
10111 ,*!a
11000 150
11001 151
11010 152
11011 153
11100 I/ 154
11101 155
11110 156
was not processed in the program run, the spindle positions to the reference mark.
with the rotation direction (MO3 or MO4) last programmed. if the spindle is at standstill, then
accordance with the status of marker 2656.
I
Issue Section me
FLC-Deecripth P3 37
Nov mber 21.89
ion of the markers
LC-markers that are used for spindle orientation with a 4 axis control version are used alternatively for the
I
Marker No. Function Signal dimctlon
M 2507 I I Open control 100~axis V PLC - NC
M 2522 Start PLC-positioning axis V PLC - NC
M 2538 Complement start PLC-positioning axis V PLC-NC
M 2580 PLC-position axis V (Isb) PC-NC
M 2581 PLC-position axis V
M 2584 PLC-position axis V (msb)
M 2016 Axis V release NC - PLC
M 2017 Axis V in position NC - PLC
M 2668 NO standstill supervision for axis V when control loop opened PLC + .NC
(see sheet P3/3)
M 2148 Currently activated TNC-axis key V NC + PLC
M 2500 Activation closed loop opening axis V PLC - NC
M 2505 Actual value transfer axis V WC-NC
M 2506 Reference end position axis V PLC * NC
M 2520 Start jog positioning axis V + PLC * NC
M 2521 Start jog positioning axis V -
M 2536 Complement start jog positioning axis V +
M 2537 Complement start jog positioning axis V -
M 2524 Manual traverse V + PLC - NC
M 2525 Manual traverse V -
M 2540 Complement manual traverse V +
M 2541 IIC amp‘1emant manual traverse V -
arkers are not provided for axis V:
pulse after a certain distance is exceeded
cumulative lubrication distance
lasue Section page

FLGDeacripuon
Novenber 21.89 P3 38
of the markers
ascending and descending edges of
riding edgea of PLGinputa
wounding edges of PLC-inputs
release marker for the ascending and descending edge monitoring
release marker 2497 is set.
leeIN Section wle

PLC-Deaorlption P3 39
pril 4, 89
I
Dew ition of the markers
Marks for the first PLC-program cycle after power on and
after il xruption of PLC-program
Marker No. Function Signal dhotlon
2180 lS PLC-program cycle after a power on NC + PLC
(aftar cancellation of the error message
“Power interrupted” by pressing
m
2185 1” PLC-program cycle after interruption
of PLC-program (if MP 77 = 0 end the
“PLC-editing function” is left)
1
Marker 2180 >t at logic T only during the first PK-program-cycle after a power on. This also applies to Marker 2185
during the fil C-program-cycle after an interruption of the PLC-program.
isw seotbn fJww

PLC-De8orlption 40
I 4.89 P3
Descr Ition of the m’arkers
Misce~ neous markers
Marker No. Function Signal dhctbn

2048 “1” denotes: NC+PLC
Tapping cycle is called
2041 “1” denotes: NC-PLC
English dialogue selected
2060 “1” denotes: NC-PLC
DIN/IS0 proarammina selected
2061 “1’ denotes: NC+PiC
The block “END-PGM”. MO2 or M30 has
been actioned.
2063 “1” denotes: NC - PLC
F’rogram No. 0 (central tool file) selected
2510 “1” denotes: PLC - NC
Spindle override inactive
Feedrate override inactive
When operating with axis clamping and
there is a continuous contour transition
in the subsequent block. a stationary axis
will be clamped
2596 “1” denotes: WC+NC
Central tool file may be accessed in
background editing mode.
Any TOOL-CALLS in the running program

await an exit from background editing or
the selection of a different program.
2509 “1’ denotes: PLC - NC
The feedrate override is fixed at the
46 defined in machine parameter 296.
ISUB Section
PLC-Dwxiption
I4,89 P3
of the markers
by machine parameters
Markers can be sat or reset via machine parameters 156, 249 and 250.
The contents of these markers can be utilisad to activate various PLC-program routines. It is therefore possible to employ one
PLC-program ‘or various machines. In the event, for example. that machines of a particular series are fined with different gear
ranges. a common PLC-program can be employed for these machines. The different PLC-program routines for the decoding
the gear ranges are selected by appropriate entry values in the machine parameters.
The values of he markers which are to be sat for a machine are simply added and the resultant numerical value is entered as
a machine parameter.
Machine panmater 168
Marker No. Function SignsI direction

2192 Value 1 NC - PLC
2193 Value 2
2194 Value
2195 Value .i
2196 Value 16
2197 Value 32
2198 Value 64
2199 Value 128
2200 Value 256
2201 Value 512
2202 Value 1024
2203 Value 2049
2204 Value 4096
2205 Value 8192
2206 Value 16394
2207 Value 32768
Example:
The marker 21 3, 2199 and 2206 should be set. The entry value for machine parameter 158 is established as follows:
I
Marker No. 2193:
a Value 2
Marker No. 2199: Value 128
Marker No. 2 06: Value 16394
Entry valaua 16514
Note:
These marker should not be set in the PLC-program. Setting and resetting should, without exception. take place via machine
parameter 15:
Issue Section mw
PLC-Dascdptlon
pril 4. 89 P3 42
Marke s affected by machine parameters
Machlna pa : mater 249
Function Signal dimotion

Value 1 NC - PLC
Value 2
Value
Value ii I
Value 16
Value 32
Value 64
Value 128
Value 256
Value 512
Value 1024
Value 2048
Value 4096
Value 8192
Value 16384
Value 32768
Machine par/lmeter 260
Function 1 Slanal dlmction

Value 1 NC - PLC
Value 2
Value 64
Value 128
Value 256
Value 512
Value 1024
Value 2048
IValue 4096
Value 8192
Value 16384
Value 32768
Issue : Saction me
PLC-Dascription
pril 4. 89 P3 43
Dew tion of the markers
Marke for the activation of user-cycles
User-cycles ( meactivated or inhibited via markers 2240 to 2271.
Marker No. Function ibnal dhotion

2240 User-cycle 68 1c - PLC
2241 User-cycle 69
2242 User-cycle 70
2243 User-cycle 71
2244 User-cycle 72
2245 User-cycle 73
2246 User-cycle 74
2247 User-cycle 75
User-cycle 76
2249 User-cycle 77
2250 User-cycle 78
2251 User-cvcle 79
2252 User-cycle 80
2253 User-cycle 81
2254 User-cycle 82
2255 User-cycle 83
2256 User-cvcle 84
2257 User-cycle 85
2258 User-cycle 86
2259 User-cycle 87
2260 User-cycle 88
2261 User-cycle 89
2262 User-cycle 90
2263 User-cycle 91
2264 User-cycle 92
2265 User-cycle 93
2266 User-cycle 94
2267 User-cycle 95
2268 User-cycle 96
2289 User-cycle 97
2270 User-cvcle 98
2271 User-n/cle 99
User-cycles lhibiied by setting the appropriate markers.
la
uua
riI 4.89
PIG-Wption
Section
P3
ik
Descl tion of the markers
Mar-kc!rs for toolchanger support
Marker
No. Function SIgnal dlmction
2093 “1’ signifies: rlc - PLC
A change from a special tool to a normal
tool or vice versa is programmed and the
first pocket number is output.
This “1” signifies, that a second pocket
number follows.
2600 “1’ signifies: ‘LC - NC
With special tools, the pocket for the new
tool is output first. and then the pocket for
the old tool (effective only for active central
tool file and flexible pocket addressing).
2601 “1’ signifies:

A special tool is returned to the original
pocket in spite of flexible pocket addressing
(effective only for active central tool file and
flexible pocket addressing).
2595 In addition to the pocket number from the ‘LC - NC

NC-part the tool number may be placed in
markers 2112 - 2119 via the strobe signal
marker 2046 or 2047. For outputs of two
pocket numbers, two tool number would be
given.
2598 1” signifies: ‘LC - NC

A tool number is transferred to the NC - PLC)
NC-part of the control in BCD format with
the aid of the markers 2560 to 2567
(2 decades). The corresponding tool pocket
is transferred from the NC-part of the
control to the PLC in BCD format with the
aid of the markers 2112 to 2119 (2 decades).
M2598 is automatically reset by the
NC-part of the control.
2599 “1’ signifies: ‘LC+NC

A tool number is transferred to the :NC - PLC)
NC-part of the control in BCD format with
the aid of the markers 2560 to 2567
(2 decades) and the corresponding tool
pocket number is transferred to the NC-part
of the control with the aid of markers 2572
to 2579. They are stored in the central tool
file.
M2599 is automatically reset by the
NC-part of the control.
The screen display is first entered with the
keys a m fl, ## in programming
and editing mode.
Note:
io
Markers 256 to 2567 or 2672 to 2579 already have the following functions: markers for PLC-positioning or markers for
transfer of a n+m erical value from the PLC to the NC.
laW”O PLGDe8odption
hOtlOll me
a pri I 4,89 P3 45
Descri rtion of the markers
Markel ; for*toolchanger support
Marker No. Function Blgnrl dimctbn

2820 “1” signifies: PLC - NC
The central tool file is not updated through
TOOL CALL but rather through the setting
of the marker 2821 after the TOOL CALL
Marker 2820 must be set statically in order
to address this function.
2821 “1” signifies: PC-NC
Update central tool file if marker 2820 is
set.
Tool pocket number if marker 2598 is set
to -1”.
Tool number if marker 2595 is set to “1’.
2112 1* decade (Isb) NC - PLC

2113 1” decade
2114 1” decade
2115 1” decade (msb)
2116 2”d decade (Isb)

2117 2nd decade
2118 2”” decade
2119 2”d decade (msb)
Tool number if markers 2598 or 2599 are
set to “1”.
2560 l’r decade (Isb) PLC - NC

2561 1” decade
2562 1” decade
2563 1” decade (msb)

2565 2”d decade
2566 2”” decade
2567 2”” decade (msb)
Tool pocket number if marker 2599 is set tc
“1’.
2572 1” decade (Isb) PLC - NC

2573 I* decade
2574 1” decade
2575 l* decade (msb)

2577 ,2”” decade
2578 2”d decade ” .’ _
2579 2”d decade (msb)
a
ISSUO
lril 4. 89
FLC-Deeuiption
be equipped with customer-specific macro programrnes e.g. for the control of toolchangers with fired or
If the standard PLC-memory capacity is insufficient up to 300 PLC-commands may be stored in a macro.
The followino arkers are available for the call-up of macro-programs:

1 Function I Sl6nol dhmolh
3264 Customer-soecific macro 1 PLC * NC
3265 Customer-specific macro 2
~3279 Customer-specific macro 16
2189 7-t Undefined macro called-up NC - PLC
Marken 3Ct4 - 3199 are used for messages from the macro-programs to the PLC or vice versa.
Entry values i 1the machine parameters 209 to 212 are transferred to the macros via the marken 3200 - 3263,
lf PLC-functiOS are to be stored as macros, contact your nearest HEIDENHAIN sales office.
If an undefir 18
1 macro is called, the error message *Error in PLC-program Q’ is displayed.
Ieeue Section pa98

PLC-DBWtlptiOil
xii 4, 89 P3 47
Dew tion of the mabrs
Maw rogramming
I for tha wntml of tookhangers
prcgnams support the control of a toolchanger vir pecial markers.

Marker No. DO8CliptiOll Fonotlon
for macm-
acthmtkn
M 3264 Tool No. or pocket No. BCD-dual Tool No. (Pocket No., T-code) in M 2032 M 2039
conversion Nominal value inM3024...M3031
the tool No. (Pocket No.. BCD) is converted BCD-dual and
transferred to the nominal value
- If T-code = 0. M 3043 set to “1’
- if T-code greater than max. value, M 3044 is set to “1’
M 3265 Increase actual value The actual value (M 3032 _. M 3039) can assume the
values 1. 2 max. value.
- actual value + 1, if actual value is less than maximal value
- actual value = 1. if actual value greeter then or equal to
max. value
M 3266 Decrease actual value The actual value (M 3032 M 3039) can assume the
values 1, 2 max. value.
- actual value - 1. if actual value greeter than 1
- actual value = max. value, lf actual value = 1
M 3267 Actual/Nominal value comparison Actual value in M 3032 M 3039
Nominal value in M 3024 M 3031
- if actual value = nominal value, M 3040 is set to “1
- if distance actual/nominal value less than or equal to
distance to speed reduction. M 3041 is set to “1’
- if the shorter distance from actual-to-nominal distance is
positive, (direction 1 - 2). M 3042 is set to “1”
Iat aua
pril 4. 89
PIGDwcfiption Paw
48
4
Macro programming
F
I !
The following markers are also required for the macro-programs for control of a toolchanger:
Markers for nominal values of pocket numbers:
M 3024 l* bit (lsb)
M 3025 I 2”d bit
M 3026 3rd bit
M 3027 4’” bii
M 3028 5’h bit
M 3029 6rh bit
M 3030 7’” bit
M 3031 8’” bit (msb)
Markers for actual values of pocket numbers:

M 3032 Is’ bii (Isb)
M 3033 2nd bit
M 3034
M 3035 $ g
M 3036 5rh bit
M 3037 13~ bit
M 3038 7* bit
M 3039 Sti bit (msb)
Interrogation markers
M 3040 “1” if actual value = nominal value
M 3041 “1. if distance between pocket number actual/nominal value is less or equal to distance for speed
reduction (machine parameter 209)
M 3042 “1” if the shortest distance from pocket number actual value to nominal value is positive
(direction l-2-3-4 etc.)
M 3043 “1” if T-code (M 2032 - M 2039) = 0
M 3044 “1” if T-code greater than the max. pocket number (machine parameter 209)
With machine parameter 209. the maximum number of tool magazine pockets and the distance to the speed reduction is
determined. -~
The entry value is calculated as follow:
(Distance to s oeed reduction x 256) + max. number of magazine pockets = machine parameter 209.
Example:
Number of magazine pockets = 36
Distance to speed reduction = 2 (places)
2 x 256 + 36 = 548
548 must be &ntered for machine parameter 209.
Issue SecHOll me
PLC-DOsC+tflM
pril 4. 89 P3 49
programming
yout and functioning of a toolchanwr
Tool magazine
Gripper arm
\
Main spi/ YI --Jj+
Proximity switch S 2 for

Proximity switch S 1 for reference position of magazine
determining actual position value
.Wih the first 001 call, the tool magazine is rotated to the reference position (proximity switch S 2).
On reaching the proximity switch, the markers for the actual value of the pocket number (M 3032 to M 3039) is set.
.The tool number (T-code) in the markers M 2032 to M 2039 is converted BCD-to-dual by setting the marker M 3264 and
transferred to the markers for the nominal value of ihe pocket number (M 3024 to M 3031). lf marker M 3264 is set, the
nominal and actual values are compared and the interrogation markers M 3043 and M 3044 are automatically set by the PLC.
If the T-code ==0, M 3043 is set to Y”.
lf the T-code greater than the maximum value, M 3044 is set to “1
Interrogation narkers can be further linked within the PLC-program.
T-code = 0 means that no tool is to be searched for, since the tool call with number 0 only eliminates tool compmsation.
If the T-code is greater than the maximum value, an error message can e.g. be displayed.
Plea80 nota:
Markers M 3043 and M 3044 are not automatically raaat
Reset must ta (e place within the PLC-program.
.By setting the marker M 3267. the actual value (M 3032 to M 3039) of the tool position is compared with the nominal value
(Mu3024 to N 3031).
.If the actual M lue = nominal value. M 3040 is set to ‘1’
.If the distance actual/nominal value is less than or equal to the distance to the speed reduction, marker M 3041 is set to 1’.
If the shorter distance from actual-to-nominal value is positive (direction 1 - 2). marker M 3042 is set to “1’.
Iswe Section me
PKxaw&tioll
April 4, 89 P3 50
I
of the markers
.If the direction of rotation is defined (marker M 3042). the tool which is called-up can be searched for via the shortest
distance.
The actual valJe of the magazine position can assume the values 1. 2. 3. 4 maximum value.
Depending or the rotation direction of the magazine, the actual value of the magazine position after even/ signal of the
proximity swijch S 1 must be either increased by one value or reduced by one value.
Increase actual value: set marker M 3265!
New actual wlue = old actual value + 1. if the actual value is less than the maximum value.
New actual wlue = 1, if the actual value is greater or equal to the maximum value.
Decrease actual value: Set marker M 3266!
New actual vslue = old actual value - 1. if the actual value is greater than 1.
value. if actual value = 1,
should only be set for the duration of one PLC-cycle at a time.

set for longer than this the actual value register will be incremented or decremented at each PLC-cycle.
between the actual and nominal value is less than or equal to the speed reduction distance (i.e. marker
rotation speed of the magazine should be reduced.
lue = nominal value (i.e. marker M 3040 = 1) the magazine should be stopped as the selected tool is in the
Isrue Sootion me
pril 4. 89 P3 51
Macro programming
i
55 the PLC-memoly may be extended by 1024 commands to give a total memory capacity of 3072
mmands are activated by the 6etting of marker M 3279. If marker M 3279 is set, there is no CRC twt of
checksum test ol the RAM end machine peremeten. The PLC-cycle time is also increased to 22 ms.
only be used for functions thet do not need to bs pem~enently eotive, with
when neceeeery.
be run from RAM or EPROM is selected with machine parameter 77 (bit 2).
For editing, th se commands can only be accessed with the keyandnottheuandmkeys.
Marker No. FWlCtbn 9ignel dlrec&n

3279 “1” denotes: PLC+NC
Additional commands addressed.
S6CtiOil
P3
Oescr tion of the markers
Countt .5
The FtC has :ounters at its disposal. each of the 32 counters being controlled through two special markers with the
identification lhether or not the counter status has reached “0. can be interrogated by the use of an additional marker,
also represen by the identification Z. The counter is set to the entry value programmed in the corresponding machine
parameter (rr 55536) and counts backwards to the counter status “0’. The counter is decremented by 1 with every cycle
of the PLC-pr Irn that the counter pulse release is set to 1’.
Function Marker identlfketion Rommke

set counter zo to 231 Through the assfgnment of a logic “1’. the corresponding
counter will be set to the preset value in the machine
parameter. The assignment of the logic “I’ must only exist for
one PLC-cycle, other&e the setting till be repeated at each
subsequent cycle.
Counter not 249 to 279 The marker 249 to 279 corresponding to the counter ZO to
equal to “0 231 is at logic r’ when a counter has been set. The counter
has been set. The counter status can be interrogated via 249
to 279. On reaching the counter status “0’ the marker for the
counter status is set again to logic -0”.
Not% For the duration of the first program cycle after the
setting of the counter, the corresponding marker 249 to 279
remains at logic “0”.
Counter pulse 296 to Z127 The counter till be decremented by WYif the corresponding
release marker has a logic state ‘1’ at the end of a PLC-cycle. In the
event of the corresponding marker having a logic state “0’ at
the end of a PLC-cvcle. no decrement occurs.
The corresl3or-uling machine parameter has been set to 5 [e.g. machine parameter 94)
Counter stt ntus 5 1 3 2 2 1 0
Set counts
Gm
Counter stt nus
not equal ts0 zei
(ZW
Counter pu
release
(ZW #
Time for one PLC-cycle

, t-
II
Apri
of the markers
z- 22 23 24 zs z6 27 z8 z9 zi zi- 212u3 214 u5

249 250 251 252 253 254 265zs8257 258269 zii Z61 262 263
297 298 z99 zio ZlOl r102 2103

2104
z105 z106
2107 2108 zlo9 zii
95 96 97 98 99 ii%- isi- 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 ii%-
- I
- - - - - - - I
217 Fir z19 220 221 222 223224 225 226 227 228 229 230 z-i
265 266 267 Z68 269 270 271272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279
2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119

2120 2121 z122 2123 2124 a25 2126 2127
281 282 283 284 285 286 287288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295
- - ! i - - -
ls!m8 Section
PLC-Doscrlptlon
pril 4, 89 P3 Tr
of the markers
The PLC has 48 timers at its disposal.

The start of each of the 48 timers is controlled by a special marker wfth the identification T. The timers time out from the
times programmed in the corresponding machine parameters. The unit of time is 20 ms (max. 65535 units programmable).
An additional special marker with the identification T enables ITmer running- to be interrogated.
Function Marker idwltmoation Runwks

Timer start TO to T47 Through the assignment of a logic “1’. the corresponding
timer will be set to the preset value in the associated
machine parameter and started. The assignment of the logic
‘l- must only exist for one PLC-cycle, otherwise the setting
will be repeated on each subsequent program cycle.
Timer running T48 to T95 The marker T45 to T95 corresponding to the timer TO to T47
is at logic “1’. when a timer has been set. The status “Timer
running’ oan be interrogated via T48 to T95. On the timing
out of the timer, the marker Timer running” is set again to
logic -0”.
No& For the duration of the first program cycle after the
setting of the timer. the corresponding marker T48 to T95
remains at logic ‘0”.
The corresp
Timer
status
Timer
start
Timer
- ‘t [ms]
Time for one PLC-cycle

I ,-
lssua sa0U0n me
P&-DUOtiptl0n 55
April 4, 89 P3
I Iemm
I
PLC-DdptlOll
I
seotlon
I
pril 4. 89 P3
PLC-modes
Selection and exit of PLC-modes
The control offers the possibility of programming the PLC at the machine and subsequent testing of the program.
Enter “code numb
e contra automatically swtches to the

Dialogue display: TAEELLE E/
The PLC-modes are exited by pressing fij
s&wage translation:
1ABELLE E/A/Z/l/M = TABLES E-inputs/A-outputs/Z-countersTT-timers/M-markers
PLC-PROGRAMM TRACE-FUNKIION = PLC TRACE MODE
PLC-EDITIER-FUNKTION= PLC EDITING MODE
Apill 4. 89
PLC-modes
PLC-editing mode
The mode “PLC-Editier-Funktion’ is selected with the
The VDU displaya the following:
In /,/, ., “r
When compiling the PLC-program ai the control. the PLC-program is stored internally in RAM (Random Access Memory).
A PLC-program can be copied from the control onto a ME 101/102 cassette, FE 401.floppy disc or drectly 1n10an EPROM
programming unit. A master EPROM with the PLC-program IS complied by HEIDENHAIN from the media containing the PLC-
program. Program admwvstration IS also carried out by HEIDENHAIN
In the control, there is a socket provided for the EPROM, MachIne parameter 77 selects whether the machine should utilise
the PLC-program in RAM or EPROM.
For editing purposes. a program can be copied from EPROM Into RAM
Machine parameter 77
Bit 0 1” and Yd K commands from RAM or EPROM
+ 0 ^ 1” and 2”” K commands from RAM
-i- 1 6 1”’ and 2”’ K commands from EPROM
Bit 1’ 3” K commands from RAM or EPROM”“’

+ 0 - 3’” K commands from EPROM
-t 1 A 3’” K commands from RAM
Note:
The PLC-program in the RAM-memow IS checked after control switch-on. An erroneous program is erased and the following
error message IS dIsplayed:
PLc: PROGRAM MEMORY ERASED

for PLGpmgmmmlng
ode is selected some of the keys on the keyboard ara assigned for programming functions. A PLC
overlay shows the appropriate key designations.
PLC-modes
PLC-editing mode
Key designation is
TNC-Symbol PLC-Symbol
Clears tile actual PLC-command VD
Description of the PLC-commands see sheets P2/1 - PZ/ll
value (0 3023)
Issue Section Page

PLC-Description 4
April 4. 89 P4
PLC-modes
PLC-editing mode
I
Programming PLC-eammands
Termination of operand entry by
Programming the NOP PLC-command: m press

Note:
Free command lines are displayed on the VDIJ as NOP’s.
Call-up of a specific PLC-command
Press the @j key.

Dialogue display: GOT0 PGM-ZEILE = 0
Enter numerical value: buttons m m and terminate /

entry with @ key (perml “,I”-70 - 3071).
I
I The entered block is dlsplaved. I
Message translation:
GOT0 PGM-ZEILE = GOT0 PGM LINE
-
Februarv 8. 90
PLC-modes
PLC-editing mode
Sequential checking of PLC-commands
Select the command number from which the program is

to be checked with the a key.
I
i
With the Cursor key 181 or m page

I forwards or rwerse I
I 1
Entering PLC-commands into an existing program
Mered with the
April 4, 89
PLC-modes
PLC-editing r node
Deleting B PLC-program
Press the m key.
Transfer of a PLC-pkogram from EPROM to RAM storage
Press m key.
YES
PLC-PROGRAMM LOESCHEN= ERASE PLC PROGRAM
PROGRAMM AuS EPROM UEBERNEHMEN = TRANSFER PROGRAM FROM EPROM
ISSUe Section PaBe

PLC-Descript 80”
April 4. 89 I P4 7
PLC-modes
PLC-editing mode
) Input/output of PLC-programs on disc, magnetic tape or printer
External output External input

in ASCII or binary code in ASCII code
Dialogue display: EXTERNE DATEN-EINGAEE

Data transfer is started.
Data output with binary chara’
Dialogue display. EXTERNE DATEN-AUSGABE ia ague ques ion:

Data transfer is started. Enter block No. and press
I
$
Dialogue question: AUSGABE MS PGM-ZEILE = 0
Enter block No. and press m.
I
Continued in the diagrams Dialogue display: EXTERNE DATEN-AUSGABE

on the next sheet
Data transfer is started.
* With the disc unit FE 401

a bInan/ code output is only
-\
!q”esu”,l.Ytb
QUERVERWEIS-LISTE 7
II “ldl”y”e
_’
u,sIJ,q. CA I ErllYC “HI CI”-C\“J”WIDE
Issue Section me
PLC-Description
April 4. 89 P4 8
/ I 1
- ENT = EXTERNAL INPLIT/OLlTWT ENT/NO - ENT
ENT/NO - ENT
Inue Bootion
lril 4, 89 P4
Binary out of user-cyolea for compiling a PKSEPROM
*
Read-out all user cycles within EPROM
Set cursor to required program number:

i ~~SS~~~~.
Tran fer selected program to tape or disc:
select next program number etc.
omplete data output from EPROM:

Press a.
Fin/lily. control outputs user-cycles from
RAM-store.
Please nota: I
f the HEIDENHAIN magnetic tape unit, floppy disc unit or another peripheral unit, program sections within the
be shifted. For this, the program section to be shifted has to be read-out. With a new read-in. the program
ed to the command number which has been entered in response to the dialogue question “INPUT FROM
Issue Section
PLC-Decwiptlon
Fe wary 8. 90 P4
PLC-modes
PLC-trace mode
The PLC-trace mode is accessed via the mode key (see sheet P4/1).
G!
The screen display is as follows:
In tt , may be verified Alongside the PLC-commands is

dispiayea me oi ma operanos ano ~“a cumuawe
cumulative result of the logic sequences.
(The individual status of thn operands is shown in the left hand column).
The PLC-trace mode may be used during machine operation. First the NC-program must be started and then PLC-trace mode
accessed via entry of the code number 951026.
In the PLC-oueratina modes ‘ifrace” and “Editina”.

I inouts. outouts. counters. timers and markers can be sought using the
key.
I
Issue Section Page

April 4. 89 PLC-Description
P4 10
PLC-modes
PLC-tables E/A/Z/T/M
Select the “Operand display” mode by pressing the key (see sheet P4/1).
The VDU-display shows the following dialogue:
TABELLE E/ARil/M
By pressing the respective operand key the states of all the
Inputs : kev
Outputs : kev
Counters : kev
Timers : W
Markers : W
are displayeci on the VDU.
The cuwx keys enable a soecified ooerand to be hiahliohted

I I in werse videcbon th P VDIJ-dinnlnv in
order that the l&C stat; of an be easily observed.
Marker logic state dlspiay:

As only 120 markers cal be displayed simultaneously. the @J key and the entry of a numerical value selects some other
marker range.
In the PLC-mode “TAEELLE E/NW/M” the buttons can be used to set and reset inputs. outputs. counters.
timers and markers.
The VDlJdisplays the following le. g. the logic input states):
TABELLE VA/UT/M = TABLES E-lnputs/A-outputs/Z-coufl~ers/T-timers/M-markers
of the PLC
An off-line pr is not currenth/ available from HEIDENHAIN. This section provides information as to the
format of the so that off-line programming terminal suppliers can develop a terminal for the HEIDENHAIN-PLC
if necessary.
NOW
Wiiliexternal rogramming, comments following PLC-commands must be separated from the PLC-command by the cherac-
ter l .
PLC-comma fompt
Every PLC-co mand requires a 16 bit word i:e 2 bytes are defined in the PLC-command memory.
An command consists of a 4 bit KC-operation code and the 12 bit PIGaddress. The PLC-operation code defines the binary
instruction an the PfX-address calls a memory location for the operands which are to be processed.
a
Lower EPR address 8. g. address 0 1 Higher EPROM address e.g. address 1
4 Bit 12 Bit
I
PtC-operation code Pi&Address
F’LC-operatlon codw for PLC-commandr
Abblwlath 1 Plkqmthoede
NOP I 0000
U 0001
UN 0010
:N 0100
0011
X0 0101
XON 0110
s 0111
SN 1000
RN
= 1011
NOP I1111
Issue Section page

PLC-Dwcriptlon
pril 4. 89 P4 12
of the PLC
for the FC-cnmmands
Address al kit ion of PLC-commends

I
PLC-Operand msb - PLC-Address EPROM-Address 0
1 PLC-Address 1 Isb EPROM-Address 1
PLC-Operandi I1 msb - PLC-Address EPROM-Address 2
PLC-Address Isb EPROM-Address 3
PLC-Operand11 msb - PLC-Address EPROM-Address 4
PLC-Address 1 Isb EPROM-Address 5
EPROM-Address 4094
EPROM-Address 4095
Address 8191
AIssue
Dril 4, 89
Section
P4
of the PLC
ion
for
PIGEPROM
stored within an EPROM HN 27512.
0000 -iK$zxl
1000 Assembler command: Return jump into main program
1002 Jump addresses for macro-programs
1042 ascending as of address 1042
descending as of address 1FFE
2000
2CBo
3900
39oc
FDEC
FFEC vat nt
FFFE CR -sums
FFFF l-7
lawe SSlOtiOll me
PLGDasoription * P4 14
pril 4, 89
Exchange of PLC-EPROM’s
The PLC-program together with internal PLC-software and PLC-dialoaue messaoes ” are .~~
oefmanantlv
~I stored
~~~ on an EPROM type
HN 27512 (address locations see sheet P4/14).
The EPROM is found on the first circuit board under the control cov’er plate. It car&$ the desianation 6 (the
spaces represent variable characters).
Note:
The PLC-software number can be displayed in “MOD” mode (see operating manual).
The EPROM location can be seen in the following diagrams:
I
Customer specific PLC-programs can be fined beiore deiivey of the control I: no par;icular PLC-program IS specified the
control will be delivered with the HEIDENHAIN standard PLC-program.
For more detailed information contact your local HEIDENHAIN office.
issue PLC-Description
Section Page
Aor 4. 89 P5 1
markers for signal exchange between
0 to M 1999 are either user markers of markers for signal exchange between PLC and NC depending on the
M 2496 (see sheet P3/l2).
2016 Release V-axis (NC-axis) P3/3B

2017 V-axis (NC-axis) in position P3/3B
2022 Probe system not readv P3/31
2023 Stvlus elreadv deflected at start of probing cycle P3/31
2024 Probing system ready (TS 511) P3/31
2025 Stvlus deflected. Probing procedure completed. P3/31
2026 Probing procedure completed I
P3/31
2027 11I Battery voitaae
- too low (TS 5111 II P3/31 I
2032
2033 1. Bit T-Coda (Isb)
11 2. I P3/9 1
2034 3. Bii T-Code w9
2035 4. Bit T-Code w9
2036 5. Bit T-Coda I
P3/9
~‘~
I
2037 6. Bit T-Code 1 w9

2038 11 7. Bit T-Code I P3/9
2039 8. Bit T-Code (msb) m/9
2041 English dialogue ,language is selected P3/41
2042 Control operates with S-analoaue P3/13
2043 Change sign21 G-Code for S-analogua P3/13
2044 Change signal S-Code P3/9
2045 Change signal M-Code P3/9
2046 Change signal T-Code P3/9
2047 Change signal 2”d T-Code (see machine parameter 157) P3/9
2048 Tapping cycle is called P3/41
2049 Background editing mode P3/17
leaue SOOtiOhl Mle

lulril 4. 89 PLC-Dwaiptlon
P6 1
List markers for signal exchange between
PLC 4a d NC
II
2050 Programming 1 P3117

2051 11Manual operation I P3/17
2052 11Electronic handwheel I P3/17
2053 Positioning with MDI P3/17
2054 Program run single block P3/17
2055 Program run full sequence P3/17
2056 Program test P3/17
2057 Approach to reference point P3/17
2060 Marker for DIN/IS0 programming (from NC No. 05) P3/41
2061 Marker showing activation of END-PGM. M02, M30 (from NC No. 05) P3/41
2062 Marker for display “coda number” P3/27
2063 Marker for central tool file P3/41
2064 iI 1. 8ii S-Code llsbl
II
I P3/9
I
2065 2. 8ii S-Coda 1 Pw

2066 113. Bit S-Code I P3.19
2067 4. 8ii S-Code w9
2068 5. 8ii S-code R/9
2069 6. 8ii S-Code w9
2070 7. 8ii S-Code w9
2071 8. 8ii S-Code (msb) WE
2072 1. Bit M-Code (Isb) w9
2073 2. Bit M-Code WE
2074 3. Eli M-Code WE
2075 4. Bit M-Code w9
2076 5. Bit M-Code WE
2077 6. 8ii M-Code P3/9
2078 7. 8ii M-Code B/9
d NC
Marker No. Function

2092 Marker for display ‘Lvrong rpm”
2093 Toolchange of special to normal tool (from NC No. 05)
2096 Currently activated TNC axis key X
2097 Currently activated TNC axis key Y
2098 Currently activated TNC axis key Z
2099 Currently activated TNC axis key IV
2100’ X-axis is tool axis
2101 Y-axis is tool axis
2102 Z-axis is tool axis
2103 N-axis is tool axis
2104 I. 9ii gear change Coda S-Analogue (Isb)
2105 2. 9ii gear change Code S-Analogue
2106 3. 8ii gear change Code S-Analogue (msb)
2112 Tool pocket number 1” decade (Isb)
2113 Tool pocket number I* decade
2114 Tool pocket number 1” decade
II
2115 11Tool pocket number 1” decade (msb)
2116 11Tool pocket number 2”d decade (Isb)
2117 Tool pocket number 2”d decade
2118 Tool pocket number 2”d decade
2119 II
Tool pocket number 2”d decade (msb),
2128 Traversing of X-axisno’
2129 11Traversing of Y-axisnor
2130 Traversing of Z-axisno’
2131 Traversing of IV-axisno
2148 I,
Currentlv activated TNC axis kev V
2160 11I-averse direction X-axis””
2161 11Traverse direction Y-axis””
2162 Traverse direction Z-axis””
2163 Traverse direction N-axis”‘)
2176 Code operating mode (Isb)
2177 Code operating mode
2178 Code operating mode P3/17
2179 Code operating mode (msb) P3/17
0000 = Programming
0001 = Manual operation
0010 = Electronic handwheel
0011 = Positioning with MDI
0100 = Program run single block
2180
0101 = Program run full sequence
18’PLC-cycle run after power on 7
P3/40
Issue Section ml@

FLC-Deeoription 3
pril 4, 89 P6
d NC
I
Issue s&Ion -90
PLC-DoBulption P6 3.1
April 4. 99
List 0 markers for signal exc~hange between
PLC a Id NC
Marker NC Function
Markers influenced by machine parameter 158
2192 (value 1) P3/42
2193 (Value 2) P3/42
2194 (Value 4) P3/42
2195 (Value 8) P3/42
2196 (Value 16) P3/42
2197 (Value 32) P3/42
2198 (Value 64) P3/42
2199 (Value 128) P3/42
2200 (Value 256) P3/42
2201 (Value 512) P3/42
2202 (Value 1024) P3/42
2203 (Value 2048) P3/42
2204 (Value 4096) P3/42
2205 (Value 8 192) P3/42
2206 (Value 16384) P3/42
2207 (Value 32768) P3l42
Markers affected by machine parameter 249
(Value 1) P3/43
2209 Wslue 21 P3/43
2210 (Value 4) P3/43
I ~’
2211 (Value 8) 1 P3143
2212 (Value 16) I P3143
2213 (Value 32) P3143
2214 (Value 64) P3143
2215 (Value 128) P3/43
2216 (Value 256)
2217 (Value 512)
2216 (Value 1024) P3/43
2219 (Value 2048) P3143
2220 (Value 40961 P3/43
I -’ ~-
2221 (Value 8 192) P3/43
2222 (Value 16384) I P3143
2223 (Value 32768) P3/43
Markers affected by machine parameter 250
2224 (Value 1) P3/43
2225 (Value 2) P3/43
2226 (Value 4) PM3
2227 (Value 8) p3143
2228 (Value 16) p3/43
2229 (Value 32) P3/43
2230 (Value 64) P3/43
I
2231 (Value 128) 1 P3/43
IWO Sootion me
PLC-Dercriptloil
ril 4, 89 m 4
I
Ieulo PLC-Dwcrlpuon ‘3ectlon
ril 4, 99 P6 T
d MC
Marker No. Function SectkdPege

2448 NC-start P3/22
2449 NC-rapid P3/22
2450 Memory function for manual traversing P3/22
2451 Feed release P3/22
2452 Start PLC-positioning X-axis P3/7
I -‘.
2453 Start PLC-positioning Y-axis 1 P3f7
2454 11Start PLC-positioning Z-axis I P3/7
2455 Start PLC-positioning N-axis P3l7
2456 Manual traversing X+ P3/22
2457 Manual traversing X- P3/22
2458 Manual traversing Y+ P3/22
2459 Manual traversing Y- P3/22
2460 Manual traversing Z+ P3/22
2461 Manual traversing Z- P3/22
2462 Manual traversing IV+ P3/22
2463 Manual traversing IV- P3/22
2464 Complemented NC-start P3/22
2465 Complemented NC-rapid P3122
2466 Complemented memory function for manual traversing P3l22
2467 Complemented feed release Pw22
II I ~‘~~
2468 Complemented stat? PLC-positioning X-axis Pw7
2469 11Complemented start PLC-positioning Y-axis I P3/7
2470 Complemented start PLC-positioning Z-axis P3/7
2471 Complemented start PLC-positioning N-axis P3/7
2472 Complemented manual traverse X+ P3/22
2473 Complemented manual traverse X- P3/22
2474 Complemented manual traverse Y+ I
P3/22
2475 Complemented manual traverse Y- P3/22
2476 Complemented manual traverse Z+ 1 P3/22
Irue Section Page

April 4. 89 m 6
markers for signal exchange betwean
d NC
Marker No. Funotion seotion/Pego

2489 Inversion of analogue voltage P3/13
2490 Spindle ccw for gear change P3/13
2491 Spindle cw for gear change P3/13
2492 Activation control loop opening X-axis P3.14
2493 Activation control IOODopenina- Y-axis Pw4
II I -’
2494 Activation control loop opening Z-axis 1 P3/4
2495 Activation control loop opening IV-axis I P3/4
2513 X- Start marker for jog positioning P3/32

2514 Y+ Start marker for jog positioning P3/32
2515 Y- Start marker for .ioc-. positionina P3/32
2516 Zi Start marker for jog positioning P3/32
2517 Z- Start marker for jog positioning P3/32
2518 IV+ Start marker for jog positioning P3/32
2519 IV- Start marker for jog positioning P3/32
2520 V+ Start marker for .ioc-. cositionino P3/38
2521 V- Start marker for jog positioning P3/38
2522 Start PLC-positioning V-axis (NC-axis) P3/39
2524 Manual traversing V+ P3/38
2525 Manual traversing V- P3/38
2526 Switching to the fourth axis P3/34
2527 Start PLC-positioning V-axis (spindle orientation) P3/37
2528 X+ Complement marker for jog positioning P3/32
2529 X- Complement marker for jog positioning P3/32
2530 Y+ Complement marker for jog positioning P3/32
ISWO seotlon
FLC-Deaorlption
April 4, 89 P6 7
d NC
Function sacuon/mge
Y- Complement marker for jog positioning P3/32
Z+ Complement marker for joa positioning P3/32
Z- Complement marker for jog positioning P3/32
IV+ Complement marker for jog positioning P3/32
N- Complement marker for jog positioning P3/32
V+ Complement marker for jog positioning P3/38
V- Complement marker for jog positioning P3/38
Complement PLC-positioning V-axis (NC-axis) P3/38
Complement manual traverse V+ W38
Complement manual traverse V- P3/38
2542 Complement marker for marker 2526 P3/34
2643 Complement PLC-positionina V-axis (spindle orientetionl P3/37
2544 Open control loop X-axis P3/4
2545 Open control loop Y-axis p3/4
2546 Open control loop Z-axis P3/4
2547 Open control loop IV-axis P3/4
2548 Reset accumulated distance in X-axis for trawl-deoendent lubrication P3/6
Reset accumulated distance in Y-axis for trevel-dependent lubrication W6
Reset accumulated distance in Z-axis for travel-dependent lubrication P3/6
Reset accumulated distance in IV-axis for travel-dependent lubrication I=316
Transfer actual position value X-axis P3/5
Transfer actual oosition value Y-axis P3/5
Transfer actual position value Z-axis P3/5
Transfer actual position value IV-axis P3/5
2556 Reference end position X-axis P3/22
2557 Reference end position Y-axis P3/22
2558 Reference end oosition Z-axis P3/22
Reference end position N-axis P3/22
PLC-position X-axis (Isb): tool number 1” decade (Isb): P3/7; P3/46; P3/29
numerical value 1’ decade (Isb)
PLC-position X-axis; tool number 1” decade: P3/7: P3/46; P3/29
numerical value 1” decade
PLC-position X-axis; tool number 1” decade; P3/7; P3/46; P3/29
numerical value 1” decade
PLC-position X-axis; tool number 1” decade (msb): P3/7; P3/46; P3/29
numerical value 1” decade (msb)
PLC-position X-axis (msb); tool number 2”d decade (Isb): P3/7: P3/46; P3/29
numerical value 2”d decade (Isb)
PLC-position Y-axis (Isb); tool number 2”d decade; P3/7: P3/46: P3/29
numerics1 value 2”’ decade
PLC-position Y-axis; tool number 2”d decade; P3/7: P3/46: P3/29
numerical value 2”d decade
luua Section ww
PIGDwctiption
April 4, 89 p6 8
List 0 markers for signal exchange between
PLCa Id NC
Marker No Function s-w

2567 PLC-position Y-axis; tool number Zti decade (msb): P3/7: P3/46; P3/29
numerical vslua 2* decade (msb)
2568 PLC-position Y-axis: numerical value 3’ decade (Isb) P3/7: P3/29;
2569 PLC-position Y-axis (msb); numerical value 3” decade P3/7: P3/29:
2570 PLC-position Z-axis (Isb); numerical value 3” decade P3/7: P3/29:
2571 PLC-position Z-axis; numerical value 3’ decade (msb) P3/7: P3/29;
2572 PLC-position Z-axis; tool number 1” decade (Isb); P3/7; P3/46; P3/29
numerical value 4m decade (Isb)
2573 PLC-position Z-axis; tool number 1” decade: P3/7: P3/46: P3/29
numerical value 4s’ decade
2574 PLC-position Z-axis (msb); tool number 1” decade; P3/7: P3/46: P3/29
numerical value 4m decade
2575 PLC-position (V-axis (Isb); tool number 1’” decade (msb); P3/7: P3/46; P3/29
numerical value 4’ decade (msb)
2576 PLC-position IV-axis: tool number Znddecade (Isb): P3/7: P3/46; P3/29
numerical value sign
2577 PLC-position W-axis: tool number 2”d decade P3/7; P3/46
2578 PLC-position IV-axis: tool number 2sd decade P3/7; P3/46
2579 PLC-position IV-axis (msb); tool number Znd decade (msb) P3/7: P3/46
I ‘. ~‘~
2580 PLC-position V-axis (Isb) 1 P3/37; P3/38
2581 PLC-position V-axis 1 P3/37; P3/38
2582 PUSposition V-axis P3/37; P3/38
2583 PLC-position V-axis P3/37; P3/38
2584 PLC-position V-axis (msb) P3/37; P3/38
2590 Designation of axis to be switched to I@ axis (Isb) P3/34
2591 Designation of axis to be switched to I@ axis (msb) P3/34
Output of tool number in addition to pocket number (from NC No. 09) P3/45
2596 Central tool file accessed during program run (from NC No. 07) P3/41
2598 Marker for tool number transfer (from NC No. 06) P3/45
I
2599 Marker for tool number transfer (from NC No. 06) P3/45
2600 Marker for pocket number (from NC No. 05) I P3/45
2601 Marker for location of special tool (from NC No. 06) P3/45
2602 Designation of reference mark approaches P3/33
2603 Axis sequence for reference mark approach (Isb) (from NC No. 07) P3/33
2604 Axis sequence for reference mark approach (from NC No. 07) P3/33
2607 Axis sequence for reference mark approach (msb) (from NC No. 07) P3/33
2656 Spindle orientation from standstill (from NC No. 06) P3/37
2657 Display of second auxiliary function (msb) (from NC No. 06) P3/27
Section Me
FLC-Deeoription
ril 4. 89 p6 9
Marker No. Function 1 SeoUodPage

2664 11No standstill supervision on X-axis””
II P313
t 2665 No standstill supervision on Y-axis”” I P3/3
P313
P3/3
P3/38
P3/1%
P3/16
P3/18
P3/18
P3/18
P3/18
!=3/18
2821 11Strobe for central tool file update (from NC No. 06) P3/46
2822 11Strobe for %-factor of spindle analogue (from NC No. 07) I P3/35
t 2823 11Selection of soindle analowe ramps (from NC No. 09) P3ll4
Ieauo Saction mle

PLGDWWipthl
April 4. 89 Fe 10
List of markers for signal exchange between
PLC and NC -
1
Issue Section me
PLC-Description
April 4. 89 P6 11
List of markers for signal exchange b&w
PLC and NC
P3/20
P3/20
/ P3/21
IO 0010 P3/21
/
/ / /
/ P3/21
P3/2 1
P3/21
1.0 1000 P3/21
2903 /m Inhibit 01
2904 /m Inhibit 0110 1100 / I P3/2i I
2905 1m Inhibit 01
2914 jm Inhibit 0111 0110 P3/2 1
Issue Section mle

PLC-Description P6 12
April 4. 89
List of markers for signal exchange between
PLC and NC
Function 1 Kev-C&
2916
/
Errormessa9e 15 P3/24-
Error message 16 P3/24
Error meSSaae 17 I I P3124
d NC
Marker No. Funotlon
Irua seotkul fwle

pril 4, 8.9 P6 14
2999 Error message 75 P3/25

3008 User-parameter 18 P3/26
3014 User-parameter 10 P3.126
3021 User-parameter 3 P3126
Issue Seotlon
PLGDwodptlon
April 4, 89 P8 2
uts on logic unit LE 355
EO
El
E2
E3
E4
E.5
E6
E7
I
E8
E9
E 13
E 14 I I
E 15
E 16
E 17
E 18
E 19
E 20 I I
E 22 I I
E 27
E 28
E 29
E 30
E 31
E 128
kue sotkul
PLC-Deecription
pril 4, 89 P7
ramming sheets
on input/output board PL 300
I Input I Icomments I Input Commenta

E 63 E 103
E 64 El04
E 65 E 105
E 66 E 106
E 107
E 68 E 108
E 69 I I E 109 I
E 70 El10
E 71 El11 I
I
E 72 El12
E 73 1 El13 I
E 74 E 114
I
E 75 El15
E 78 E 116
E 77 E 117
E 78 E 118
E 79 El19
E80 E 120
E 81 E 121
E82 E 122
E 83 E 123
E84 E 124
E 85 E 125
E 88 I
E 126
E 87
E 88
1 E89 I II t
E 90
E 91
E 92
E 93
E 94
E 95
E 96
E 97
E 98
I
E 99
E 100 I
lrue Section
PLGDesorlptlon P7 T
pril 4. 89
sheets
PLC-outputs on
input/output board PL 300
I output I I Comments I OvtpM 1 Oommsnte
A0 A32 I
Al A33
‘A2 A34 I
A3 A 36
A4 A 36
I
A5 A 37
A6 I A 38
A7 A 39
A8 A40
A 41
A 42
A43
A44
A 45
A 14 A46
Al5 A 47
A 16 A48 !
A 17 A 49
A 18 A 50 I
I
A 19 A 51
A 20 A 52
A 21
A 22
A 23
A 24
A 25
A 26 A 58
A 27 A 59
A 28 A 60
A 29 A 61 I
A 30
ISSUO Section me
FW-DO9OtiptiOll
ril 4. 89 P7 3
sheets
Marker No. [ 1 Comments Marker No. 1 Comment8

0 I I 0 I
I
8 8
I
9 9
0 0
1
7 II
8 6
9 9 I
0
1 1
2 I I 2
3 3 I
I
4 4
5
6
7
8
9 I
7 I I
9 I
0 0 I
Isum Section
PLC-mrlption P7
&ril 4. 89
sheets
Commnnd No. Command commente

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2 I
3
4 I I I
6
7 I
8
9
0
I
Ieeuo PLC-DuaiptiOll
SSOtbll
April 4, 89 P7
Cont nts
8 .*
Section Page
General info math PSl 1
citatemailt list PS2 1
Functions of markers, inputs, outputs and timers F33 1

Functions of narkers PS3 1
Functions of ir1put.s PS3 4
Functions of cutputs Ps3 5
Functions of t mers PS3 6
Cruss refemr ce lists Ps4 1

Cross referencle list for markers Ps4 1
Cross reference list for inputs Ps4 4
Cross reference list for outputs PS4 5
Cross reference list for timers PS4 6
Issue
Nov mber 21.89 I
Ftc-etandrrd pfowm
I-I PSO
hoe
1
I I I
Gene$l Information
described here has the Ident-Nr. 24040205.
Contouring Controls as of software number 23732005 (TNC 3558/Q) or as of software

unless the machine manufacturer requests a special PLC program.
The statement list is provided with commentaries marked with an asterisk “*I, The commentaries are not stored in the TNC,
The statement are numbered sequentialh/
- - ,
No
IIIbelle
Iber 21, 89
PLC-standard program
Statetlnent list
various locations activste a signal
of the PLC program
h the first PLC cycle and set enable markers

2180 l l* PLC run-through after power on
2185 ’ 1” PLC run-through after interruption of PLC-standard program
2499 * Inhibit control loop spindle axis
ed M-functions
2496 l Enable marker decoded M-code output Ml 900-l 999
* Enable marker decoded M-code output M 1900-l 999
. ..**...*.... ..~.~....~...~...f...“..~“...~..~...~..~~.....~..~..
* Decode op rating modes

6 0 ;iEy * Operating mode: programming and ediiing
7 0 * Operating mode: manual operation
2052 * Operating mode: electronic handwheel
E 2057 l Traversing the reference point
10 = 908 * Manual operating mode
t
11 0 2053 * Single block positioning via manual data input (MDI)
12 0 2054 l Single block program run
13 0 2065 * Automatic program run
14 = 909 l Controlling operating mode
4
. .~*~.r*...*.,.*...+*.*....**..*..**..*..~~..**..*.*..*.*..**...**
* CNC Stop k ys invert depending on MP 158
15 X0 E 130 * Spindle and feed stop

16 XON 2207 l Set vis MP 158 significance 32768
17 = * Spindle and feed (inverted if MP 158 > 32768)

I 902
* STOP key
* Set via MP 158 significance 32788
l CNC stop key (inverted if MP 158 > 32768)
eIuue
Nov mber 21, 89 I
plsutfandard pmgmn
Stateinent list
* Enable X-axis
’ Enable X-axis
* Enable Y-axis
* Enable .Y-axis
2003 l Enable 4* axis
* Enable 4m axis
2016 * Enable 5* axis

* Enable 5* axis
‘00 u
* 00 =
* ..*...*...‘.+.*..~.“.~~“.*“...*..*~..**..**.**..*...~..~“.~....*.
l Manual tra I of tool axes through the machine operator
* e.g. with ht nd crank
31 u l Input for opening the position control loop
32 = E * Buffered marker manual activation

33 = 1 919 * Manual activation
’ Input E 144 debouncing

34u 144 * Input for opening the position control loops
35 = 4 917 l Buffered marker manual activation
* Manual activation
l Activation control loop inhibit for the X-axis
* Activation control loop inhibit for the Y-axis
* Activation control loop inhibit for the Z-axis
* Activation control loop inhibit for the 4’” axis
* Activation control loop inhibit for the 5’” axis
leaue Seotion ml@

b
NW mber 21, 89 I P92 2
Statement list
. . ..~*..*.*ff*.f*..l*..*~..*~.**..**..~..~~..*~.**~.*..~*..*...*..
’ Inhibit the control loops for the XNjZf4’h/5’h axis if it is in position and manual activation is active,
42 U M919 * Manual activation
43 U M 2008 * The X-axis is in position
44 = M 930 l Manual and X-axis in position
45 S i’A931 * Transfer actual position value to nominal value X-axis
46 U IA919 * Manual activation

47 U M 2009 l The X-axis is in position
48 = M 932 ’ Manual and Y-axis in position

49 s m 933 ’ Transfer actual position value to nominal value Y-axis
50 U PA919 l Manual activation
51 U M 2010 * The Z-axis is in position

52 = IA 934 * Manual and Z-axis in position
53 s m 935 * Transfer actual position value to nominal value Z-axis
54 u m919 * Manual activation

55 U M2011 * The 41haxis is in position
56 = i'A936 * Manual and 4* axis in position
57 s M 937 l Transfer actual position value to nominal value 4m axis
58 U M919 * Manual activation

59 U M 2017 l The Sm axis is in position
60 = M 938 * Manual end 51haxis in position

61 S FA939 * Transfer actual position value to nominal value 51haxis
* f*~.f**.**..~..~~..~...*...**..*...*.*~*..”..~~...~.~*..*..*~.*..
* Activated feed enable after closing of position control loop
an indirect OR gating
* Triggering of timer 15 MP 125 in 20 ms units
* **..*..**..* .***..~..f...f~*.**.**..**.~*..~~.~*..*,..*..*.*.*..
l Teach-in in nominal value if marker 2206 = 1
l activated t rough MP 158
64 UN 930 l Manual and X-axis in position
65 U 931 * Transfer actual position value to nominal value X-axis

66 u 2206 ’ Is set via MP 158 significance 16384
67 = 2552 * Teach-in in control loop X-axis
68 s l Triggering of timer 15 MP 125 in 20 ms units
69 R El * Transfer actual position value to nominal value X-axis

i
70 UN 932 * Manual and Y-axis in position
71 u 933 l Transfer actual position value to nominal value Y-axis
72 U 2206 ’ Is set via MP 158 significance 16384

73 = 2553 * Teach-in in control loop Y-axis
74 s 15 l Triggering of timer 15 MP 125 in 20 ms units
75 R 933 * Transfer actual position value to nominal value Y-axis
lsaue Section mge

PLC-stmnlard pmgfam PS2 3
November 21.89
Statetlnent list
76 UN M 934 l Manual and Z-axis in postiin
77 u M 935 * Transfer actual position value to nominal value Z-axis

78 u M 2206 * Is set via MP 158 significance 16384
79 = 2554 * Teach-in in control loop Z-axis
80 s I: l Triggering of timer 15 MP 125 in 20 ms units
81 R M A:5 * Transfer actual position value to nominal value Z-axis
82 UN M 936 * Manual and 4’” axis in position

83 u M 937 l Transfer actual position value to nominal value 4’” axis
84 u M 2206 * Is set via MP 158 significance 16384

85 = M 2555 * Teach-in in control loop 4* axis
86 S T * Triggering of timer 15 MP 125 in 20 ms units
87 R M ::7 l Transfer actual position value to nominal value 4th axis
88 UN M 938 * Manual and 5’” axis in position

89 U M 939 l iransfer actual position valua to nominal value 5’” axis
90 U M 2206 * Is set via MP 158 significance 16384

91 = W 2505 l Teach-in in control loop Sm exis
92 s T * Triggering of timer 15 MP 125 in 20 ms units

93 R w ii9 * Transfer actual position value to nominal 5* axis
. *~..........I....*..t**.....*..l*..~~.~**..*..**.**..**.*...*..”~
* Address markers for the opening of the control loop
940 T15 * Triggering of timer 15 MP 125 in 20 ms units
95 0 T l Timer 15 is running (delay feed enable)
96 = ,yl ii0 * Delay time
97 u 930 * Manual and X-axis in position

98 UN 2552 l Actual value transfer in control loop X-axis
99 s 2544 * Inhibit control loop X-axis
100 u 930 l Manual and X-axis in position

101 UN 2552 * Actual value transfer in control loop X-axis
102 0 940 ’ Delay time
103 RN 1 2544 * Inhibit control loop X-axis
104 u 932 * Manual and Y-axis in position

105 UN 2553 * Actual value transfer in control loop Y-axis
106 S k 2545 * Inhibit control loop Y-axis
107 u 932 ” Manual end Y-axis in position

108 UN 2553 * Actual value transfer in control loop Y-axis
109 0 940 * Delay time
110 RN 2545 * Inhibit control loop Y-axis
1
111 u 934 l Manual and Z-axis in position
118 UN 2554 * Actual value transfer in control loop Z-axis
113 s 2546 l Inhibit control loop Z-axis
1
l Manual and Z-axis in position
’ Actual value transfer in control loop Z-axis
* Delay time
* Inhibit control loop Z-axis
ISWe Section me
PLC-etandard program 4
Nov mber 21. 89 PS2
Statebent list
118 U M 936 l Manual and 4’” axis in position
119 UN M 2555 * Actual value transfer in control loop 4* axis

120 s M 2547 l Inhibit control loop 4rh axis
121 u M 936 * Manual and 4’r’ axis in position

122 UN M 2555 l Actual value transfer in control loop 4* axis
123 0 M 940 * Delay time

124 RN M 2547 l Inhibit control loop 4m axis
125 U M 938 * Manual and 51haxis in position

126 UN M 2507 l Actual value transfer in control loop 5”’ axis
127 S M 2505 l Inhibit control loop 5* axis
128 U M 938 l Manual and 5’” axis in position
129 UN M 2507 * Actual value transfer in control loop 51haxis

130 0 M940 ’ Delay time
131 RN M 2505 l Inhibit control loop 51haxis
. ~.**.***..**.‘lf..**.“.*...~~.*~.**~.**..**.~~~.~~...*~..**.*....~
* Spindle stop and feed stop
.
* Delay time 1 1 TE 1

* Interrupt sp ndle and feed

134 u M 902 * Spindle and feed stop (inverted is MP 158 > 32768)
135 UN M914 l Spindle stop and feed stop
136 S M 914 ” Spindle stop and feed stop

137 s M 916 l Feed stop via input E 130 on keyboard
138 S ;T 16 * Triggering of timer 16 MP 193 in 20 ms units
* Re-enable pindle and feed

139 u E 132 * Start key
140 u M 914 * Spindle stop and feed stop
141 R M 914 l Spindle stop and feed stop
142 S T 16 * Triggering of timer 16 MP 193 in 20 ms units
’ 2 sW$b!;play
Spindle stop and feed stop
l Triggering of timer 16 MP 193 in 20 ms units
145 UN T 64 * Timer 16 running (delay time spindle feed stop)
146 = ,M 915 l Spindle stop via input E 130 on keyboard
l Enable feed after cancelation S stop and F stop

147 U IM 916 * Feed stop via input E 130 on keyboard
148 UN M 914 l Spindle stop and feed stop
149 UN T 16 * Triggering of timer 16 MP 193 in 20 ms units

150 UN T 64 l Timer 16 running (delay time spindle feed stop)
151 R ,M 916 * Spindle stop via input E 130 on keyboard
issue PIGetendard program

section me
Nov mber 21, 89 I PS2 5
Statehent list
stop and feed stop reset after CNC program interrupt

l Spindle stop and feed stop
* Control in operation (permanent operation pilot)

l Spindle stop end feed stop
* Spindle stop through the input E 130 of the keyboard

* Feed stop through the input E 130 of the keyboard
* Clear stored spindle marker after CNC program interrupt
f ..*..*..**,. *...*.*f*..**.*“..........*......**.**..*......*....
i
* Feed enebl for tool axes
158 R 2451 * Feed enable
159 RN 2451 l Feed enable
160 s Ii 2467 * Complemented feed enable
161 SN 2467 * Complemented feed enable
162 UN [ 15 * Triggering of timer 15 MP 125 in 20 ms units

163 UN l Timer 15 running (delay feed enable)
164 UN M ::6 * Feed stop via input E 130 of keyboard

165U E5 * Feed enable for the tool axes
166 s VI 2451 l Feed enable
167 R VI 2467 * Complemented feed enable

. *...*...*.*.,.****.......................*.......................
* Clearing the key markers
168 0 VI0 * End of logical chain !!
169 ON VI0 l End of logical chain II
170 R VI 2448 * NC start

171 R VI 2449 l NC rapid traverse
172 R V 2450 * Store function for manual traverse
173 R M 2456 * Manuel traverse X+
174 R M 2457 * Manual traverse X-
175 R W 2458 l Manuel traverse Y+
176 R M 2459 l Manual traverse Y-
177 R M 2460 * Manuel traverse Z+
178 R p 2461 l Manual traverse Z-
179 R 2462 * Manual traverse 41haxis +
180 R 2463 * Manual traverse 4’” axis -
181 R 2524 * Manual traverse 5” axis +
182 R 2525 l Manual traverse 51haxis -
I
Issue t%OtiOll me
November 21, 89 PS2 6
Statebent list
183 s M 2464 * Complemented NC start

184 S M 2465 ” Complemented NC rapid traverse
185 S M 2466 * Complemented memon/ function for manual traverse
186 s M 2472 * Complemented manual traverse X+
187 S M 2473 l Complemented manual traverse X-
188 s M 2474 * Complemented manual traverse Y+
189 S M 2475 * Complemented manual traverse Y-
190 s M 2476 * Complemented manual traverse Z+
191 s M 2477 * Complemented manual traverse Z-
192 s M 2478 ’ Complemented manual traverse 41haxis +
193 s M 2479 * Complemented manuaLtraverse 4’” axis -
194 s M 2540 * Complemented manual traverse 5’” axis +
195 s M 2541 l Complemented manual traverse 5s axis -
* CNC stop n t make-contact ??!!

196 UN PM902 ’ Spindle and feed stop (inverted if MP 158 > 32768)
197 UN M903 * CNC stop key (inverted if MP 158 > 32768)
198 = M 2488 l NC stop low active 0 = stop; 1 = not stop
199 u E 132 l Start key

200 u M 920 l Buffered marker start key
201 s M2448 ’ NC start
202 R M 2464 * Complemented NC start
l Debouncin the start key

203 U E 132 ” Start key
204 = M 920 * Buffer marker start key
\
205 U E 141 * Rapid traverse key
206 U M 921 * Buffer marker RAPID TRAVERSEkey
207 S M 2449 l NC raoid traverse
208 R /vl 2465 * Complemented NC rapid traverse
* Debouncin the rapid traverse key

209 u E 141 * Rapid traverse key
210 = “I,M 921 l Buffer marker RAPID TRAVERSEkey
* Manual trav rse store via start key

211 u M 908 * Manual operating mode
212 u M 132 * Start key
213 S iM 2450 * Store function for manual traverse
214 R IM 2466 l Complemented memory function for manual traverse
. ***.*.*.***. f~..*..ff..ff*..f*.f*..**~**..*****~.*~..*..*.**~..*
.&=s5dir;ctio button X+
l Manual operating mode
t M 908
216 U !M 138 ’ Direction button X+
217 UN E 133 * Direction button X-
218 S M 2456 l Manual traverse X+
219 R M 2472 * Complemented manual traverse X+
* 2; dircti
n button X-
M 908 l Manual operating mode
221 u 0E 133 * Direction button X-
222 UN E 138 * Direction button X+
223 S SM2457 ’ Manual traverse X-
224 R EM2473 * Complemented manual traverse X-
Issue Section
,3
Nov mber 21. 89 I
PLC-standad program PS2
State1 ent list
* Axis directi uno” Y+

225 U 908 * Manual operating mode
226 u 137 * Direction button Y+
227 UN 134 * Direction button Y-
228 s 2458 l Manual traverse Y+
229 R 2474 * Complemented manual traverse Y+
* Axis directi umon Y-

230 U 308 l Manual operating mode
231 U 134 * Direction button Y-
232 UN 137 l Direction button Y+
233 S 2459 * Manual traverse Y-
234 R 2475 l Complemented manual traverse Y-
* Axis directi unon z+

235 U 308 ’ Manual operating mode
236 U 136 * Direction button Z+
237 UN 135 l Direction button Z-
238 S 2460 * Manual traverse Z+
239 R 2476 l Complemented manual traverse Z+
l Axis diracti IUttO” z-

241 U 135 l Direction button Z-
242 UN 136 * Direction button Z+
243 S 2461 * Manual traverse Z-
244 R 2477 l Complemented manual traverse Z-
* Axis directi lutton 4* axis +

245 U 308 ’ Manual operating mode
246 U 139 l Direction button 4m axis +
247 UN 140 * Direction button 4m axis -

248 s 2462 ’ Manual traverse 4m axis +
249 R 2478 * Complemented manual traverse 41haxis +
* Axis directi Hutton4’” axis -

250 U 308 l Manual operating mode
251 U 140 * Direction button 4m axis -
j 252 UN 139 l Direction button 4m axis +
253 S 2463 ’ Manual traverse 4m axis -
254 R 2479 * Complemented manual traverse 4* axis -
* Axis directi button 5’” axis +

256 U 146 l Direction button 5* axis +
257 UN 147 * Direction button Sm axis -
258 S 2524 l Manual traverse Sm axis +
259 R 2540 ’ Complemented manual traverse Smaxis +
* Axis directi button 51haxis -

261 U 147 * Direction button 5* axis -
262 UN 146 l Direction button 5* axis +
263 S 2525 * Manual traverse 5* axis -
264 R 2541 l Complemented manual traverse 5* axis -
I8SUO Section
PLC-standard program
November 21, 89 Ps2 T
Statebent list
” **..**.**..* .**...*..*~..~..*.*f...*..**.~~~.~*..*~*.*..**..~..*
* Coolant ad4 ress of output for the coolant is set or reset in memop/
. Coolant ONI
265 0 ’ Decoded M function MO8
266 0 ’ Decoded M function Ml3
267 0 M 1914 * Decoded M function Ml4
268 U M 2045 l Change signal M code
269 s * Buffer marker for coolant on/off
* Coolant OF
270 0 l Decoded M function MO9
271 0 M 1900 * Decoded M function MOO

272 0 M 1902 l Decoded M function MO2
273 0 M 1930 * Decoded M function M30

274 U * Change signal M code
275 0 * Error message “EMERGENCYOFF” is displayed
276 R * Buffered marker for coolant on/off
” Coolant ON OFF input was not activated

277 UN 1E 129 * Coolant ON/OFF
278 S * Input E 129 was or is not activated
AMgll
* $Stch”off olant if it was ON
l Buffered marker for coolant ON/OFF
280 U * Input E 129 was or is not activated

281 U ’ Coolant ON/OFF
282 R M 910 * Buffered marker for coolant ON/OFF
283 R M 911 ’ Input E 129 was or is not activated
* ;r$h;; /k;tDifit yas OFF

Buffered marker for coolant ON/OFF
285 U M 911 l Input E 129 was or is not activated
286 U E 129 * Coolant ON/OFF

287 S M 910 * Buffered marker for coolant ON/OFF
288 R M911 ’ Input E 129 was or is not activated
283 U M 910 l Buffered marker for coolant ON/OFF
290= IL\18 ’ MO8 Coolant ON/OFF

I ..t*..t..*t. ~I...f*.*f~.~*“~~*.*~““.~*..~~.“~”.*”...~..~~.*~.**.
* Spindle addgss
* The spindle can be started from the control panel via the spindle right of spindle left; this is only possible in the
” manual ope.ating mode.
* A spindle start is conducted through the output of M03/04/13/14
* Manual star. of spindle

292 u E 142 l Spindle ON clockwise with manual operating mode
293 UN M 913 * Spindle counterclockwise with manual operating mode
234 = M 912 * Spindle clockwise with manual operating mode

296 U E 143 * Spindle ON counterclockwise with manual operating mode
297 UN iM 912 * Spindle clockwise with manual operating mode
298 = !M 913 ’ Spindle counterclockwise with manual operating mode
Issue Section
PIGetenderd pmgmm PS2
Novbmber 21.89 I
Statetjnent list
* S$idleDSta clockwise run

* Decoded M function MO3
300 0 ’ Decoded M function Ml 3
301 u * 2”d Buffered marker change signal M
302 0 . Spindle clockwise with manual operating mode
303 s * Buffered marker output MO3
304 R l Buffered marker output MO4
305 R * Buffered marker output MO5
peration counterclockwise run

l Decoded M function MO4
’ Spindle counterclockwise with manual operating mode

l Buffered marker output MO3
* Buffered marker output MO4

1904 * Decoded M function MO5

1906 * Decoded M function MO6
1930 l Decoded M function M30
2045 * Change signal M code

* Clear stored spindle marker after CNC program interruption

‘th emergency off or output Ml9

ecoded M03/4/5 functions
reset during emergency off

l Decoded M function Ml 9
* Error message “EMERGENCYSTOP’ appears

Buffered marker MO3

Spindle stop through the input E 130 of the keyboard
l
3 l Change signal gear range code for S-analogue

5 * Status display and algebraic sign of analogue output MO3
* MO3 spindle clockwise
MO4/M14 end status display MO4
Buffered marker MO4

* Spindle stop through the input E 130 of the keyboard
l Change signal gear range code for S-analogue
2486 * Status display and algebraic sign of analogue output MO4

l MO4 spindle clockwise
Issue section me
PLGetandard proDram PS2 10
Nov mber 21. 89
Statebent list
’ Status displ y MO5

l y;; s;ana MQuge2Lltputof zero voltage
341 0 M 915 * Spindle stop through the input E 130 of the keyboard
342 Cl M 2043 * Change signal gear range code for S-analogue
343 = I M 2487 * Status display and algebraic sign of analogue output MO5
* Enabling t cutter spindle
344 0 M 922 * Buffered marker output MO3
345 0 M 923 * Buffered marker output MO4
346 ON M 2499 l lnhibii control loop spindle axis
347 UN M915 * Spindle stop through the input E 130 of the keyboard
340 ON 1 M 2005 l 1 = S-analogue is equal zero volt
349= IAl5 * Mill motor ON main spindle active
* *...I*.***.* ..f~..f...*..f*.““..~~.*...*...**..*..*..~..*....*..
* Strobe sign I formation for the M-code
* Acknowled ement of M-code
I
* Positive fla k from the M-strobe
350 u M 2045 * Change signal M-code
351 UN M 926 l 1” buffered marker change signal M
352 = 1lM 951 * 2”d buffered marker change signal M
353 u ‘M 2045 * Change signal M-coda

354 = M 926 * 1” buffered marker change signal M
* Start timer or the strobe signal formation

355 u M 951 * Zti buffered marker change signal M
356 UN : 58 l Timer 10 running
357 UN b 59 * Timer 11 running

358 UN T 60 ’ Timer 12 running
359= hl0 ’ Triggering of timer 10 MP 120 in 20 ms units
360= ill l Triggering of timer 11 MP 121 in 20 ms units
361 = 7 12 * Triggering of timer 12 MP 122 in 20 rns units
* M-AcknorJ dgement reset if no M-output

362 UN \ M 2045 ” Change signal M-code
363 R ‘M 2482 * Acknowledgement M-code
* ;z4er yat ‘for;: strobe formation if no M-output

k * Timer 10 running
365 R l Timer 11 running
366 R ; ::
I! * Timer 12 running
* Output of -strobe
367 0 MM 1903 * Decoded M-function MO3
368 0 IM 1904 * Decoded M-function MO4
369 0 ‘M 1905 * Decoded M-function MO5
377 0 M 1913 l Decoded M-function Ml3
371 0 M 1914 * Decoded M-function Ml4

372 U I, 2045 * Change signal M-code
373 = EM907 * Decoded M-functions M03/04/05/13/14
‘M 907 * Decoded M-functions M03/04/05/13/14

::: :N k 58 * Timer 10 running
376
377
U
= T
p ;;
*
”
Timer 11 running
M-strobe
leeue Section me
PUhtmdard pmgnm PS2 11
Nowmber 21. 89
Statebent list
of the above mentioned M functions M03/04/05/13/14

’ Decoded M-functions M03/04/05/13/14
’ Timer 12 running
* Acknowledgement of auxiliary function (M-function)
2462 *~Acknowledgement M-code
t of M function MOO/02/08/09/30
06 * Decoded M-function MO6
’ Decoded M-function M03/04/05/l3/14
45 * Change signal M-code
’ Timer 12 running
2482 * Acknowledgement M-code
t must be suppressed with MP 61 (MP 81= 0)

code with length and radius compensation for CNC program
must be suppressed with MP 157 (MP 157 = 0)
ng of tool in tool magazine
must be suppressed with MP 62 (MP 62 = 0)
ed selection via gear stages
must be suppressed with MP 78 to 85
stage for enalogue spindle of the main spindle drive

. *...*..**.. .*.*.*.*f*.*f..*.~*.*..*...*..‘...~..*~..”..‘..~~..
hange with output of MO6
Release tool 1” time Release tool 2”d time

El28 El28
key was not pressed

’ Ooen tool holder
* Tdol release key was NOT pressed with MO6 output
M function MO6
* Decoded M function MO6

* MO6 manual tool change

’ Tool release key was NOT pressed with MO6 output
* Tool release key was NOT pressed with MO6 output

l Tool is released in the spindle
* Timer 18 running (delav for opening the tool holder)

401 s 6 * Release tool hold& -
402 = l Triggering of timer 17 MP 194 in 20 ms units
403 R ::6 * Tool release kev was NOT pressed with MO6 output
404 s tvl905 * Tool is released in the spindle
Issue SectIon paw

PLGMndard pmgnnl 12
November 21, 89 PS2
Statehent list
* Deactivate &put tool release

405U El28 * Open tool holder
406 u w 906 * Tool release key was NOT pressed with MO6 output
407 u w 905 l Tool is released in the spindle
408 UN T 65 l Timer 17 running (delay for acknowledgement of M06)
409 R 46 l Release tool holder
410 R W 906 * Tool release key was NOT pressed with MO6 output
411 R w 905 l Tool is released in the spindle
412 S w904 * Acknowledgement of the M function MO6
’ Acknowledgement of the M function MO6

413 u w904 l Acknowledgement of the M function MO6
414 s M 2482 * Acknowledgement M code

415 R w904 l Acknowledgement of the M function MO6
. *...*.*.*.*f..***.*..****.**...**..*..*~..*”..*~.....~~..*.*.*...
l Spindle jog Aen gear changing with S analogue
416 U M 2043 * Change signal gear code for S enalogue
417 UN VI968 l Buffered marker T13 running

420 UN T * Timer 13 running (jog duration counterclockwise)
421 UN T :: * Timer 14 running (jog duration clockwise)
422 = T l Triggering of timer 14 MP 124 in 20 rns units
423 S VI E3 * Timer 13 running
424 U M 2043 * Change signal gear code for S analogue

425 U M 968 * Buffered marker T13 running
426 UN T * Triggering of timer 13 MP 123 in 20 ms units
427 UN T 1: ’ Triggering of timer 14 MP 124 in 20 ms units
428 UN T 61 * Timer 13 running (jog duration counterclockwise)
429 UN T 62 l Timer 14 running (jog duration clockwise)
430 = T14 * Triggering of timer 14 MP 124 in 20 ms units

431 R W 968 l Timer 13 running
432 UN M 2043 ’ Change signal gear code for S analogue

433 R T61 * Timer 13 running (jog duration counterclockwise)
434 R T 62 * Timer 14 running (jog duration clockwise)
435 u T61 * Timer 13 running (jog duration counterclockwise)

436 = LI 2490 ” Spindle counterclockwise for gear change with G-code - now always
437 U T l Timer 14 running (jog duration counterclockwise)
438 = M ii91 * Spindle clockwise for gear change with G-code - now always
. t*..**..**..l~..*...*~..~*..**~.”~”.~*~..~..~*..*...*..‘...~~.~~.
* Spindle pos tioning with the M-function Ml9
439 u M 1919 l Decoded M function Ml9
440 U M 2045 ’ Change signal M code
441 UN M 970 * Buffered marker for Ml9
442 u M 2204 ’ Set through MP 159 significance 4096
443= M 971 l Positive edge of Ml9
444U M 1919 l Decoded M function Ml9
445 u M 2045 * Change signal M code

446 = M 970 l Buffered marker for Ml9
Itsue Section
PLC-etenderd pmgrem
Nov mber 21. 89 PS2
Statednent list
axis => orient cycle

l Positive edge of Ml9
l Sat via MP 158 significance 8l92
l PLC positioning 5/spindle axis Isb
* Positive edge of Ml9

2205 l Is set through MP 158 significance 8192
2580 ’ PLC positioning S/spindle axis Isb
tioning of spindle axis

l Positive edge of Ml9
2584 l PLC positioning 5/spindle axis
2527 * Start PLC positioning spindle axis (only with G/M/S/T code)
2543 l Complement start PLC positioning spindle axis
* .*......a.* *...I..~~...~..*..**..*...~...**.*..*..~...*......
control loop of spindle axis
1900 l Decoded M-function MOO
1902 l Decoded M-function MO2
1903 * Decoded M-function MO3
* Decoded M-function Ml 3
1914 l Decoded M-function Ml4
2499 * Inhibit control loop spindle axis
positioning spindle axis

l Change signal M code
2543 l Acknowledgement M code
Ml9 as PLC positioning spindle axis

9 * Decoded M function Ml9
4 * Is set through MP 158 significance 4098
2482 l Acknowledgement M code
~..*~..*~..*~..*.*.*.*.~.....*...*..”...~..*~..*.
from the PLC program
ctive MP 62 = 5 ?I
2043 l Change signal gear code for S analogue
2924 l Error message 0
2044 * Change signal S code

2925 l Error message 1
ISWe sootion
PLC-standefd program
. Nowmber 21. 89 PS2 T
Statebent list
l Unused M ‘unction is active programming error

483 0 M 1900 l Decoded M function MOO
484 0 M 1902 * Decoded M function MO2
489 0 M 1908 ’ Decoded M function MO8
491 0 M 1913 l Decoded M function Ml 3
492 0 M 1914 * Decoded M function Ml4
493 0 M 1919 l Decoded M function Ml9
494 0 M 1930 * Decoded M function M30
495 = M 901 * M functions used
496 UN M 901 l M functions used
497 u M 2045 * Change signal M code

498 = M 2926 l Error message 2
* Tl-Code ou put active MP 61= 0 ?I

499 u M 2046 l Change signal tool code T code
500 = M 2927 * Error message 3
* T-2-Code oRput active MP 157 = 0 ?!

501 u M 2047 * Change signal 2”d tool code Td T code
602 = M 2928 * Error message 4
* f*.**..**..*,...*~.f*...*..~*.*~~.*~..*~***..**..*.~~~.~*..*..*..*
’ PLC Progran End
IEUle
Nov mber 21,89
ns of markers, in:puts, outputs and timers
of markers
stop and feed stop (inverted if MP 158 > 32768)

top key (inverted if MP 158 > 32758)
tiedgement of the M function MO6
been loosened in the spindle
key was NOT pressed with output MO6
function M03/04/05/13/14
ugh the input E 130 of the keward

h the input E 130 of the keYboard
r manual activation
spindle marker after CNC program interrupt
marker output MO3

marker output MO4
marker output MO5
ed marker change signal M
and X-axis in position
r actual position value to the nominal value X-axis
and Y-axis in position
r actual position value to the nominal value Y-axis
I and Z-axis in position
r actual position value to the nominal value Z-axis
I and 4m axis in position
er actual position value to the nominal value 4’” axis
I and 5’” axis in position
al position value to the nominal value 5’” axis
ed M function MOO
ed M function MO2
ed M function MO3
ed M function MO4
ed M function MO5
ed M function MO6
ad M function MO8
ed M function Ml4
ed M function Ml 9
ed M function M30
analogue is equal 0 volt
I
lsaue 8WtiOll me
PLC-standard program Ps3 1
November 21.89
I
Function of markers, Sutputs and timers
Functidn of markers
mode: Positioning with manual date input

mode: Program run single block
mode: Program run automatic
the reference mark
-through after power-on
peration (permanent operation. pilot)
-through after interruption of the PLC program
e ‘EMERGENCY OFF” is displayed
158 significance 4.096
168 significance 8192
em NC rapid traverse
ement store function for manual traverse
lement feed enable
lement manual traverse X+
lement manual traverse X-
lament manual traverse Y+
lement manual traverse Y-
lement manual traverse i!+
lement manual traverse Z-
lement manual traverse 4+
lement manual traverse 4-
wfedgement M code
display and algebraic sign of the analog output MO3
display and algebraic sign of the analog output MO4
display of the analog output MO5
op low active 0 = stop 1 = no stop
le counterclockwise for gear change with G code - now always
le clockwise for gear change with G code - now always
Issue section
PLC-standard .progmm P.33 ?F
Nov mber 21. 89
of markers, inputs, outputs and timers
markers
I
marker decoded M code output M1900-1999
positioning spindle axis (only with G/M/S/l code)

em manual traverse 5+
ent manual traverse 5-
lement control loop X axis

lement control loop Y axis
lement control loop Z axis
lement control loop 4* axis
I position value transfer to control loop X axis
I position value transfer to control loop Y axis
I position value transfer to control loop Z axis
I position value transfer to control loop 4* axis
ositioning 5/spindle axis Isb
sitioning 5/spindle axis
sitioning S/spindle axis
of markers, inputs, outpqts and timers
E 5 release for the tool axes

E 128
E 129
E 130
E 131
E 132
E 133
El34
E 135
E 136
E 137
E 138
E 139
E 140
E 141
E 142 ith manual operating mode
E 143 on counterclockwise with manual operating mode
E 144 r opening the position control loop
E 145 wledgement of the miscellaneous function (M function)
E 146
E 147
lesue section
PLC-stendard program PS3
November 21. 89
Fur%t~ons of markers, in~puts, outputs and timers
Functic)n of outputs
A 0
A 1
A 2
ii
A 6
A 15
A 16
A 17 die counterclockwise
A 18
A 19
A 21
Ieeue section
pLc-etendarcl pmgmm PS3
Ncv mber 21. 89
of markers, inputs, outputs and timers
T 10 ring of timer 10 MP 120 in 20 ms units

T12 ring of timer 12 MP 122 in 20 ms units
T 14 ing of timer 14 MP 124 in 20 ms units
T15 ing of timer 15 MP 125 in 20 ms units
T16 ing of timer 16 MP 193 in 20 ms units
T 58
T 59
T 60
T 61 (jog duration counterclockwise)
T 62 (jog duration clockwise)
T 63 15 running (delay feed enable)
T 64 16 running (delay spindle feed stop)
T65 17 running (delay for the acknowledgement MO6)
T 66 18 running (delay for the opening of the tool holder)
I
I8slm section mw
PLC-standard program PS3 6
November 21, 89
lists
eference list for markers
M
M
0
901
=
=
495
0 0 -168
UN- 496
ON-169
M 902
= 17 U -134 UN-196
M =
903 20 UN- 197
M 904
S -412 u -413 R -415
M 905
UN- 399 ‘S -404 u -407 R -411
M 906
s - 390 RN-396 U -398 R -403 U -406 R -410
M 907
= - 373 u - 374 u -378 UN- 384
M = - 10
908 U - 211 U - 215 U - 220 U - 225 U - 230 U - 235 U - 240
U - 245 U - 250 U - 255 U - 260 U - 291 U - 295
M 909 = -
M 910 -2: R - 276 U - 279 R - 282 UN- 284 S - 287 U - 289
M 911 Z - 278 u - 280 R - 283 u - 285 R - 288
M 912 = - 294 UN- 297 0 -302
M 913 UNi 293 = - 298 0 - 309
M 914 UN 135 S -136 U -140 R -141 U -143 UN-148 U -152 R -154
M 915 = 146 R - 155 UN-331 UN- 336 0 -341 UN-347
M 916 S 137 U -147 R -151 R -156 UN-164
=-
0 -3::
U - 36 U - 42 U - 46 U - 50 U - 54 U - 58
M 920 U - 200 = -204
M 921 U - 206 = - 210
M 922 S - 303 R -310 R -320 R -327 U -330 0 - 344
M 923 R - 304 S -311 R -321 R - 328 U - 335 0 - 345
M 924 R - 305 S -312 R -322 R - 282 U -340
M 926 UN- 351 = - 354
M 930 = - 44 UN- 64 U - 97 u -100
M 931 S - 45 U - 65 R - 69
M 932 = - 48 UN- 70 U - 104 u -107
M 933 S - 49 U - 71 R - 75
UN- 76 U -111 u -114
M 935
934 =S - :; u - 77 R - ai
M 936 = r 56 UN- a2 u -ii8 u -121
u - a3 R - a7
M 938
937 =S - El UN- 88 U -125 U - 112
u - a9 R - 93
M 940
939 S
= L- :A 0 -102 0 -109 0 -116 0 -123 0 -130
M 951 U - 301 U - 308 = -352 U - 355
M 968 UN- 417 S -423 U - 425 R -431
M 970 UN-441 = -446
M 971 = - 443 u -447 u - 450 u - 453
Ml900 0 -272 0 -313 0 -461 0 -483
Ml902 0 -299 0 -314 o-462 O-484
Ml903 0 -271 0 - 367 0 -463 0 -485
Ml904 0 -306 0 - 368 0 -464 0 -486
M 1905 0 -315 0 - 369 0 -465 0 -487
M 1906 0 -316 UN- 383 u -391 0 -488
Ml908 0 -265 0 -489
Ml909 0 -270 0 - 490
M 1913 0 - 266 0 - 300 0 - 370 0 -466 0 -491
M 1914 0 - 267 0 - 307 0 -371 0 -467 0 -492
M 1915 U -323 u -439 u - 444 u - 474 0 - 493
Ml930 0 r273 0 -317 0 -468 0 -494
I
lewe Seotion paw
PLGetenderd pmOnm 1
November 21. a9 Fsl
Cross reference lists
r
Cross eference list for markers
UN-337 0 -342 U -416 U -424 U -432 U -479
U - 274 U -318 U - 324 U -350 U -353 UN- 362 U -372

U - 392 U -440 U -445 U -469 U -471 U -475 U 497
M 2051
M 2052
M 2053 0 - 11
M 2054
M 2055 :- - 12
13
M 2056 :- - 9
M 2180
M 2184 UN- 15:
M 2185
M 2191 : - 27; 0 - 326
M 2204 U - 325 U - 442 U - 476
M 2205 UN-448 U -451
M 2206 U - 66 U - 72 U - 76 U - 84 U - 90
M 2207 XOq 16 XON 19
M244.8 R - 170 s - 201
M 2449 R - 171 S -207
M 2450 R - 172 S -213
M 2451 R - 158 RN- 159 S - 166
M 2456 R - 173 S -218
M 2457 R -174 S -223
M 2458 R 175 S - 228
M 2459 R 176 S - 233
M 2460 R 177 S -238
M2461 R -178 S -243
M2462 R -179 S -248
M2463 R -180 S -252
M2464 S -183 R -202
M2465 S -184 R -208
M2466 S - 185 R -214
M2467 S -160 SN-161 R -167
M2472 S - 186 R -219
M2473 S -187 R -224
M2474 S -188 R -229
M2475 S -189 R -234
M2476 S -190 R -239
M2477 S -191 R -244
M2478 S -192 R -249
M2479 S -193 R -254
M 2462 R - 363 S -382 S - 388 S -414 S -478
M2485 = -333
M2486 = -338
M 2487 = - 343
M2488 = -198
M 2490 = -436
M 2491 = -438
M 2492 = - 37
M 2403 = -
M 2494 = - ::
M 2495 = - 40
Ieslm SOOtiOhl me
PLC-atmdord pmgnm 2
November 21. 89 Ps4
Cross reference list for markers
3 ON- 346 R - 454 S - 470
91 S -127 RN- 131

126 UN- 129
M 2524 R 181 S - 258
M 2525 R 182 S - 263
M 2527 R 459 R -472 UN-477
M 2540 S 194 R - 259
M 2541 S 195 R - 264
Iv! 2543 R 460 s - 473
M 2544 S .- 99 RN- 103
M2545 S -106 RN- 110
M2546 S -113 RN- 117
M2547 S -120 RN- 124
UN- 98 UN- 101
M 2553
2552 = .- ;i UN- 105 UN- 108
M 2554 = -- 79 UN- 112 UN- 115
M 2555 = .- 85 UN- 119 UN- 122
M 2580 S -448 R - 452
M 2561 S .- 455
M 2582 S -456
M 2583 S -457
M 2584 S .- 458
M 2924 = .- 480
M 2925 = .- 482
M 2926 = .- 498
M 2927 = .- 500
M 2928 = .- 502
l&3UO SectiOll me
PLC-Mndtlld program 3
NW mber 21.89 I ps4
Cross eference list for inputs
,I
E 5
E 128 389 U - 397 U - 405
E 129 277 U - 281 U - 286
E 130
E 131
E 132 139 U - 199 U -203 U -212
E 133
E 134
E 135
E 136
E 137
E 138
E 139
E 140 247 U - 251
E 141
E 142
E 143
E 144
E 145
E 146
E 147 257 U - 261
Issue Seotlon
PIGstandard pmgmm PS4
Noumber 21.89
Cross ?ference list for outputs
A 0 = 22
A 24
A : i-
3 = ;:
:: 4 = 30
A 6 s -1
101 R - 409
-:
A 15 = I49
A 16 = -:
334
A 17 = -2
139
18 = -i !90
it 19 = -2
I93
A 21 = -:
177
No\
Cross eference l~ists
Cross rk ference list for timers
T 10 = -359
T 11 = -360
T 12 = - 361 UN- 379 UN- 386
T 13 UN-418 = -422 UN-426
T 14 UN-419 = -427 = -430
T 15 R - 62 RN- 63 S - 68 S - 74 S 80 S - 86 S - 92 0 - 94 UN- 162
T 16 R -132 RN-113 S -138 S -142 S 144 UN-144 UN-149
T 17 = -402
T 18 SN-394 R -395
T 58 UN- 356 R - 364 UN- 375
T 59 UN- 357 R -365 U - 376
T 60 UN- 358 R - 366 UN- 380 UN- 387
T 61 UN-420 UN-428 R -433 U -435
T 62 UN-421 UN-429 R -434 ti -437
T 63 0 - 95 UN- 163
T 64 UN- 145 UN- 150
T 65 UN- 408
T 66 UN- 400
ISSUB section
PLC-andard pmgrml
Now ber 21. 89 Ps4 7

TNC355 Lotse

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TNC355 Lotse

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

List of current i&sues

Sheet Issue Sheet Issue Sheet Issue

Sheet ISSW Sheet Sheet Issue

Sheet ISSUe Sheet Issue Sheet Issue

Sheet Issue Sheet Issue Sheet Issue

/ M3/1 February 8.90

Sheet Issue Sheet ISSUe Sheet Issue

Ul/l vember 21.89

Sheet I sue Shee Sheet

Sheet I sue Shes Issue Sheet ISSW

m/i hpril4. 89 P3/2’ April 4. 89 P4/9 Febrway 8.90

Pi/l P3/2 April 4, 89 P4/12 April 4. 89

PSI/l Uovembsr 21.89

PSVI Uovember 21,89

FS3/1 ovember 21, 89

, Ewl November 21,89

Purpom of db manual IN1

upbated to the ltiest technical kwel. it has been designed as a compilation

Each informs I sheet has the following layout

This paging I sm enables easy insertion of b supplementary and exchange sheets.

Number of Insen fdllowing Number of

We hope that {his manual will be of good servii

TNC 355B (Q) (Export version: TNC 355F (W)) Tl 1

TNC 355C (S) (Export version: TNC 355G (Y)) Tl 2

TNC 355CR (SR) (Export version: TNC 355GR (YR)) Tl 3

4&s contouring control with spindle orientation T2 1

5-axis contouring control without spindle orientation (until February 1989) T2 2

Differences between TNC 355 variants T2 3

Connector locations on LE 3558 (Q) T3 1

Connectors on closed loop board of LE 3558 (Q) T3 2

Connector locations on LE 355C (S) T3 3.1

Connectors on closed loop board of LE 355C (S) T3 3.2

Connector locations on LE 355CR (SR) T3 3.4

Connectors on closed loop board of LE 355CR (SR) T3 3.5

Connectors on processor board T3 4

Connectors for input/output board PL 300 T3 0

Connectors for TNC-keyboard unit TE,355 T3 11

Connectors for HEIDENHAIN machine operating panel MB 301 T3 13

Connectors for visual display unit BE 4128 T3 14

Technical data of PLC-inputs and outputs T3 15

Linear and btary encoders T4

Linear and rotan/ encoders for sinusoidalinputs T4

Linear and rotan/ encoders for squarewave inputs T4

Encoders with distance-coded reference marks T5 2

Cams for refe ence end position T5 4

Electronic hen wheel T6

Ieeue Section ml@

- lNC 3668 (F) = without PLC-board

Inputs and outputa for TNC 355Q (WJ

- TNC 366C (0) = without kc-board

Inputs end outputs for lNC 3668 (Y)

/Issue Section mle

- TNC 366CR (QR) = without PLC-board

Inputs end outputs for lNC 366SR (YR)

Logic unit Logic unit

TNC Keyboard unit TE 355A

ISSIE Section Page

Logic unit Logic unit

Id-Nr 242a07 Id.-Nr. 24184601

0 TNC Keyboard unit TE 355C

UIIIII Aug ‘89 ICI~Nr 24196402

Logic unit Logic unit

0 TNC Keyboard unit TE 355C